(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Children's Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Compter Science Volume 2 (Std11 - English Medium)"

Computer Science 

PLUS I 

Volume 2 : Practice 
Government of Tamilnadu 



© Government of Tamilnadu 
First Edition - 2005 

Chairman Syllabus Committee 

Dr. Balagurusamy E, Vice Chancellor, Anna University, Chennai 

Co-Ordlnator Textbook Writing 

Dr. Sankaranarayanan V, Director, Tamil Virtual University, Chennai 

Authors 

Dr. Elango S, Government Arts College, Nandanam, Chennai 
Mr. Malaiarasu P, Government Arts College, Nandanam, Chennai 
Dr. Ramachandran V, Anna University, Chennai 

Reviewers 

Dr. Gopal T V, Anna University, Chennai 

Dr. Krishnamoorthy V, Crescent Engineering College, Chennai 

Copy-Editor 

Ms. Subha Ravi, Director, M/s Digiterati Consultancy Pvt. Ltd, 
Chennai 

Cover Design 

Mr. Madan, Free Lance Graphics Designer 

Price Rs. : 



This book has been prepared by the Directorate of School 
Education on behalf of the Government of Tamilnadu 



This book has been printed on 70 G.S.M. Paper 



FOREWORD 

Computers are best known to their users through the 
applications. The important concepts that make computers work are 
presented in volume 1 . This volume introduces the basic skills required 
to develop applications using computers. Today, computers are being 
used in almost every aspect related to the living of individuals. Space, 
Medicine, Education, Transportation are some of the well known 
application areas of computers. 

There are many other applications such as accounting, banking, 
insurance that are providing valuable services to the users. To help the 
users overcome the difficulties in working on the hardware directly, 
operating systems were devised. This software makes it easy for the 
users to take advantage of the available hardware. It also helps in the 
faster development of the applications. 

There are many operating systems. This volume trains the 
students on Windows XP and Linux. The students must understand 
that every operating system has its strengths and weaknesses. Knowing 
the two popular operating systems will make the students better users 
of the computers. 

Operating system helps in the easy development of applications. 
The applications themselves are programs written in a specific 
language called 'Programming Language'. There are many 
programming languages with their own advantages and 
disadvantages. The students learn the C programming language in 
this volume. 

A programming language can never be learnt by reading a 
book. It is learnt by solving a number of problems using the computer. 
It is only the intense practice that helps the users in developing good 
applications. 



With the internet becoming a valuable source of information, it 
is important to know the ways of creating information for the World 
Wide Web. HTML is discussed in this volume as a simple and effective 
means of creating information on the WWW. The students must come 
out of the downloading habit and upload good content for the benefit of 
others. 

The authors, reviewers and editors of this volume have taken 
great care in ensuring the accuracy of the contents. The presentation 
is lucid with many illustrations. 

I wish the budding computer scientists a fruitful experience with 
the powerful tool called computer for the rest of their careers. 

(E BALAGURUSAMY) 

Vice Chancellor, Anna University, Chennai 
Chairman Syllabus Committee 





CONTENTS 




jr1 


INTRODUCTION TO WINDOWS XP 


1 


1.1 


What is Windows XP 


1 


1.2 


Evolution of theWindow Operating System 


1 


1.3 


The Mouse 


3 


1.4 


Logging In 


7 


1.5 


Log Off is at the bottom of the start -menu 


9 


1.6 


Working with Windows XP 


10 


1.7 


The Desktop 


11 


1.8 


The Start Menu 


13 


1.9 


Starting an application 


15 


1.10 


Windows 


17 


1.11 


Windows Dialog Boxes 


22 


1.12 


Help and Support Center 


26 


1.13 


Customizing Windows XP 


32 


1.14 


The Control Panel 


37 


1.15 


Applications 


44 


1.16 


Using Applications in Windows 


44 


1.17 


Working with Multiple Applications 


57 



Chapter 2 WINDOWS EXPLORER 67 

2.1 Files 67 

2.2 Data Organisation 68 

2.3 Windows Explorer 69 

2.4 Working with Folders 71 

2.5 Changing the View 74 

2.6 Creating a new Folder 77 

2.7 Selecting Files and Folders 80 

2.8 Moving and Copying Files and Folders 82 

2.9 Renaming Files and Folders 94 

2.10 Deleting Files and Folders 98 

2.11 Creating Shortcuts 102 

2.12 Search 106 



2.13 


The Run Command 


109 


2.14 


What is New in Windows XP 


110 


2.15 


Guarding Against Virsues 


116 


sr 3 


LINUX 


123 


3.1 


History of Linux 


123 


3.2 


Logging in /Logging out of Linux 


124 


3.3 


The Linux File System 


127 


3.4 


Types of Users 


130 


3.5 


Directory Commands 


132 


3.6 


Other Commands 


138 


3.7 


File Commands 


142 


3.8 


File Systems: IVIount and Umount 


157 


3.9 


VI Editor 


163 


3.10 


Shell script 


171 


3.11 


Variables 


173 


3.12 


Expressions 


176 


3.13 


Command Substitution 


178 


3.14 


Features of Linux 


180 



Chapter 4 PROBLEM SOLVING TECHQNIQUES 

AND C PROGRAMMING 183 

4.1 Problem Solving Techniques 1 83 

4.2 Introduction to C Programming 207 

4.3 A Sample C Program 222 

4.4 Storage Classes 239 

4.5 Conditional Statements 243 

4.6 Control Statements 250 

4.7 Arrays 257 

4.8 Structures 274 



Chapter 5 INTRODUCTION TO WEB DESIGN 284 

5.1 Introduction 284 

5.2 Elements of Hypertext Markup Language 285 

5.3 Heading section 286 

5.4 Body section 289 

5.5 Creating Web pages with microsoft front page 306 



CHAPTER 1 

AN INTRODUCTION TO WINDOWS XP 

1.1 What is Windows XP 

Windows XP Professional is a user-friendly operating system 
designed for popular use. The most important advantage of using Win- 
dows is its GUI (pronounced as GOOYEE). It is said that the right side 
brain is good in processing the pictures and is the seat of creative 
thinking and intuitive ideas whereas the left side brain is good at logi- 
cal thinking. It is belived , before the introduction of GUI, users of OS, 
mainly used their left side brain, keeping their right side brain idle. It is 
felt, Windows effectively uses the left and right side of the brain. Many 
other operating systems (including MS-DOS) use Command Line In- 
terface ( Interface lets any one connected with the machine. Actualy 
interface is a ( virtual ) connection between two entities. For example , 
TV remote is an interface which connects a user and a TV ). In this 
kind of interface, you have to remember cryptic commands and type 
them without mistakes. To make things worse some operating sys- 
tems are case-sensitive also (LS , Ls, IS or Is are not same). A simple 
spelling mistake or missed space will result in an error. Windows dis- 
plays all the information on the screen and all you have to do is to point 
and select using the mouse, with its GUI. A picture is worth a thousand 
of words, as they say. 

Windows XP Professional combines all the positive aspects of 
its Microsoft predecessors. This satisfies all the users who want to 
prevent frequent crashing of software and want to use easy techniques 

1.2 Evolution of the Windows Operating System 

Windows XP is the latest version in the series of Windows prod- 
ucts in the Operating System.The Apple introduced the concept of 
Windows but Microsoft popularised the Windows concept. The first 
version which become reasonably popular was Windows 3.0. For the 

1 



first time, Windows came with file management utilities and other sys- 
tem tools. Soon, several applications that were meant to be used with 
Windows appeared in the market. Within a few years, Windows started 
being used in offices, homes and business establishments. Windows 
3.0 was followed by Windows 3.1 , which offered better features. Win- 
dows 3.1 used a window called Program Manager to launch applica- 
tions. Almost at the same time, Microsoft introduced Windows 3. 1 1 for 
workgroups. Now, Windows could be used on a LAN-based network- 
ing environment. None of these products was an actual operating sys- 
tem of its own. They were just programs that worked with MS-DOS. 

The next major development came with the introduction of Win- 
dows 95. Unlike earlier versions of Windows, Windows 95 was a com- 
plete operating system. Now, Windows was no longer restricted by the 
conventions of MS-DOS. 

It was easier to start applications in Windows 95. The Program 
Manager of Windows 3.1 was hidden from the user. This was replaced 
by new ways of starting applications and opening documents. It also 
gave the user better facilities to manage application windows, new 
context-sensitive short-cut menus, improved networking features and 
soon. 

After Windows 95, came Windows 98 with a bang. Windows 
98 offered many new utilities at that time, improved the performance 
and support of the latest hardware technologies of that time. It also 
provided several features and utilities that allowed easy access to the 
internet. 

In the meantime Microsoft produced Windows NT(New Tech- 
nology) independent of 9x(95 or 98) versions. Windows NT family pro- 
duced Windows NT versions 3.5,3.51 ,4 each of which came in a work- 
station version and a server version. Some users thought Windows 9x 
crashed often, that is they felt Windows 9x lacked stability. Some oth- 
ers thought Windows NT lacked compatibility. That is they cannot run 
some of their favourite programs in NT which could run successfully in 
Windows 9x. The windows 9x line gave a new offspring Me (Millen- 

2 



nium edition) which provided some of the much needed stability. NT 
line of development resulted in Windows 2000 professional. Windows 
2000 professional increased the compatibility of its parent. The never 
tiring Microsoft development team, at last brought the stability of NT 
and the compatibility of 9x, under one roof, which resulted in Windows 
XP Professional through Windows XP home. Windows XP professional 
is designed to satisfy the insatiable demand of the business commu- 
nity but its immediate predecessor, Windows XP home targetted home 
users. At the time of writing this book, Microsoft is to introduce win- 
dows 2003. The never ending race of ever increasing demand and the 
quest for satisfying them may continue leading to the vocation of more 
and more sophisticated with user-friendly products. 

1.3 The Mouse 

If you want to extract work from the computer, you have to input 
data. The input can normally be provided by the keyboard and the 
Mouse. You know the keyboard. If you want to move from one window 
to another, unless you know the keyboard combinations, it will be very 
difficult to move one window to another by using keyboard. But the 
mouse intuitively provides the idea. 

As you have learnt in the earlier section, Windows XP uses GUI. 
That is, all information is displayed on the screen. You can use it by 
simply pointing to it and selecting. To do this you use the mouse. The 
mouse is an input device that you move on a flat surface (usually a 
mouse pad.). When you move the mouse, a pointer moves on the 
screen. This pointer, called the Mouse Pointer, is used to point to things 
on the screen. The mouse has either two or three buttons on the top. 
The left button is the most often used. Described below are mouse 
actions that you need to know to use Windows XP effectively. 

Note - Click on and Click are used interchangeably for example 
you can write Click on the button or Click the button. Both forms are 
used in this chapter. 



i) Move: Moving the mouse is simply dragging the mouse on the 
mouse pad so that the mouse pointer moves in the direction 
you want, without touching the buttons. This action allows you to 
point to things on the screen. 

ii) Click: Clicking is used to select objects on the Windows screen. 
To click, ensure that the mouse is pointing to what you want and 
press the left button of the mouse once and release the button 
immediately. 

iii) Double-click: Double-click is most often used to start appli- 
cations. To double-click, point to what you want and press the 
left button of the mouse twice in quick succession. You should 
get used with Double-click; because new comers to the com- 
puter field find it difficult to cope with Double-click in the begin- 
ning. 

iv) Click and drag : This mouse action is used to move an object 
from one place to another. When you click and drag an object, 
the object moves along with the mouse pointer. To click and 
drag, hold the left button of the mouse down and move the mouse 
to the place wherever you want. 

1.3.1 Mouse after right click 

The right click: Right Mouse button gains a lot of significance 
now-a-days. If you right click on an item, you will be provided with a 
context sensitive menu ( context sensitive menu changes its contents 
depending on the situation ). This is also called short-cut menu You 
can experiment with that menu. The context sensitive menu provides 
almost all the facilities offered by menu as well as toolbars. You can 
change left mouse button into right mouse button and vice versa. In 
this case the left click becomes the right click and vice versa. This 
action may be helpful to the left handed people. 

1.3.2 Moving the mouse pointer via the Keyboard 

Again you can create the effect of all the above operations by 
keyboard operations. In the beginning, people are very much attracted 
by the use of mouse, but when they have to write lengthy programs, 

4 



changing mouse and keyboard frequently is irksome . Therefore those 
people who are experts in typewriting prefer to make use of keyboard 
to bring the effect of mouse click. 

The following keys can duplicate the mouse operations. If you want to 
use your keyboard to do the work of the mouse, you have to follow 
these steps: 

(i) Click the Start button 

(ii) Select the Control Panel in the menu and click it. 

(iii) Choose the Accessibility Options icon and click on it. 

(iv) It opens a screen , click on Accessibility Option under pick 
a Control Panel icon. 

(v) Open the Mouse tab. 

(vi) Activate use MouseKeys check box if it is not already acti- 
vated. 

Windows XP allows you to move the mouse pointer by using the arrow 
keys on numeric keypad of the keyboard. 

Note 1 : Make sure that you have Num Lock turned on. 

Note 2: MouseKeys do not work with the separate arrow-key keypads 

found on most modern keyboards. 

Besides the basic arrow movements, you can also use the numeric 
keypad keys outlined here. The following table gives you the equiva- 
lent keys for mouse operations. 

Key Equivalent Mouse Action 



5 


Click 


+ 


Double-click 


/ 


Select the left mouse button 


* 


Select both mouse buttons 


- 


Select the right mouse button 


Insert 


Lock the selected button 


Delete 


Release the selected button 



These keys can be used as follows: 

tf To double-click an object, use the arrow keys to move the pointer 
over the object, press the slash key (/) to select the left mouse 
button, and press the plus sign (+) to double-click. 

tf To right-click an object, use the arrow keys to move the pointer 
over the object, press the minus sign (-) to select the right mouse 
button, and press 5. 

tf To drag-and-drop an object, use the arrow keys to move the 
pointer over the object, press the slash key (/) to select the left 
mouse button, press Insert to lock the button, use the arrow keys 
to move the object to its desired destination, and press Delete 
to release the button and drop the object. 

^ To click an object, use the arrow keys to move the pointer over 
the object, press the slash key (/) to select the left mouse button 
(if it isn't selected already), and press 5 to click. 

^ To right-drag-and-drop an object, use the arrow keys to move 
the pointer over the object; press the minus sign (-) to select the 
right mouse button; press Insert to lock button; use the arrow 
keys to move the object to its destination; and then press De- 
lete to release the button to drop the object, and display the 
context menu. 

Use MouseKeys when Num Lock is on. These options deter- 
mine the relationship between MouseKeys and the Num Lock key. When 
On is activated (this is the default), for example, Windows XP will use 
MouseKeys whenever you have Num Lock is on. If you then turn off 
Num Lock, you can use the regular arrow keys. 

Show MouseKey status on screen: When this check box is 
activated, Windows XP displays the MouseKeys icon in the system 
tray. Double-clicking this icon opens the Accessibility Properties dia- 
log box. 



1.4 Logging In 

If the computer is not already turned on, turn on the computer. If 
you are the lone user you will be taken into the Windows XP desktop 
directly. You can continue your work. 

Suppose there are multi-users, you will be shown a welcome 
screen similar to what is shown in figure 1 . 1 .The aim of logging in is to 
take you to Windows XP desktop. 




Fig 1.1 Logging screen 

You can select your account by clicking the appropriate icon or 
username. (Icon is a small picture / image representing an applica- 
tion. Icon literally means a statue.) If you do not have a user account, do 
not worry, there is guest account which you can make use of. 

You all know PC means Personal Computer. A single person or 
his family used a computer earlier which made them to store his / their 
data secretly. When many different people start to work in the same 
computer, secrecy cannot be maintained. We cannot afford to provide 
each one with a computer. Such proposition is a costly affair. How about 
making the people to believe that they are working in their own com- 
puters even though they work in the same computer? 



Note - Windows XP is used to refer Windows XP Professional 

Suppose you do not have password you will be taken directly to 
the Windows XP. Suppose you do have a password (otherwise it will 
defeat the purpose of having User Account. User Accounts determine 
who the actual users are. Others may enter in to the system as Guest 
user ) an entry box appears, click the entry box and enter your pass- 
word into it. Caution must be taken to enter your password because it 
is case sensitive. Your 'A is different from 'a'. Your password is deter- 
mined by the administrator. The administrator governs the computer. 
Consult your teacher for further details. 

This trick is achieved by a user account. If you have a user ac- 
count in Windows XP Professional, you will be provided with a sepa- 
rate My Computer, My Documents, and some other folders. The only 
drawback is that your work can be watched by the administrator or 
administrators, he / she / they has / have special powers to control the 
activities related to that personal computer with Windows XP Profes- 
sional. 

If you have forgotten your password (which you cannot afford, 
especially if you are the administrator, in this case nobody can help 
you) and if you select the help icon for hint, the password hint appears 
(if you have one). 

If you commit mistake while you enter your password, you will 
be prompted to enter your password again, with some help from the 
computer. When you are in the welcome screen, Ctrl + Alt + Del key 
combinations, provide you the dialog box for entering the username 
and password. If you successfully enter your password, you will be taken 
to Windows XP Desktop. If your computer is on a network, you may be 
shown a dialogue window that requests your ID and Password. Pro- 
vide them. 

1.5 Logging Off and Shutting Down 

Logging off is the process of closing the desktop and returning to the 
Windows Log In screen. 

8 



Suppose you want to come out of your work, you can do either of the 
following two. You can close your session or you can shut down the 
computer. 

Suppose you want to Log off without shutting down the com- 
puter, follow the following steps : 

(1 ) Save all your unsaved documents 

(2) Click the Start button (or press Winkey or Ctrl + Esc; 
Winkey pronounced as Win-key that lies between 
Ctrl and Alt keys, the Start menu will be displayed. 

(3) Click the Log off button (or press L or I key) 
Log Off is at the bottom of the Start menu. 

(4) You will be shown Log off Windows. Click Log off 
button ( or press L or I key ). refer fig.1 .2 



Log Off Windows j 


•V 


Lb 


b 


i 


Switch Us 


r 








1 






^^^1 Cancel ]| 



Fig 1 .2 Log Off Screen 

Note: Do not try to use Switch User button. It may lead to dangerous 
consequences. It may lead to fatal error; you should restart your com- 
puter. You may lose unsaved data in this process. 

Suppose you want to shut down the computer you have to follow these 
steps,alert the other users at that time. 

(1 ) Save all your unsaved documents 

(2) Click the Start button. 

9 



(3) Click Turn Off Computer button ( or press U or u key).You will be 
Shown Turn Off Computer Window with three options, along with 
cancel. 

(4) If you have changed your mind not to shut down the computer click 
Cancel, button at the bottom. 

(5) If you want to shut down the computer click Turn Off button ( or 
press U or u key). 

Some computers especially new ones will automatically shut 
down the computers. Other computers will show you ' It is now Safe to 
Turn off your computer' message ( It is specific to the Configuration ). 
You can switch off the computer. Alternatively you can press the power 
key from the keyboard, if that key is available in your computer. You 
can also Turn Off the computer by the key combinations of Alt+F4 and 
then click Turn Off button. Another method for turning off is given in 
customizing the Taskbar. 

(6) Suppose you have dual operating system, if you want to switch 
over to the other operating system then you can click Restart button. 
This will be useful when you install new software also. 

(7) There is yet another Choice Stand By. This may be very useful for 
notebook computer. This action will save power. If you have Hibernate 
facility, you can make use of it. Place the cursor on Stand By button 
and press Shift key. Stand By will change into Hibernate. If you click 
the Hibernate button (Shift + Click Stand By) and Switch off computer, 
the computer can be started comparatively quickly, in the next time, 
when you open the system. 

1 .6 Worlting with Windows XP 

When you switch on your computer, Windows XP automatically 
starts loading from the Hard disk, if it is your default operating system. 
While loading, it performs a series of diagnostic tests to check the 
memory and hardware components such as keyboard, disk drives etc. 
Once the diagnostic tests are over, Windows XP starts loading files 
and graphics necessary for the GUI interface. This takes a few 

10 



minutes, after which it displays a screen, similar to Fig 1 .3. 




Fig 1.3 The Desktop 



The opening screen of Windows XP is called the Desktop. 
The desktop of your computer may look different from what is seen in 
Fig 1 .3. This is because Windows XP allows you to change the 
appearance of the desktop. 

Your computer may or may not be connected to other comput- 
ers. Computers that are not connected to any other computers are 
called Stand-alone computers. Two or more computers can be con- 
nected together to form a network. If your computer is in a Network, 
you have to do some more actions to Start your computer. 

1.7 The Desktop 

In Windows XP, the basic working platform is the Desktop. Let 
us understand the desktop with an example. When you study, you use 
a table, don't you? Usually, you keep all the books and note books that 
you may need on the table in front of you. You may also keep your 
pencil box, colour box, a dictionary and a few other things on the table. 
When you want a particular notebook, you simply reach out to that note- 
book and pick it up. Window's desktop is very similar to the tabletop. 
All the programs in your computer are available on the desktop. Here, 
instead of your hand, you use the mouse pointer to point to things and 
select them. 

11 



The desktop has several Icons. Each icon has a label telling you the 
name of the application it represents. My Computer,My Documents, 
My Recent Documents are some of the standard icons that you 
can see on the Windows desktop. Each of these icons represents an 
application that is frequently used. For example, My Computer allows 
you to see the contents of your computer, install and use new software 
and hardware. Apart from the standard icons provided by Windows, 
you can also create icons for the applications that you use frequently 
and place them on the desktop. 

The desktop also contains the Taskbar as in Fig 1 .4 The taskbar is 
usually a narrow strip, present at the bottom of the screen. On the left, 
it has the Start button. When you click on the Start button, the Start 
menu appears on the left side of the screen. Using the Start menu, 
you can start any application that you have currently installed. Next to 
the Start button is the Quick Launch Toolbar. One advantage of us- 
ing Windows XP is the easy access it provides to the Internet, through 
the quick launch toolbar which contains icons that allow you to select 
some commonly used Internet-related applications. On the extreme 
right is the Systems Tray that contains the Clock and icons for other 
utilities . The empty space between the Ouick Launch Toolbar and the 
Systems Tray is used to display buttons for the applications currently 
being used. 



Ouick Launch 
Toolbar 



Notification Area 



.' start (E '* 



W$^\Mi^^^ 



start Button 



Fig 1.4 The Taskbar 



12 



1.8 The start Menu 

The Start menu acts as a launch pad for most of the things you 
want to do with Windows XP. Using this menu, you can start applica- 
tions, change the settings of your computer, find files, get help and do 
much, much more. The Start menu appears when you click on the Start 
button on the taskbar. 

You can have two different Start menus, one is your usual Start 
menu and another one is Classic Start menu, which is explained later. 



e 



Ini:?mei:E',plorer 



1*^1 E-rrtail 

L^^l Outlook E.:presf 



Windows Nedia Player 
Windows Novie Maker 
] Tour Windows XP 
Adobe Photoshop 6.0 



; My Documents 
I ^ J) My Recent DocuniEnts t 
^ My Pictui « 
J My Music 
V]l My Computer 



Q" 



a 

-^%\ Files and Settings Transfer ^ ^^'P ^^ ^^P"^^' 
af^ Wizard 



All Programs [> 



'«B Printers and Faxes 



^ 




Fig 1.5 The Start Menu 

You can select an option from this menu by using the mouse. As 
you move the mouse pointer over the options, they get highlighted. 
Simply click the mouse when the option you want is highlighted. 

All Programs on the Start menu has an arrow on the right. A 
right arrow 

^ , whether you are in Start menu or Classic Start menu indicates 

the presence of one or more levels of submenu. A submenu is shown 
in Fig 1.6 

13 



I^' 





■ .<> 


aoojm.nB 


HO- 


Settnngs 


M^ 


Sfearch ' 


M'*' 


Help and Support 


S'^B 


Run.. 


Bis 


LPHOff Butberflv-.- 


BB 


TUfn Off computer.. . .. 



Fig 1.6 All Programs option on the Start menu leads to a submenu 

Note - The particulars in the screen may differ from your screen but the 
general features are the same. 

To select an option on the submenu, slide the mouse pointer sideways. 
One option on the submenu will get highlighted. Now, move the mouse 
pointer up and down till the option that you want is highlighted and click. 
Note that some of the options in the submenu also have an arrow. Se- 
lecting these options will display another submenu as shown in Fig 1 .7 







il 


A^Lil^lH Y 








a 


nitU ' 








a 


Ibktit^Kfjf-i.u P 








d 


t.f«hllAiW(iri^»^.u*r U P 








3 &;T«OMWSill " 








3 *"""-"-"•■ ► 




1^' -•• 


■^IMtLJWftf 




H'— -■ 


J"*»'i 


fa 


Mi^rviin*^ Fi D^-Ulit n h 






^^1 








3 
11 


E.^r : 


^B ^'., I'Nufhi'^ 


' 


Bg^ '^"^ 


' 


3 


r'.MM^f.■^ 


[i^ VfcT'T^' (^W^fTH* 


B^ —J 


■ 






W| '"U JWi* WSifl 




Hf^ ^^ 


a^^r 


-J 


favdWOi: k 




E|.C7 tlf«i.>- 








HC9 tMfXff^iVtt^- 




■9 Jfl tyn <^ iDtrojrci .. 


1^ 


mrdMFhdi PUy«r 









Fig 1.7 Start, Programs, Accessories menus 



14 



1 .9 Starting an Application 

Windows XP allows you to start an application in many ways. The most 
frequently used ones are: 

i) Using icons on the desktop 

ii) Using the Start menu 

Using icons on tlie Deslttop: The easiest way to start an applica- 
tion is to use its icon on the desktop. When you want to start an appli- 
cation, look for its icon on the desktop. If you find the icon, double-click 
on it to start the application. 

For example, to start the card game Solitaire, look for its Short-cut 
on the desktop and double-click on it ( For creating Desktop shotcuts 
refer 2. 11 .2 ). The game appears on the screen as shown in Fig 1 .8 




I ^lOf '^.^'^■'-M 



Fig 1.8 Application started using an icon on the desktop 

Using the Start Menu: Though Windows XP gives you a few icons 
on the desktop and allows you to create your own icons for other fre- 
quently used applications; it is not possible to have icons for all appli- 
cations on the desktop. To start applications, for which icons are not 
available on the desktop; you can use the Start menu. Click on the 
Start button on the taskbar and select the option that you want from any 
one of the menus or submenus that appear. 

15 



For example, to start the card game Solitaire 

(If you have not made a Shotcut), click on the Start button, and then 
click on All Programs. Select Games from the submenu, which ap- 
pears, then click on Solitaire. (Figure 1 .9) . 

You can also perform the above operation by keyboard operations 
alone. 

(1 ) Press Ctrl + Esc, or Window Key 

(2) Press P , this will highlight All Programs ( Character P is 

underlined. 

(3) Press the Enter key, submenu will be displayed. 

(4) Press G 

(5) In the final submenu press S and Enter key. 

Now you are in the card game Solitaire. Suppose you want to select 
an item of Microsoft in the submenu of programs, repeated use of M(or 
m) key will take you to different items that start with letter m (M). After 
the desired item is selected then follow these steps as given above. 





^ N.^. Office Document 






1^ Open Office Document 






», Windows Cai:alQQ 






■e=3 Accessories 






'^ Adnbe r 






igTfl Adobe Acrobat 4. □ " 






US) CorelDRAW Graphics Suito 12 ' 






>m CorelDRAW SA 11 






IE3 EPSON 






^ Learner 


^ Freecell 




y-r^- Hemera Photo-Obiects S0,000 . 




ijeq ihte) . 


t^ Internet Backgammon 


1 


■M ^-^n-draFlash^ 

ir^ Ma^^nedia FreeHand 9 

'^ Nero ► 


« Internet Checkers 
» Internet Hearts 


^^p jfii=epN^ Q^piWEi 


^Iffid.,^^ 


il-ri MokaPC 5uil:e • 
'C3 MTICD-Mal^r ► 


^ InCernet 5pade5 


^^^ wmaaws-novra m^i^. 


.ra PCMACLAN 

IC3 ProMagic • 




^^^ Touf WfrncJoWs-JiSF' 
_^M Files and SetHngs Tr 


'r-"] Sonic ■- 
1^ SoundMAX r 
TTfl Startup > 


]^ Spider Solitaire 


I^^H Adobe Phohoslncip 6. 


•Q WinZip >■ 
» AdobE Illustralrof CS 




m Sol^a,,^ 


jSS Interneb Eaiplorer 




^f- Sprder Sclihaire 


^3l Vrfindoi^s l^ledia Player 

i|"J3 Ms OFficB • 












^^f\ l^ni ■Tipr HD 1 Tu3Tf<iFf-!liimi 




'■•.^Swfi. : « 


<a 


1 





Fig 1.9 Using the Start menu to start Solitaire 

16 



1.10 Windows 

When you are using a table to study, you keep all the books you 
need on the table. Each book occupies some space on the table. 
Smaller books occupy less space and bigger books take up more 
space. The books may even overlap each other partially or completely. 
You can use these books by moving them around, closing some, open- 
ing others and so on. By doing this, you can ensure that the book you 
want is easily available to you. 

Windows XP allows you to work with different applications in 
the same way. When you start an application, it occupies a rectangular 
area on the desktop. This rectangular area is called a window. You 
can have several windows on your desktop at the same time. These 
windows may be big (as big as the desktop) or small (as small as a 
button on the taskbar), overlapping others or one beside the other. Fig 
1.10 shows you the desktop with three windows. 



Q' it >"»«* 




Fig 1. 10 Desktop with three windows 



17 



1.10.1 Parts of a Window 

To work efficiently with windows, it is important to learn to man- 
age them well. Windows XP allows you to move them around, change 
their size, and hide them from your view and so on. Let us use the 
application WordPad, to manage windows well. 

WordPad is one of the applications that comes as part of Win- 
dows XP. It is a simple word processor - you can enter and store text 
using it. To start WordPad, click on Start ->AII Programs ^Acces- 
sories -> WordPad (figurel. 11). The above command means first 
clickthe Start button, then click All Programs in the menu , then click 
Accessories from the ensuing submenu, and finally click Wordpad in 
the last submenu that appears. 



CS J New Office Documeni: 
^^ Open Office Document 
r Windows Catalog 




t^; 



Wlnclov^^ Movie Mak. 
ij tif^l Tour Window^XI 
jJi^ Rb&^nd 5ettlngE Tr^ 

VK" 5pldef solitaire 
I 1^9! Adobe Photoshop 5 



Adobe 

Adobe Acrobat 4.0 

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 12 

CorelDRAW 5A 11 

EPSON 

Games 

Hemefa Photo-Objects 50,000 

Intel 

Macromedia Flashi 5 

Macromedia FreeHand 9 

Wero 

NokJa PC Suite 

MTI CD-Maker 

PC MACLAN 

PfoMagic 

SonTc 

■SoundMAX 

Startup 

WLnZip 

Adobe Illustrator CS 

Internet Explorer 

Oi-jtlooK Express 

Remote Assistance 

Windows Media PJayer 

Ms Office 



Accessibility 

Communications 

Entertainment 

System Tools 

Address Book 

Calculator 

Command Prompt 

Notepad 

Paint 

Program Compaiiibllity Wizard 

Scanner and Camera Wi^Vifd 

Synchronize 

Tour Windows XP 

Windows Explorer 

Windows Movie Maker 




Fig 1.11 Starting WordPad 
18 



^ Document - WordPad 



file 'Ejl: View insert Format Help 




Fig 1. 12 WordPad window 



The Wordpad window opens. Windows XP is designed in such a way 
that all windows are similar. The methods used for sizing, moving and 
closing these windows are also the same. 

At the top of each window is the Title Bar. As the name indicates, the 
title bar tells you the name of the application. There is an execption to 
this general rule. Even though Windows Explorer is an application, it 
will not show its name in the title bar (You see Windows Explorer in Art 
1.19). It also contains three of the following four Sizing buttons, at the 
top of the right corner. 



m 



Minimize Button: The minimize button is used to reduce 
the size of the window to a button on the taskbar. Remem 
ber that minimizing a window does not close a window. It 
simply hides it from you. Fig 1 .13 shows the WordPad 
window minimized. 



19 




Fig 1. 73 Minimized WordPad window 



m 



Maximize Button: Clicking on this button enlarges the 
window to fill the entire desktop. Fig 1 . 1 4 shows the 
WordPad window maximized. 



DSB ai^ • B <«. 


- m J- uM >!• a e 


^^W»N 


S ■ ■ ■ •■ ' '■-'-' ■ 


. < . nh- . n . 'i . ■< . n . 1^1 It-i .til 1 11- 






H^ii^KKn^HH 




^i^b^hI 



F/g 7.74 Maximized WordPad window 



Restore Button : This button is used to restore the win 
dow to its original size (that is, to the size before you 
maximized it). 



20 




Fig 1. 15 Restored Wordpad window 




Close Button: This button is used to close a window. 
Re member that closing a window will remove its con 
tents from memory and screen. 



Below the title bar is the Menu Bar. This displays the different menus 
available to you. When you click on a menu option, say Edit, all the 
sub-options appear as a drop-down menu (Fig 1.16). You can select 
any one of them by pointing to it with the mouse pointer and clicking it. 






Fig 1. 16 Edit menu 

One or more Toolbars appear below the menu bar. Toolbars consist 
of icons representing shortcuts for the most frequently used commands. 

21 



For example, to save a file, you can click on the File menu and 
select Save from the drop-down list. An easier method would be to 
click on the Save Icon on the toolbar. ( Ctrl + S (or Ctrl +s) combina- 
tions also will save the file ). If you save for the first time, you will be 
prompted to enter the name of the file. 

1.10.2 Moving a Window 

Often, while working with multiple windows, you need to move a 
window to different area of the desktop to see one of the underlying 
windows. You do so by clicking and dragging the title bar of the win- 
dow. 

Note : You cannot drag a Window when it is either maximized or mini- 
mized. 

1.10.3 Changing the size of a Window 

Every window has a Border that can be used to change its 
size. Point to the window border with the mouse. The mouse pointer 
changes into a double-headed arrow. Click and drag this arrow to in- 
crease or decrease the size of window. 

To change the length and breadth of the windows simultaneously, 
you have to move the mouse pointer to either of the bottom corners of 
the window. Now, the mouse pointer changes into a double headed 
arrow as said above. Click and drag the arrow to increase and de- 
crease the length and breadth of the window simultaneously. 

1.11 Windows Dialog Boxes 

Windows XP is an inter-active operating system. Its GUI at- 
tempts to display as much information on the screen as possible. It 
uses dialog boxes to display the information and allows you to either 
type in your response or select from a list of choices. Listed below are 
some of the controls used in dialog boxes. 

22 



Text Boxes: Text boxes are used to allow the user to enter 
some data. Every text box Is accompanied by a prompt or label that 
tells you what should be entered in that box. Fig 1 .1 7 shows a window 
with a text box. 



PilSifWDrd 



Enter password to operrfile 
E:\EXTRAS\Bio, doc 



OK 



Fig 1. 17 A window with a Text box 
List Boxes: These boxes display a list of choices. You can select the 
one you want by simply clicking on it. 



Background' 

'J Ascent 

r" Autumn 

ij Azul 
^Bliss J 
^ Blue Lace ^e 
^ Coffee Bean 



«■ I 



Imh 



Fig 1.18 A List Box 
Drop-down List Boxes: These are list boxes which have a small 
black inverted triangle at one end. When you click on this triangle, a list 
of options drops down in front of you. You can select an item from this 
list by clicking on it. This is used when there is limited space. 



Files of tvpe: 


AllFoimat* 


W 




Photoshop I".PSD.".PDD1 


*; 




BMPr.BMP:".RLE) 


-=' 


•ComDLfi&welFCGIFl 


^^H 


Photoshop EF'S (".EPS) 


-■ 




PhotoshopDCS10r.EPS) 


— 




Photoshop DCS ZOr EPS) 






EPS TIFF FrevieivC EPS) 






Filmstrip r.FLtdi 






JPEl5r.JPLr-.iPE) 






ljme.icPDFr.PDF.'P['p;i\l) 


* 



Fig 1.19A Drop-down List Box 



23 



Radio Buttons: Fig 1 .20 displays a dialog box with 2 Radio buttons. 
These buttons are used to display multiple options. You can select one 
by clicking on the small white circle to the left of the option. A black dot 
appears at the center of the circle to indicate a selected option. In ra- 
dio button option, you can select only one of the buttons. If you select a 
second radio button, the previously selected button is automatically 
deselected. If you have to answer multiple choice questions with sev- 
eral options in which you have only one correct answer then Radio 
Buttons are the suitable candidates. 



Advanced settings: 



Check Boxes- 



Radio Buttons 



Files and Foldeis 

Automaticallv seaich for neWmk foldefs and priniers 

IJisplav (iie si:e infcirmation iti folder tips 

Displav simple foldei view in Esploiei's Folder* Jist 

□ Displaj) the contents of sjistern foldeis 
Display) the full path m [he address bar 

□ DisplajJ I he full path rn the title bar 
Q Do not cache thumbnails 

2j Hidden files.and folders 

Do not show hiddetl files.and iolders 

Show hidden files and folders 
Q Hide extensions foi known file types 



i 



I 



2l 



Fig 1. 20 Radio Buttons and Check boxes 



Check Boxes: These boxes are used to enable or disable options. 
The options in these boxes have small white squares to their left. Click- 
ing on a square enables the option and clicking on it again disables it. 
A tick mark in this square indicates that the option is enabled and a 
blank square indicates that the option is disabled. You can select any 
number of check boxes in the given option. 

Buttons: The OK and Cancel buttons are the most frequently used 
buttons in Windows XP. When you click on a button, the related com- 
mand is carried out. For example, if you click on the OK button in a 
dialog box, Windows will accept your choices and close the dialog 
box. Clicking on Cancel will make Windows ignore the changes and 



24 



close the dialog box. Some buttons are also used to display another 
dialog box. 

Tabs: Tabs are used to display different sets of options in dialog boxes. 
Fig 1 .21 (a) and 1 .21 (b) display a dialog box with five tabs. Clicking on 
each, displays an entirely different set of options. Fig 1 .21 (a) shows 
the dialog box with the second tab Desktop selected. In Fig 1 .21 (b), 
the third tab, Screen Saver has been selected. 



Themes I Desklop Screen Saver Appearance Settings 






River Sumida 




A 




SartaFe Stucco 








Soap Bubbles 








Stonehenge 

m 

Vorlec space 




.1 

- 










Customize Desktop.. | 












OK 


1 Cancel 



Pdsiticir. 
^ Stretcli 



Themes Desktop Screen Saver I Appearance II Settings ' 




Screen saver 



I vl Settings Preview 

Wait:| 10 i| minutes [^Qnresume.displayWelcomescreen 

Monitor power 

To adiust monitor power settings and save energy, 
elicit Power. 

I Power. . 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ] [ Apply | 



Fig 1 .21 (a) Desktop Tab is Fig 1 .21 (b) Screen Saver Tab is 

Selected Selected 

Sliders : Sliders are used to enter a value by physically moving a 
marker over a slide. Fig 1 .22 shows a dialog box with sliders to 
increase or decrease volume levels. 



Otfcre HEJp ] 


V/^,|,|mf>Cnn^^^.| 
EdldN H 

a- -J- ^ 


Wave SW Syrlh CD Pfayer Line In 


FCBeep 


Balaroe 

fl> -J- <fi 


Balance: 

:i> -J- -Si 


Balance- Balance 


■1 


Balance: 

i> - - 4 


ihrh- 


Volume: 


pj 


Valyme. 


Volume-. 


Volume; 




V'oLime. 


a Mute all 


DMt^e 




Djjula 


.V: 

□■Mute 






.V 


Soundr^A^ Digital Audio 



Fig 1.22 Sliders 



25 



1.12 Help and Support Center 

Even though this chapter tries to help you to make use of Win- 
dows XP Professional, it is impossible to include all the facilities avail- 
able in Windows XP Professional in a tiny chapter. How can you ac- 
cess the remaining facilities offered by Windows XP Professional ? 
As you know, self-help is the best help. The Microsoft provides lot of 
help in its Help and Support Center in Windows XP. 



Actually Windows "Me" introduced Help and Support System 

by substantially improving the help methods available in earlier ver- 
sions of Windows. Windows Me, by combining many more external 
resources, introduced a Web-style interface to replace old-type Help- 
file interface of the earlier versions of Windows. Windows XP improved 
the help facilities of Windows Me remarkably. If you have an Internet 
connection, you need not use Internet Explorer to access the Microsoft 
knowledge Base. You can search it directly from Help and Support 
System. 



® Help and Support Center .^^^^^^^^^K Q@^ 


^ Back ^' ^ [J W" ■jjf' Favorites ^ Hiilors [Jj Support ,/j Options 


Search ^^^^^HH ® Help and Support Center 

Set search options Windoi^s XP PtoFessional 


Pick a Help topic Ask for assistance 

^^^^i^B • What's new in Windows XP |^ Invite a Friend to connect to your computer v^ith Remote Assistance 

^^^H^ ^ • Music, video, games, and photos 

^^^ft^if . Windows basics 13 ^^^ support, or Find inpormation in Windows XP newsgroups 

^- . Networking and the Web Rjck 3 taSk 




^^^CHHH^^^^^^^^V ^ 




^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^HS^^^^H^Mchoo^e I'rom a the updates 
^H^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^g±l|||IUU||pi:ir your 




^^^H||gKU||uu|||^Hy|np|gg||^_^|^|||^ 




^^^^^H • Printing and Taxing rv_i '^ 
^^■^ . P„r„m.nc..ndn,.lnl=n.nc= DlO /OU knOW? Upd.lln,,., 

^W|^ • Hardware 

^"^P • FiHing a problem 




^B "^^M 





Fig 1.23 Home page for Help and Support Center 

26 



Microsoft knowledge Base is an online database of questions 
and answers Start -» Help and Support (or press F1 key when you 
are in Windows XP) will provide with the help relevant to the program. 
Always make use of Winkey + F1 key combinations in order to avoid 
ambiguity. 

This will take you to the Help and Support Center of XP with- 
out fail, wherever you are. The Home page may slightly be different 
from what you see here because of customization (Customization is 
the process of changing default setting to suit your needs and tastes). 
Except in dialog boxes, each Help and Support Center window has 
a title bar, which shows Help and Support Center as the title along 
with the Minimize, Maximize and Close buttons. 

There is no Menu bar. It has a Toolbar, taking you to go around 
(navigate or travel) the Help topics. So it is called Navigating toolbar. 
Below the Navigating toolbar appears the Search bar. Below this bar, 
information is provided. If you are lucky enough, you can get the de- 
sired help by clicking a topic from Pick a Help Topic which may solve 
your problem. 

If you pick a topic from the Ask for Assistance that will take 
you either to Remote Assistance or to Support and Windows XP 
news groups. Any one of these may solve your problem if you have a 
Internet connection. But beginners may find it difficult to understand 
the help provided by the above. So they should be content only with 
what they have with internal assistance . You should make familiar with 
Pick a Task and "Did you Know?" by yourself. If the item for which 
you need help may not be available at the home page, then enter the 
word or phrase into the search text box. Then press ENTER key or 
click the Go button (a) situated to the right of Search text box. Sup- 
pose you have entered "view pictures" in the Search text box. Help 
and Support Center displays Search Results pane on the left side 
and adds a toolbar containing Add to favorites. Change view. Print 
and Locate in Contents buttons in the right pan. Search results are 
shown below this Toolbar. This Help page is context sensitive. 

27 




13 Windows Glossary 

rn Windows keyboard shortcuts o 

a Tools 

[3 Go to a Windows newsgroup 



Fig 1.24 Windows Basics Help 

If you have not customized the search results pane, it is divided 
into Suggested Topics, Full Text Search Matches and Microsoft 
knowledge Base. If you do not want to make use of Microsoft Knowl- 
edge Base or if you do not have Internet connection, you can hide 
Microsoft Knowledge Base. You can see only the first two options, the 
procedure for hiding Microsoft Knowledge Base will be given later. 

Suggested Topics: Suggested Topics are keyword matches 
(these topics contain the word / words that you have entered in the 
Search text box as keyword / keywords). These topics are further clas- 
sified into Pick a Task and Overviews, Articles and Tutorials. 

Full-Text Search Matches: Full-text matches are topics that 
contain the word /words you entered into the Search text box , into the 
body of the text of the help topics. Here the word / words will not be 
treated as keyword / keywords. 

Microsoft Knowledge Base: The results found in this category 
are from Microsoft Knowledge Base. Use it if you like. You should have 
Internet connection; in order access this knowledge base. 



28 



If you want to display the help content, first click the category 
and click a search result of interest, the result is displayed in the right 
pane. Some help text pages will have highlighted and colored text. 
You see their uses below. 

Highlighted text: The matched word / pharse with what you had 
entered is highlighted. The highlighting serves no other purpose. If you 
click on those highlighted word / pharse nothing happens. If highlighted 
words occur often in a text, it is an annoying experience. You can get 
rid off those highlighting if do not like it. You will be shown the proce- 
dure later. 

Blue underline text: If you click the blue underline text, it will open the 
item associated with the text. 

Green underlined text: If you click on this term it will provide the 
definition of the term. 

Already you have seen that three or four activated useful buttons on the 
right pane. Now you are going to see their usefulness. 

Add to Favorites: If you see a help page and if you feel that will be 
useful to you for future reference, just click Add to Favorites button, 
that page is immediately copied and Windows XP Professional will 
announce that your wish is fulfilled. If you want to see the contents, you 
click Favorites in the navigation bar. In the left pane under the Favor- 
ites heading, opens what you have stored so far. If you double click 
any one of the topic, the contents will be displayed in the right pane ( 
you can also single click on any one of the topic and click Display but- 
ton at the bottom ). You can use rename or remove buttons as 
usual. Rename is used to change the default name. This topic is ex- 
plained later. 

Change View: In order to reclaim more space, you can hide the left 
pane by clicking the Change View button. If you again click Change 

29 



View button, the left pane will appear once again. You can also per- 
form the above action manually. You can drag the right pan to the left, 
so that a right pan may occupy the entire screen. 

Print : you can print the help pages with this button. 

Locate in Contents: If you click the Locate in Contents, it will dis- 
play a table of contents for help and support in the left pane. The head- 
ing of the current help page is highlighted. 

Help Index Button: Use if you know the first letter or first few letters 
of an item to be searched. You may feel a list that starts with that letter 
/ letters may be helpful. If it is the case you click Index button on the 
toolbar. The left pane turns into an index. 

Under this you can find Type in the keyword to find prompt, below 
this, there is the text area. You enter a letter or few letters into the text 
area, the index will automatically change to word / words that started 
with the entered letters. You can click the appropriate entry from the 
list and then click the Display button or double click the desired item. If 
necessary use the vertical scroll bar available at the right end of the left 
pane. 



Q» 


■J li en* 


rrMM *i>K.-. 


I <'^itr>^ 


^1 (Pin 




^ 


^ma^ 










C Help ar 


d Sjp 


port Cer 


ter 



t iftjrngt.,*!!, ^ (nt>4t!e>-' ^ 




Fig 1.25 View Folders i-ielp 
30 



Now concentrate on the navigation bar, refer Fig 1 .25 

Back: This is the first button in the navigation bar from left, after navi- 
gating to another page in help, if you want to move to the previous help 
page, clicking Back button will take you to the previous page. This 
process can be repeated until the back button is disabled. This button 
is disabled in the beginning. 

Forward: This is the second button in the navigation bar from left. 
After you click the back button the forward button is enabled. You move 
forward by clicking the Forward button until it is disabled. This button 
is disabled in the beginning. 

Home: This is the third button from left in the navigation bar. If you 
want to return to the home page, click on the Home button. You 
have already seen Index and Favorites buttons available in the navi- 
gation bar. 

History: This stores a list of help pages you have visited recently, in 
the left pane. As usual double clicking any title will redisplay that help 
page in the right pane. 

Support: It provides the other forms of technical supports available 
from Microsoft . 

Options: This button is helpful in cutomizing the Help and Support 
Center. 

1. Click the Options button on the navigation bar. Help and Sup- 
port Center displays the Options screen. 

2. Click Set search options in the left pane. Help and Support 
Center displays the set search options in the screen. 

3. If you want to change the number of search results provided by 
Help and Support Center , you change the number in Return 
up to 15 results per provider by a number less than 1 00. The 
default value is 15. 

31 



4. If you want to get rid off search highlights then deselect it. You 
make the other desired changes. If you do not want to access 
Microsoft Knowledge Base again you deselect it. 

5. Similarly by clicking change Help and Support Center options 

in the left pane you can make the other changes. 

Getting Help Online: 

If you want to get help from Microsoft's web site, first of all you need an 
Internet connection and web browser. Microsoft website includes sup- 
port for all the products, not just windows XP. Suppose you want to 
have help for " view folder " you have to give the command as 
XP+view+folder. The blank spaces should be replaced by +signs. XP 
indicates, you want to get help from windows XP in order to get help 
you have to undergo the following steps. 

I.Make sure you are on line and use your web browser to go to 
http://search . microsoft, com. 

2. In the Search text box that appears, you type XP+view+folder in 
Choose a Microsoft.com location, enter United State. Click the Go 
button. After some time the results will be displayed. 

1.13 Customizing Windows XP 

One of the most attractive features of Windows XP is that it allows you 
to customize the desktop. You can change the appearance of the desk- 
top by changing the background, adding icons, moving icons, moving 
and resizing the taskbar and so on.You can also add Screen Savers. 

1.13 .1 Customizing the Taskbar 

The Taskbar is usually at the bottom of the desktop. But you can move 

it easily to any of the four sides of the desktop, unless it is locked. To do 

so , point the mouse pointer to any empty area on the taskbar. If you 

have opened many windows, then there will not be empty space on the 

taskbar. In this case you can make use of the space occupied by the 

32 



clock. Click and drag the taskbar to wherever you want it to be. Fig 
1.26 shows abroad taskbar at the Top. 



You can also change the size of the taskbar. Point to the edge of the 
taskbar. The mouse pointer will change into a double-headed arrow. 
Click and drag the mouse to increase or decrease the size of the 
taskbar. 




Fig 1.26 A broad taskbar 

Taskbar Settings - Right click on the empty area of the taskbar. If 
there is no empty area right click on the clock. From short cut menu, by 
selecting Toolbars, you can add or delete tools. If you click Address, 
Address toolbar is created and increase its size by dragging with 
mouse. Then you can enter any command, that will be executed either 
directely or accessing the Internet, you can arrange the windows with 
Cascade Windows, Tile Windows Horizontally and Tile Windows 
Vertically. Show the Desktop is an substitute for Show Desktop 
button. With clicking Task Manager ^Shutting down, you can perform 
Turn off , Restart, Hybernate, Stand by and Switcher user the com- 
puter. If you want to make the position of Task bar fixed, click Lock the 
Taskbar, then a tick mark appears against it. Now the taskbar cannot 
be moved. If you click on Properties, you will be shown Taskbar and 
Start Menu Properties. It opens under the Taskbar tab, you custom- 
ize it to suit your needs and tastes. If you open Taskbar and Start 
Menu properties under Start Menu tab, and if you want to change 

33 



Start Menu into Classic Start menu, click Classic Start menu's Radio 
button, and click ok . A screen similar to the starting screen of Win- 
dows 98 will be shown. 




1.27 A Screen similar to the starting screen of Windows 98 

1.13.2 Changing the Wallpaper 

Wallpaper is the background display that appears on your desktop. 
You can choose from several standard Wallpapers that are available 
as part of Windows XP. You can also use a picture that you have drawn, 
scanned or copied from somewhere. To do so, right-click anywhere in 
the blank area of the desktop. The menu shown in Fig 1 .28 pops up. 



Arrange Icons By 
Refresh 



Paste 

Paste Shortcut 

Undo Delete 



Ctrl+Z 



New 



Properties 



Fig 1.28 Choose Properties to change Wallpaper, 
Screen Savers etc. 



34 



Click on Properties. The Display Properties dialog box appears. 
Select Desktop tab ( second from left ) which will present a figure simi- 
lar to the one shown below ( Fig 1 .29 ). 



Appearance Settings 



lackground: 

Ij. River S 

2J Santa Fe Stucco 
i ~^ Soap Bubbli 



^ 




A 


■ 1 b™»... I 



p Tulip 
!*^.Vcirtec space 

I Customize Desktop... | 



Position: 
Stretch 



Fig 1.29 Display Properties dialog box 

Browse through the list of wallpapers and click on the one you want. A 
preview in the top half of the window shows you how the wallpaper will 
look. Click on Apply and then on OK. 




m 




Fig 1.30 Desktop with Setup wallpaper 
35 



1.13.3 Using Screen Savers 



In old monitors, if you left the images on the screen unchanged 
for long, the characters would burn-in, leaving a permanent impression 
on the screens. To avoid this screen savers were used. Constantly 
moving technology has improved so much that screen savers are no 
longer necessary. But, they are still popular mainly because they are 
fun. To use a screen saver, click on Screen Saver tab in the Display 
Properties dialog box. Click on the drop-down list box just below the 
Screen Saver prompt. A list of available screen savers appears as in 
Fig 1.31 



Display Pmperties 



I Themes., Desktop Screen Saver Appearance ■ Settings ] 




Windovos XP 



Settings PreyieiAi 



(None) 

3D FlowerBox 

3D Flying Objects 



3D Text 

Beiiers 

Blank 

Marquee 

Mv Pictures SlideshoiAi 

Mystifv 

Starfield 

WindovosXP 



ume, display Welcome screen 



Dower settings and save energy. 



PoiAier.. 



Cancel 



Fig 1.31 List of screen saver available 



Select one. A preview appears in the top half of the window 

36 



Display PrapertieB 



VllSi. 



ThemesJI Desktop! Screen Saver ' Appearance |! Settings | 




Screen ^aver 



I V ' Settings P^evie^^| 



Wait: 10,15.1 minutes [T^] On resume, display Welconne screen 



Monitor po^^ier 



~-^--m^ 



To adjust monitor power settings and save energy, 
clicli Power. 



I Power.. 



OK 



Cancel I Apply 



F\g 1.32 Preview of 3D Pipes Screen Saver 

You can specify, in the Wait text box, the number of minutes the com- 
puter should wait before displaying the screen saver. According to the 
Fig 1 .32, Windows will wait for 1 minute before displaying the screen 
saver. 

you can protect your PC by giving Password to the screen saver. 
Now, whenever your computer is idle for some time, Windows will au- 
tomatically activate your screen saver. To remove the screen saver, 
just move the mouse or press any key on the keyboard. 

1.14 The Control Panel 



The Control Panel allows you to install and manage the different hard- 
ware components attached to your computer. You can open the Con- 
trol Panel window by clicking on the Start button, and then Control 
Panel. 



j-tii Tnternet 

^fe^ I.-<T3i net ir ■ plal &l 


My Documents 


|f^ Microsuft Word 


^ ^ - , My Recent Documents ^ 
1 ^. My Pictures 
My Music 


,ff fj Tour Windovvs XP 

j ^ WordPad 

^t3ffl Adobe Photoshop 6.0 


^■jjl My ComiHJter 


n 


ii-ontj rj| ■f^rrai 1 


1 ™™ 

', printers and Faxes 

If ^ , Help and Support 
Search 


'•"JjCi. Windows Movie Maker 


Files and Settings Transl^er 




• Wizard 


-■ Run . . . 


JL^J Solitaire 


1 


All ProQr-ams 1 




^^^■^ — 


, lk^:3EB^i«L»i.tniESi^^.T.:.V^i:.i 




-- .start ' m t> 





Fig 1.33 Opening Control Panel 



You can also access Control Panel from My Computer window. Double- 
click on My Computer icon on the desktop and select Control Panel 
from the icons displayed in the My Computer window. 



O*" 



■B9 

w 

-a- 



£*•- 



Control 
Panel 




Fig 1.34 My Computer window 



38 



The Control Panel window opens in front of you. Winows XP 
Proffessional provides completely a new look to the Control Panel. It 
provides two views to Control Panel. The default view is Category 
View and the other one is Classic View. Classic View is similar to 
the one available in Windows 98. Both views are shown in Fig 1 .35 
(a), Whatever be the view all the Control Panel applets work in the 
same manner (applet is a small program). Many dialog boxes have 
new names, new tabs and new functionality. If you are in Category 
View you can click on Switch to Classic View. This will take you to 
the Classic View. When you are in Classic View, you will be shown 
Switch to Category View. If you click on Switch to Category View, 
you will be taken to Category View. Category View Fig 1 .35(a) and 
Classic View Fig 1 .35(b) of the Control Panel are shown below. 



0» OJP^t-S- 



t 





Fig 1 .35(a) Category View 



Fig 1 .35 (b) Classic View 



As you can see, the Control Panel window displays several 
icons. Using these icons, you can modify the system and hardware 
settings of your computer. Listed below are a few of these icons and 
their description. 

39 



Accessibility 
Options 



Date grid Time 



This allows you to adjust your computer settings for vi 
sion, hearing and mobility deficiency 



This allows you to set the date, time and the time zone 
for your computer 



dL This allows you to change the appearance of your desk- 

^^ top, such as the background, screen saver, colour, font 
Display size and screen resolution. 



^p This allows you to add, change and manage fonts on 
Fonts your computer. 



This allows you to customise your keyboard settings such 
Keyboard as tho blink rate and character repeat rate. 



Meuae 



This allows you to customise settings such as the button 
configuration, double click, speed, mouse pointer and 
motion speed. 



•^ 



This allows you to install printer and fax Printer and helps 



Printers and you add nOW OnOS. 

Faxes 



— This allows you to customize setting for the display of 

LqnTuage^?,'' languagos, numbers times and dates. 

I This allows you to change user account setting and 

*^ password to people who share this computer 

User Accounts i" i" i" i" 



40 



You are provided with more icons in the Control Panel. To know how 
to utilize them, rest the mouse pointer for one or two seconds on the 
Icons, you will be shown their usage by means of pop-up message. 

Summary 

♦ Windows XP is an operating system. 

♦ The opening screen is called the Desktop. It contains icons and 
Taskbar. Icons are small pictures representing applications. The 
Taskbar has the Start button, the Quick Launch toolbar and the 
Systems Tray. 

♦ The Start menu acts as a launch pad for most of the applica 
tions in the computer. 

♦ You can start applications using the icons on the desktop or the 
Start menu. 

♦ The rectangular area on the desktop that is used by an applica 
tion is called a Window. 

♦ Every window has a title bar with sizing buttons, menu bar, tool 
bar and borders. 

♦ A window can be moved, resized or closed. 

♦ Windows XP allows you to customize the desktop and taskbar. 

♦ The Control Panel allows you to install and manage different 
hardware and software components in your computer. 

♦ It is always a good practice to shut down the computer properly 
before switching the power off. 



41 



Exercises 

I. Fill in the blanks 

1. Windows XP is an 

2. Windows XP uses a 

3. Clicking on the Start button opens the 

menu. 

4. The clock is displayed on the 

5. The also has buttons representing ap- 
plications currently being used. 

6 is one of the options on the Start 

menu. 
7 are constantly 

moving images that appears when the computer has been idle 

for some time. 

8. You can move a window by clicking and dragging 
its 

9. The dialog box is used to 

change the wallpaper, screen savers, etc. 

1 0. The icon on the Control Panel allows 

you to view, add or remove fonts. 

11. State whether the following are True or False 

1 . Windows 4.1 was a very popular version of Windows. 

2. You can password protect your PC through screen saver. 

3. The contents of memory are not saved when you shut down your 
computer. 

42 



4. When you minimize a window, it automatically closes. 

5. In Windows XP you have to type all the commands. 

6. The Start button is always visible on the desktop, 

7. Windows uses dialog boxes to display information. 

8. Check boxes are used to enable and disable options. 

9. You can access the Control Panel from My Computer. 

1 0. A minimized window can be restored by clicking on it. 

III. Answer the following 

1. What is Windows XP? 

2. Write a short note about the evolution of Windows operating 
system. 

3. What are the advantages of using Windows XP? 

4. What is a mouse? What are the different mouse actions that 
you are familiar with? 

5. What is desktop? What are the things you see on the desktop? 

6. How can you customize the desktop? 

7. What is the Control Panel? Describe briefly some of the icons 
found on the Control Panel. 

8. What is Shut down? Why should you shut down your computer 
properly? 

9 Describe the different parts of a Window. 

1 Write a short note about the different kinds of dialog boxes that 
you use in Windows. 



43 



1.15 Applications 

All information In Windows is stored as files. These files are 
broadly classified into two categories: 

i) Application Files 
ii) Document Files 

Application Files: Application files (also called Program files) are 
files with which you can do something. For example, files that allow you 
to draw and paint, enter and save text, calculate and play games are 
application files. 

Document Files: Document files are files that are created by the user 
using an application. In the last chapter, you learnt how to start an 
application. You can start an application by clicking on its icon on the 
desktop or by using the Start menu. When you do this, the application 
appears on the screen in a window. At the same time, a button 
representing the application also appears on the taskbar. This button 
stays on the taskbar as long as the application is active and disappears 
only when you close the application. In this chapter, you are going to 
learn about some of the commonly used applications of Windows XP. 
You will also learn how to start multiple applications, how to switch 
between them and how to transfer data between them. 

1 .1 6 Using Applications in Windows 

Several useful applications come as part of Windows. Using them, 
you can perform a wide variety of tasks. Discussed below are some of 
the commonly used ones 

1.16.1 MS-DOS 

Before the introduction of Windows, MS-DOS was one of the very 
popular operating systems among PC users. Hundreds of DOS-based 

44 



applications were available in the market. To start such programs or to 
use any DOS Command, the Command Prompt option of windows 
can be used. Perform Start -> All Programs -» Accessories 
Command Prompt. 



□ J New Office Document 
Open Office Document 
Windqws Catalog 





^^liici'Dsart Word 



-Jill Touf Windows f^F 
r^N Adob? Photo^ntip 6, 
\m WordPad 
*SjjL Windows Movie Mat 

u A\ f^'s^ 9nd 5-ettlngs Tt' 
'/9 'A^isard 

lal 5ollbair& 



k 



Adobe 

Adobe Acrobat 4,0 

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 12 

CorelDRAW 5A 1 1 

EPSON 

Games 

Hemera Photo-Objects 50^000 

Intel 

Macronredia Flash 5 

Macromedia Freehand 9 

Nero 

Nokia PC Suite 

NTI CD-Maker 

PC MACLAN 

PrpMagir 

Sbnic 

SoundMAX 

St-artup 

Win^ip 

Adobe illustrator CS 

Internet Explorer 

Outlook Express 

Remote Assistance 

Wiridows Media Player 

Ms Office 



31 Accessibility 
^) Communications" 
_ Entertainment 
^1 System Tools 
_J Address Book 
Calculator 




U ■ Program Compatibility Wizard 
I Scanner and Camera Wizard 
Synchronize 
Tour Windows XP 
r Windows Explorer 
I "'"^ Windows Movie Maker 
1 WordPad 




Fig 1.36 Getting IVIS-DOS Window 



A window as shown in Fig 1 .37 appears on the screen. 



45 




Fig 1.37 MS-DOS window 



The MS-DOS window is like any other window; you can move, 
minimize, maximize or close it like any other window. Notice that after 
the copyright message, the window displays the familiar C:\> prompt. 
You can use any DOS command here. 





.- — 


— " 






n "^1% ftd lEt^nX^ 






rib^ O^-Wfl 


HHBKfi 






<DIHJ 




mHiifHts 








Docuinent3 ancl S 




<DIB> 




PvuHi'ani Files 






e 


CONFIG. SVS 






& 


AUTOEKEC.BflT 




<DIB> 




s(il2ksp3 




■a)iB> 




auarkKPress 1.1 


t 






BOOTEK.LOG 




<e B> 




TenpEI4 










<D B> 




Hitrnn 




■CD B> 




TEST E001t-±i-±2 


-yww 



: -iB.Btuas^rtjp 



hk 



Fig 1.38 DOS window with tfie dir command 
46 



Start the MS DOS application and try out the Dir command. Also try out 
any other DOS commands that you are familiar with. Close the 
application window after you finish. 

1 .1 6.2 Clock and Calendar 



Windows has an in-built clock, which is usually displayed on the taskbar. 
To change the date or the time, double-click on the clock on the taskbar. 
The Date and Time Properties dialog box appears on the screen. To 
change the date or time , you should have special privilege. Only 
administrator can undertake these activities. 



Date anil Time Properties 



Date & Time i Time Zone ]■ InterRet Tima 

Dace Time 



•1 2005 



^^Q^^^^^^^^B 






1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


7 


8 


9 


10 


11 


12 


13 


m 


15 


16 


17 


18 


19 


20 


21 


22 


23 


24 


25 


26 


27 


28 













Current time zone: India Standard Time 



[ OK I I Cancel 



Fig 1.39 Date and Time Properties dialog box 

On the left half of the dialog box, the current month's calendar is 
displayed. To view the calendar for some other month, click on the month 
and drop down list box and year spinner box and select the month and 
year you want. 

To change the time, click on the digital clock seen on the right. Highlight 
the hour, minute or second by dragging the pointer over it. Increase or 
decrease the highlighted value by clicking on the up and down arrows 
in the box. Note that the time in the analog clock also changes 
correspondingly. Analog clock is the ordinary clock with hour hand 
minutes hand and second hand. 

47 



Date and.Tlmq Properties 



Date St Time | Time Zone || Iribernei: Time 
Date 



I I 









1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


7 


8 


9 


10 


11 


12 


13 


\E 


15 


16 


17 


18 


19 


20 


21 


22 


23 


24 


25 


26 


27 


28 













* * 



|o.6:0£:£0 |SI 



Current time zone; India Standard Time 



Fig 1.40 Clock showing a different time 
Click on OK after you finish. 

1.16.3 Calculator 

The Calculator is a useful application that comes with Windows. It can 
be used to perform mathematical and scientific calculations. To start 
the Calculator, execute the following action. 
Start -> AllPrograms -^ Accessories ^Calculator. 



^ C^ICLll^tOJ 


r* 1 


■PI 


Efllt yjevj hiein' 


D. 1 




m t;^r| -p^c.f 


1 


'! i'4\ 7 S 


9 


sqrt 


:• 5 


6 


X 


■ .- 1 2 

■ _ 


3 


l/y 


1... +/- 


J I 





Fig 1.41 The Calculator 



48 



The Calculator can be used in one of the two modes - Standard mode 
or Scientific mode. Fig 1 .41 displays the Calculator in the Standard 
mode. As you can see, this calculator is very similar to an ordinary 
calculator. You can use the keyboard and the mouse to enter numbers 
and operators. If you are using the mouse, click on the number and 
operator buttons. The numbers that you have entered and the results 
will be displayed in the display bar just below the menu bar. If you have 
selected Digit grouping under View menu, the numbers are separated 
by comma following the European convention. The numbers that appear 
to the left of decimal places are separated by comma for every three 
digits starting from the right . The leading comma (if any) is 
suppressed. 



To use the Calculator in the Scientific mode, click on the View menu 
and select Scientific. Fig 1.42 shows the Calculator in the 
Scientific mode, with statistics box. 



P Calculator 



Edit Viel^ [ielp 



OHek ©Dec O0c( OBin Degrees Radians O^'ads 



Dlnv DHvp 






H nnn □ hhhui 



mnJ 



BEDD GD HEHUDE] 
□DQD 03 EEHDEH 
DDD □ HSnnGH 
DDDH 



I E I : I [. I E I 



3 



Fig 1.42 The scientific calculator 



49 



To calculate sum, average and S.D of given numbers execute the 
following steps 

1) Enter the first number. 

2) Click Sta button. 

3) Click RET 

4) Click Dat button. 

5) Enter the next number. 

6) Click Dat button. 

7) Repeat step 5 and step 6 until you exhaust all the numbers. 

8) Click the s button. 

9) The Standard Deviation of the entered numbers is displayed. 

1 0) Click Sum you will be shown sum of the numbers entered. 

1 1 ) Click Ave you will be shown average of the numbers entered. 

Note: If you click Sta button, you will see Statistics Box. The entered 
numbers are in Statistics Box 

If you click the LOAD button of Statistics Box, the highlighted number 
in the display area of the Statistics Box will be loaded into the display 
area of calculator display area. 

If you click CD button of Statistics Box, the highlighted number in the 
display area of Statistics Box will be deleted from the list of numbers. 
If you click the CAD button of Statistics Box, all the entered numbers 
are deleted. 

1.16.4 Paint 

Paint is an application that lets you draw and colour pictures. To start 
Paint, click on Start -»AII Programs^ Accessories-* Paint 

(Fig 1.43). 



50 





m 


NeiAj Ol^l^ice Documenl^ 












<^ 


Open Oi=i=ic& Document: 












'— 


WD-idoiAis Cat.alog 














■0 


Accessibiliiiy 
EZommunications 






LJ 


Adobe 






7=1 


Adobe Acrobal: 4.D 







Enlierliainment 


h 




ta 


CorelDRAW Graphics 5uite 12. 




<a 


System Tools 


> 




m 


CizirelDRAW SA 11 




^ 


J^ddress Book 






■m 


EP^SON 




_! 


Calculator 






im 


Games 




sat 


Cizimmand Prompt 






=3 


Hemera Photo-Obiects 50,000 

TnEeJ 

Macromedia Flashi 5 






Nol:epad 










Program Compatibility ^^'iz^|■d 






Macromedia FreeHand 5 
Nero 




^^n* 


Scanner and Camera Wizard 
Synchronize 




p^^l r-tiizro-^oft V/ord 


.^^ 


Nokia PC 5uii:e 
NTI CD-M^ker 




' 


Tour WindoiAis XP 
\A/indo\^& Explorer 




^^J Tour Windows XP 
l^^l Adobe Pl-iotosl-iop 6.1 
1 ^^ WordPad 




P-:: MACLAN 
PriaMaglC 

SolJndMAX 
^l:arl:up 




ijj 


Windows Movie Maker 
WordPad 








t-:*^^ Windows Movie Make 


i * 


Wiin^ip 

Adober Illustrator CS 










- jl f Files and 5ei:l:ings Tr; 
mrK Wizard 


^■ 


Intern eir Explorer 
Outlook Express 










LmV 5<zi|jt^|re 




Remolie Assistance 










- 


Windows Media Player 










^^^^^^^^^^^ 




Ms Oi=i=ice 


> 








^^^^^^ 


■ 


^JBHKij^n 


B 


a 





Fig 1.43 Starting Paint 
The paint window appears on the screen. 



Menu Bar 
Toolbox 

Drawing area 




B2U 



Colour Box 






Fig 1.44 Paint window 
51 



Just like any other window, the Paint window also has a title bar with 
sizing buttons, a menu bar and a status bar. In addition, it has a Toolbar 
and a Colour Box. The Toolbar has various tools that you can use to 
draw and colour. Fig 1 .45 shows the Toolbar with the different tools. 




Rectangle' 
Ellipse 



Polygon 
Rounded 
Rectangle 



Fig 1.45 The toolbar 



To use any of the tools in the toolbar, first click on the tool to select it. 
For example, click on the ellipse tool. 



52 



^tLA 



f t 



f*~P5IPPrB"rrr"5" 



Fig 1.46 The circle tool is selected. 

Then, move the mouse to the drawing area and click and drag to draw 
the figure you want. 




Fig 1.47 Click and drag the mouse to draw 

The Colour Box contains the colours that you can use. Click on the 
colour of your choice and use the Fill with colour tool, the Airbrush or 
the Brush to colour your pictures. 

53 



You can close Paint by clicking on the Close button on the title bar or 
clicking on the File menu and selecting Exit (or Alt+F4 keys). 

Do-it-Now Exercises 

1 . Open the Paint application and draw a colourful bunch of 
balloons. 

2. Draw a simple house and colour it. 

3. Draw a colourful kite. 

4. Draw a flower of your choice and colour it. 

1.16.5 Word Pad 

WordPad is a simple word processor that comes along with Windows. 

A Word processor is a program that allows you to type and store text. 

To start WordPad, click on 

Start -* All Programs -» Accessories -^ WordPad. 

The WordPad window appears on the screen. 

Title bar with sizing buttons 

Menu Bar 



'<sB aa a « 



lUUIUdl .; ■ ■ ■ ■ .■■■. .-,- ' , , I .ir If ' .;-. I,: t - l^,-m - !•,::« 



Work area 



Window Border 



Status bar 



Fig 1.48 WordPad window 
54 



As you have already learnt, the WordPad window has a title bar, menu 
bar, toolbar, work area and a status bar. 

A small vertical blinking line appears at the top left corner of the work 
area. This is the Cursor. It indicates your current position on the screen. 
Some users refer the cursor as the insertion point because it shows, 
on the screen, where the next text you type will be inserted. Use the 
keyboard to type in the text. Note that as you type in the text, the cursor 
moves. When you reach the end of a line, WordPad automatically 
moves the cursor to the beginning of the next line. This feature is called 
Word wrap. The Enter key on the keyboard is used to start a new 
paragraph to enter short line or a blank line. Fig 1 .49 shows the 
WordPad window with some sample text. 

You do not have to press the Enter keywhen you reach the right margin 
Do not think that the appearance in the screen will be the appearance 
of the output. If you want to set the margin that can be done with Page 
Setup of the File menu. You can use the following key or key 
combinations for editing the text. 



• ■tup I * I E 



[ Itiia^ iins^ V;v [Id diE^ Iftr fooU mii-.i'jnizvitiviB Ux ivill pair ^I ^ yrrficr d' vm ietJ K' mlH^ He lidln^ 'tJiLinti^iMi^E'.imxr 

' i;rtirf(ihDiint HtJ? iSLui WffdTT^ T<T. :^- llptp md S^firi i^ Bm gt^irrfiw F*^ v^ ^t^f^ r?«ftef ffondff Htfe mpni «ti Wwi^Ts ftajm. 4tcm 

I d VEid«a'7. ABc!^ :c mitn t±^ tsjliiH. pr reluct iflU:^. jtaJ Kcl::;H tuiolmLi 

I you «» Qum 7^ f^ ^j*nft It (^* Pi4 1^^^ iff Uhtdw Up fliJil f «ir ^f Ifi* ^itu«r i ^unH fc. «*!« Uv I'M ln^ =i nn" i"*i.t|f F^ i^icf 



F/g y.49 WordPad window with some text 
55 



Some useful Editing keys are given below. 
Keys for Moving the Cursor through Text 



Key 



T 

i 
Home 
End 

Ctrl + Home 
Ctrl + End 
Page Up (PgUp) 
Page Down (PgDn) 
Ctrl+ «- 
Ctrl+ -» 
Ctrl+ T 
Ctrl+ i 

Ctrl + Page Up (PgUp) 
Ctrl + Page Down (PgDn) 



Where It Moves the Cursor 

One character to the right 
One character to the left 
Up one line 
Down one line 
Beginning of the line 
End of line 
Top of document 
End of document 
Up a page (or screen) 
Down a page (or screen) 
One word to the left 
One word to the right 
Up one paragraph 
Down one paragraph 
To top of previous page 



To top of next page 



56 



After you have finished typing In the text, you can correct it, add or 
delete text. To do so, first move the cursor to the place where you want 
to edit, using the arrow keys on the keyboard. You can also use the 
mouse to move the cursor. To do so, place the mouse pointer at the 
place and click. 

Once you have moved the cursor, you can delete text using the 
Backspace and Delete keys on the keyboard. Backspace key deletes 
the character before the cursor and Delete key deletes the character 
after the cursor. If you are in insert mode,you can insert new text by 
simply typing it. If you are in overwrite mode the text you enter will 
overwrite the existing text (if any). 

Pressing Insert key will take you to either of the modes. If you are in 
insert mode, pressing the Insert key will take you to the overwrite mode 
and vice versa. Note that when you type in new text, the existing text 
moves to the right, if you are in Insert mode. 

To close WordPad, click on the Close button on the title bar or select 
Exit from the File menu. 

1 .1 7 Worl(ing witli Multiple Applications 

When you are using multiple applications, it will be very time consuming 
if you have to close one application before starting the next one. 
Moreover, transferring information from another application is very 
difficult if not impossible. For example, in MS-DOS, a file created using 
a word processor cannot contain a graph created using a spreadsheet 
program. Windows overcomes this problem by allowing the user to 
work on multiple applications at the same time. In Windows, a WordPad 
file can contain data or a graph created using Excel, a picture created 
using Paint and so on. 

1.17.1 Starting Multiple Applications 

Starting multiple applications is very simple. First start one application. 
The application appears on the screen in a window. At the same time, 

57 



a button with the name of the application appears on the taskbar. Now, 
start the second application. 

Several things happen - 

♦ the window of the second application appears on the screen 
overlapping the first window, 

♦ the button of the second application appears on the taskbar, 

♦ the title bar of the first application and its button on the taskbar 
become dim. 

You can start more applications in the same way. Fig 1 .50 (a), (b), and 
(c) will help you understand this better. 




Fig 1.50 (a) Desktop with Excel application. 



58 




Fig 1 .50 (b) Desktop as it appears after Word is also started. 
Note the dimmed title bar and button of the Excel application. 




1.50 (c) Desktop with 3 application windows 
59 



1.17.2 Switching between Multiple Applications 

The buttons on the taskbar are used to switch between the different 
applications. Remember that every time you start an application, its 
button appears on the taskbar. The button of the application you are 
currently using is highlighted and its window is called the Active 
Window. In Fig 1 .50(c), Paint is the active window. To switch to another 
application, click on any part of that application's window that is visible. 
If no part of the window is visible, click the button of the application on 
the taskbar. The application window is moved in front of all the other 
windows and its button is highlighted. Fig 1 .51 shows WordPad as 
the active window. Windows Explorer (Which you are going to learn 
shortly) enables you to create only one button per application. If you 
click on the button, it will show you a list, from which you can select any 
one of them. 

1.17.3 Transferring Information between Different Applcations 

Windows allows you to transfer data between the different applications 
you are running simultaneously. To do this, Windows uses a temporary 
storage location called the Clipboard. You can use the clipboard to 
store any kind of data. You can store text, pictures, numbers, group of 
files and so on. 




Fig 1 .51 WordPad window is the Active Window 

60 



The information to be transferred is first copied from the source 
application to the Clipboard and from there to the destination 
application. Windows also gives the option of either copying or moving 
data. The difference between copying and moving data is that moving 
removes the data from the source location and places them in the 
destination location. Copying leaves the source data untouched and 
makes a new copy in the destination location. 

Let us understand this better with an example. Suppose, you have 
drawn a picture in Paint and want to include it in a document created 
using WordPad. To do so, first start both the applications. 

You may recall that windows allows multiple applications to be started 
at the same time. However, you have to switch between the Applications 
by activating the application of your choice. 



'■"I" "■'""" 




Fig 1.52 Desktop with Paint and WordPad 

Click on the Paint window to make it active. Use the Select tool to 
mark the picture you want to move or copy. 



61 




Fig 1 .53 Paint with the picture selected 

Click on the Edit menu and select Copy or press(Ctrl+c). (If you want 
to move the picture select Cut or press (Ctrl+x) 




I v' a ft ■ ■ ■ If 



Fig 1 .54 Select Edit, Copy 

Click on the WordPad window to make it active. In the WordPad window, 
click on the Edit menu and select Paste (Ctrl+v). 

Note: Moving and copying will be dealt elaborately later. 

62 



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^1 






O J' U = i : 




Fig 1.55 Click on Edit; Paste in the WordPad 



The desktop will look as shown in Fig 1 .56. Note that the picture in the 
Paint window remains untouched. 



^1 


1 Hii^ -^ ^i 






.im_ 1, 


n .. ->„,„ . D ^ ^ & - ^ - 










3 

I] 

-D 


[ 




'->i_^^^^^| 












1^^^^ 


'■•^«*^*tefl!">-"-*-J 




^^1^^^ 



Fig 1 .56 WordPad after pasting the picture. 
63 



In the same manner, you can transfer data between any two Windows- 
based applications. 

There is, however, one important point that you should remember while 
using the clipboard. At any time, the Clipboard can hold only one set of 
data. When you copy or move a file or folder to the Clipboard, it 
overwrites whatever was stored there earlier. 

In addition to clipboard, windows XP provides with ClipBook. Without 
any effort on your part, now, you can store 24 different items in the 
ClipBook and you can paste them one by one. For more information, 
click Start and click Run on the Start menu, enter clipbrd.exe in the text 
box and press enter. In the ensuing ClipBook Viewer, click Help and 
then click contents. After going through the help you can do whatever 
you like with ClipBook 

Summary 

♦ Files can be of two types - Application and Document files. 
Applications are used to create data files. 

♦ Command Promot option on the start menu allows you to use 
DOS commands and run DOS-based programs. 

♦ The Clock on the taskbar is used to change the date and time. 

♦ The Calculator is like an ordinary calculator. WordPad is a 
simple word processor that is used to enter and store text. Paint 
is used to draw and colour pictures. 

♦ Windows allows you to use multiple applications at the same 
time 

♦ You can switch between applications using the buttons on the 
taskbar. 

♦ You can also transfer data between two applications. 

♦ The Clipboard is a temporary storage for data being copied or 
moved. 

64 



Exercises 

I. Fill in the blanks 

1 . are used to create data files. 

2. The option allows you to use DOS commands. 

3. The on the taskbar allow you to switch between 

applications. 

4. Windows uses the to store data being moved or 

copied 

5. Every time you start an application, a appears on 

the taskbar. 

6. The two modes of Calculator are and 

7. You can colour your pictures using the 

in Paint. 

8. In Paint the ^tool is used to mark the picture to be copied 

or moved. 

9. In WordPad, the key is used to delete the character 

after the cursor. 

1 0. You can close the WordPad application by clicking on Exit in 
the menu. 

11. State Whether the following are True or False 

1 . You cannot use DOS-based files in Windows. 

2. The Calculator is used for performing arithmetical calculations. 

3. You can draw using WordPad. 

4. You can use WordPad and Paint at the same time. 

5. You cannot move a picture painted in Paint to a WordPad 
document. 

6. While working with multiple applications, the button of the active 
application is highlighted. 

7. When you are working with multiple applications, you can close 
them only in the sequence in which you opened them. 

8. The Date and Time Properties dialog box only shows the 
calendar of the current month. 

9. In Windows, you can start a maximum of 1 applications at any 
time. 

65 



III. Answer the following 

1 . Explain with an example how to start multiple applications ? 

2. How do you switch between multiple applications ? 

3. What is the Clipboard? How is it used ? Explain. 

4. What are the two different types of files ? 

5. How does the computer display the correct time? How can you 
change time? 

6. What is Paint? Describe briefly the different parts of the Paint 
window. 

7. Where is the MS-DOS Prompt available? How do you use it ? 

8. Where is the Calculator available? How do you use It? Explain 
briefly. 

9. What is WordPad? How do you start WordPad ? 

1 0. Describe briefly how to edit text entered in WordPad . 



66 



CHAPTER 2 
WINDOWS EXPLORER 

2.1 Files 

You have learnt earlier that you can store a lot of information in 
your computer. Most computers in the market today have hard disks 
with capacities of several gigabytes. But how is all this information 
stored internally? And more importantly, how do you find what you need 
from all the information that is stored? 

Let us answer these questions one by one. All information in 
computers is stored in Files. Every file has a unique name that helps 
you to identify it. A file name is made up of two components: 

i) Main Component 

ii) Extension 

Main Component: The first part of the file name is the main compo- 
nent. This part precedes the dot and is also called the primary name. 
This is the name given to the file by the user. The dot (or full stop) sepa- 
rates the main component from the extension. The main component 
can contain alphabets, numbers, spaces and other characters like @, 
$, !, {, (, ),[,]. However, there are a few characters that a file name 
cannot contain. They are: \, /,* ,?, ", <, >. Comma and full stop are not 
included in the set. 

Extension: This is the second part of the file name. That is, the part 
that succeeds the decimal point is called the extension or the second- 
ary name. The extension is used to identify the type of the file and is 
normally up to three to four characters long. When a file is created 
using an application, the extension is automatically added to the file's 
main component by the application itself. Some examples of file ex- 
tensions are .DOC, .BAS, .XLS and .Java. 

67 



The file name, including the extension, can be a maximum of 255 char- 
acters long. Though you can assign any fancy name to your file, it is 
always better to use a name that reminds you something about the 
contents of the file. The aim of naming a file is to retrieve the contents 
easily. If you assign a fancy name to a file then you may probably not be 
able to associate the contents with the name of the file. For example, 
you have written a letter to your friend Ashok. You can call this file AAA 
or A81 24343, but Ashok-letter would be a better choice. This con- 
cept is often refered to as the nameing convention. 

What is the main use of the (file) extension? When you click on a docu- 
ment icon, this action not only opens the document but also an applica- 
tion, with which it was created. But, how does the application know that 
its services are required? File extension is the key to solve the prob- 
lem. The extension of the file name simply announces the format in 
which the data in the file is stored. Based on this, suitable application 
opens the file. Normally the file extension is hidden. If you like, you can 
make it visible. But, it is a good practice to leave it hidden or else you 
may try to rename it. Renaming the extension, may lead to dangerous 
consequences and you may not be able to open the document. 

It is to be noted that MS-DOS, another operating system, follows a 
different set of rules for assigning a name to a file. The main compo- 
nent of files created or used on DOS-based computers can have a 
maximum of eight characters and cannot contain spaces. The exten- 
sion should not exceed more than three characters in DOS. 

2.2 Data Organization 

In a computer having a 40 GB hard disk or an 80 GB hard disk, you 
can store several thousand files. But in these cases, finding one file 
will be very difficult. You will have to go through all the file names one by 
one till you locate the file that you need. This is like looking for a book in 
a library in which the books have not been arranged in any order. Many 
people never bother to store their files properly. 



68 



Windows XP (and DOS) overcomes this problem by using Folders 
(DOS calls them Directories). A folder is nothing but a collection of 
related files or subfolders. Let us understand this with an example. Con- 
sider an organization. Its office will have hundreds of papers relating to 
products, customers, suppliers, personnel, finance and accounts, and 
so on. Normally, these papers are filed into different folders and stored 
in a filing cabinet. Labels on the folders and the cabinets make it easier 
to find what you need. So, when a person wants some information about 
a supplier named Shah and Co., he has to look only in the cabinet 
marked suppliers and search for the folder marked Shah and Co. In 
the same way, Windows XP allows you to organize the files on your 
disk by grouping them into folders. 

2.3 Windows Explorer 

Windows Explorer is a program that helps you to manage your files 
and folders. To start Windows Explorer, click on 
Start -> All Programs ^Accessories ^Windows Explorer 



m* yJii-ido¥i5 Catalog 

fT] Adobe 

■PJ fidobe Acrobat 4,0 

EJJ CnrelDRAW 10 

'0 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite K 

53 CorelDRAW 5A I i 

^ EP50rj 

a Garner 



.-Objects SO. 000 





a'' jil- 



Fig 2. 1 Starting Windows Explorer 



69 



You can also start Windows Explorer by right clicking on the Start 
button and then selecting Explore from the short cut menu. 



Open 

Explore 

Search... 

Properties 




Open All Users 
Explore All Usevn. 




Fig 2.2 An alternate way of starting Windows Explorer 
The Explorer window opens on the screen as shown in Fig 2.3 



lasj 






Hjj JI3S* la, a fn 



«}jtl^aa*i-itm 















i>i;H;>Z«H £ At4l 



diii 



^Ji> bxvuJMftTbtQ' 



Uj/zoh rat wi 



iiMlik 



*J]^t 



Mtcyriil 



F/g 2.3 l/Wnc/oi/i/'S Explorer window in Folder Bar 



Like any other window, the Explorer window also contains a title bar, a 
menu bar and a toolbar. But unlike the other windows, the Explorer 
window is selfless. It never shows its own name in the title bar; instead, 

70 



it shows the name of the current folder whose contents are visible in 
the right pane (Main Pane). The only time that it shows its name is 
when related files are grouped in the taskbar. If you open up to four 
folders, separate buttons are created on the Task Bar, but if you open 
the fifth folder or any application, folders are grouped and only one 
button is created whose name becomes Windows Explorer. You can 
see the number of folders preceding the name Windows Explorer. 
Again a single button is created for each application program. This 
action not only preserves the space in the task bar but also if you right 
click on it, it will allow you to use Close Group. This will close all the 
folders at one stroke. Even the audio, video files are treated as folders 
under this context. If you want to open / close one of the grouped fold- 
ers, you can left click the button. This action displays all the folders 
within the button. You can either open the folder or close it. If the num- 
ber of buttons exceeds four then normally a single button is created for 
each application. Suppose you want to open five Word applications, 
five separate buttons will not be created in the task bar, only one button 
is created in the task bar. Below the toolbar is the display area. As you 
can see, this area is divided into two panes. The left pane displays 
either the Explorer Bar or the Folder Bar and the right pane always 
displays the contents of the currently selected folder in the left pane. If 
you click the Search button from the toolbar, the left pane neither shows 
Explorer Bar nor Folder Bar, instead it shows the Search compan- 
ion. If you just double click a folder, you will see an Explorer Bar in the 
left pane. If you right click on the same folder and select explore from 
the ensuing shortcut menu, you will see the Folder Bar in the left pane. 
You right click a folder and choose open from the ensuing short cut 
menu, you will see only the Explorer Bar in the left pane. But you can 
switch over from one to the other just by clicking folder icon on the 
toolbar. 

2.4 Working with Folders 

A small yellow icon represents each folder. Note that the disk drives on 
the computer are also treated as folders. A plus sign to the left of the 
folder icon in Folder Bar indicates the presence of subfolders within 

71 



this folder. You can see + or - sign only in the Folder Bar. You can click 
on the plus sign to display a list of the subfolders. When you do this, the 
plus sign changes to a minus sign. Clicking on the minus sign will hide 
the details. Fig 2.4(a) and 2.4(b) show the folder representing the hard 
disk C: in the expanded and collapsed forms. 



.' _ ; 




^^^_B 


File 


Ei*t Visw F^avyorites^ 


Took Hata 


^Ba* - ^■ 


_^>Siia*<*i llj^ 


UrUrtB 






-- ^^^\ 






•St 


L^ DeskJtop 




-.4r i ', 


My Documents 




= if 


My ^DjTiputef 




i+. 


U> 3-'/^ Ficjppy CAO 




ffl 


^^fW^^f^^Tj^^ 




Ij-i 


t.- diska (D:> 




lii 


g-. DI5KACE0 




1+! 


U^ DISKA (F:J 




i*l 


1*,^ CD-RW Drive (Gl) 




if 


Control Pdnel 




W 


t_. Shared Documents 




flJ 


1;^' Administrator's Documents 


IB 


i,~7' t GACH's Documeni:s 




»l 


li^i Guest's DocumeniiS 
' Nokia Phone Browser 




t*-. ■ 


My Network Places 
Recycle Bin 







mtx-^&L 


S?!i'^^^^H 




File Edit Vievv Favorites 


Tools Helps 


^, ;^'| Back - 


Search ^3 


■ftddi r5es |_* 


— Ct\ 




Forders 
L^ Deskto 




■x: 


p 


^1 


IS ^ My 


Documents 




1^ at My Computer 


J 




3'/^ Floppy (A!) 

-iU ADOBEAPP 
''""f Corel temp 


1 


■3 


«u3 Documents and 5eti::ings 


'B 


rzi EMC 




13 


1^^ KPCIV15 




lal 


tr^ Program FKes 
S ii^fc Adobe 
B li^ Ahead 
ffi liZ^ AVeo 
® lr~"^ Common Files 






li~^ CizimPIU5 Applications; 




^ lO Corel 

1^ l.-^?h r-rire*i1ri 


a- 




J Starr | 



F/g 2. 4 fa; FoWer Bar 



Fig 2.4(b) Folder Bar Expanded 
form c:> Collapsed form in Folder Bar 



If there is no plus sign to the left of a folder icon, it means that the folder 
does not have any subfolder. Scroll bars in this part of the window al- 
low you to browse through the list of folders. 

To see the contents of a folder you have to select the folder. To do so, 
just click the folder. The yellow file icon next to the folder changes to 
look like an open folder. The selected folder is highlighted and its con- 
tents are displayed in the right pane of the Explorer window. In Fig 2.5 
the Windows folder has been selected in the left pane and its contents 
are displayed in the right pane. 



72 



2.4.1 The Explorer Bar 

Old habits die hard!. What you have seen is the only facility available in 
Windows 98. But Windows XP provides additional facility in the name 
of Explorer Bar. The Explorer Bar with its sophisticated, more useful 
tools lets you navigate (travel) and to work with icons contained within 
the current folder. This bar is divided into three categories. They are :- 

(1 ) File and Folder Task 

(2) Other Places 

(3) Details 

File and Folder Tasks: As the name suggests File and Folder tasks 

allows you to work on files and folders, for example, by clicking Make a 
new folder under File and Folder Tasks, you can create a new folder. 
Share this Folder option shares the chosen files among the group 
users. It provides web facilities also. File and Folder Tasks is context 
sensitive (depends on what folder you choose). Whatever you find here 
is not visible in the Folder Bar. 

Other Places: If you want to switch over to other folders, you can 
select options in other places. 

Details: Details provides some detail about the open folder. 







f L ohtdtVuf rMMnl 



m- 



u 

lJ 



O 

o 



n-;fe..7t.nii.TW.tW 






Ptosf^t Vnd Au^ 



I a- a ■ 



Fig 2.5 Windows Explorer Window in Explorer Bar 

73 



You can expand or collapse any of the categories by clicking any where 
in the caption (including Show / Hide button two down / up arrows ). 
You can also navigate to any folder by means of the Address bar. 
Click the down arrow situated in the right most area of the Address text 
box. From the drop down list box you can navigate to any folder from 
your current position. 

2.5 Changing the View 

Windows Explorer allows you to change the way in which information 
is displayed in the right pane. You can display the list of files and fold- 
ers using any of the following views. You click view in the menu bar or 
click view button in the explorer's toolbar. The view affects only how the 
information is displayed not what is displayed. Icons work in the same 
manner, whatever be the view. For example Double-clicking an Icon in 
any view will open it. 

The Icons View - The Icons View shows each file or folder's icon 
and its name. This view will not provide any more detail. 



Address 



^ Windows 


ZlLnl^l 


Fjlfe Edft View Favorites 


Tools Kelp. 
-. ' Search 










-iS 


Go 

1 


\^- Folders 


m- 






Ad.d|s5? i^ C;\WINDOWS 












^1 


FQJdgrs 




> 


1 J 


a 


U3 


P 


|3 Desktop 






fi ^ 


S uj f^y Documenl:? 






addins 


Adobe 
Illustrator CS 


AppPatch 


Cache 




1 


oi §i My Computer 


















Si igi 31/^ Floppy (A;) 






, 






7 






B 1^ Local Disk (C:) 






'_-' 












C3 ADOBEAPP 






ConFig 


Connection 


Corel 


Cursors 






iTji Corel temp 






— 


Wizard 










S i;^ Documents and Settings 






I®1 










IS lll^ENC 
IS 1^ KPCN5 






u 


J 


u 










Debug 


Downloaded 


Driver Cache 


Drivers 






S li^ Program Files 








Program Files 










I^TEMP 


















s i^EWWSSBH 






1 












h^ addins 






'-^ 






— ^ 






O Adobe Illustrator C5 




Enfocus P 


el^s Fonts 


Help 


ime 






^ AppPatch 






Folder 












1^ lO Cache 


















ic2i Conl'iq 






uJ 


,J 


u 


U 






J", Connection Wizard 




ja^'a 


Media 


MetaQeations 


Minidump 






+ , Corel 






«i' 










2 


157 objects (plus 5 hidden) CDisk F 


ee space 


989- 


MBJ 


10. 1 ME ^ My Computer 







Fig 2.6 Contents of windows folder with Icons View 



The Tiles View - In this view, the icons are a little bigger. In addition to 
icon and its name, this view provides some more additional informa- 
tion for some icons. 

74 



% WINBQWS 






mwm\ 


File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 






SIS' 


*l 


i^ Back. - ^ ^ ^. J 5earcli- 


e 


Folders 






rtdiJi-S£S 1^3 C;\WINDOWS 






vji H» 




Folcfcr^ 'X- 




addins 

Adobe Illu£i:rai:or CS 

AppPatch 

Cache 

ConFig 

Connection Wizard 




g 


m <^ Program Files .^1 

\C^ TEMP 
@ O WINDOWS 

1^:;! adding 

i.""i Adobe Illustrator C5 

li^ AppPatch 
a l^ Cache 

lC3 ConFig 

t3 Connection Wizard , ,| 
S 1^ Corel 

li^ Cursors ' 
S liD Debug 

iS Downloaded Program Files 
m \i^ Driver Cache 
m Q Drivers 

U;^ EnFocus PreFs Folder 

liiSi Fonts 
S 1^ Help 
ffl (^ irrie 
H Ii3 Java 91 




■ 


157 Qbjeci:s (plus 5 hidden) (Disk Free space: 989 MB) 




10,1 MB J My Computer J 



Fig 2. 7(a) Icons with Tiles View 

The Thumbnails View - The Thumbnails View works well in folders 
that contain pictures. Documents that contain pictures are not shown 
as icons but they are displayed as minimized pictures. 



pile Edit Vfeuy F:^vqritgs Todfe Help 



O' -3 



g- Folder J m- 



Address |i^ c;\window5 
Folder* 



vjlH s' 



mt 



LH u"p Program Files 

l l"-;^ TEMP 
]si 1^ WiNjISMS' 
I r^ addins 

£3 Adobe Illustrator CS 
i r°1 AppPatch 
ra 113 Cache 
li^ ConFig 

i^ Connection Wizard 
m It3 Corel 

iF^ Cursors 
IS Q Debug 

LJS Downloaded Program Files 

5 1^ Driver Cache 
ffl l i"°i Drivers 

11^ EnFo[;us PreFs Folder 
^ Fonts 

6 1^ Help 
ai t^ Ime 



D 



P 



.■2*. 



P 



.'■!\ 



IBS objects (plus 5 htdden) (Disk Free space: 9SS ME)! 



ID.l ME ^ My Computer 



F/g 2. 7 (b) Thumbnails View 

The Filmstrip View - This view is available only in folders that contain 
pictures such as My Pictures Folder. This view is similar to the 

75 



Thumbnails View. When you click or point to a picture, an enlarged 
copy of the picture appears in preview area. 



o- 






■±> J. 3.^ Floppy (A:) 



S O Control Panel 
a ^ Shared Docum 



'F Z3l Goes 
■ '^.i My Netwi 



t3 Sample Pictures 




^^^ij 




F/g 2. 7(c) Film Strip View 

List View - This view retains the small icons but displays the files and 
folders one below the other in columns. 



File Edit l/iei^ Favorites Tools 


Help 


^^^ 




^^■1 


mm 

9" 


(^Back • 5e 


arch |,;j Folder. [TT?]- 








l^Go 


ficlflliMs iLaC;\W-lNDOW5 








%■ 


Fofcter^ 


X iJjaddins 


^ PC HEALTH 


^icBBbJre 
^tDEC63"THEMN 


glccig. 




a CSW^W^- 








la addins 

a Adobe lOu^trator C5 

Q AppPatch 


■|_| AppPatch 


■.^P55 


l=J chip.et 




OC^che 


_!.. Registration 
O; repair 


^CofLeean 


ilmsins 




:z:iConnection Wizard 


^iRe50urce5 


iT com^atup 


@]im5in5,BAK 




I -1 Config 






J-control 


gl.Unin.t 




Sj ir^ Corel 


. J Debug 


!5rcha55t 


[nDEL4D 


3l^PCM5 
I5kpcp32.dll 




lij Cur^or^ 
@ l£3 Debug 

^ Downloaded Program F 


j?"l Downloaded Program File 




>de5ktop 




..Driver Cache 
1 _. Drivers 


....■/5tem32 


rV] Dtclnstall 
(il EflConfiglnfo 


■_SiKPFP32.DLL 
3jKP5CflLE.DLL 




jEnfocu5 PreF5 Folder 


Temp 


Ef EP5TPLOG 
|a]EP5TPLOC,EflK 


^ KP5HARP.DLL 
SkP5V532,DLL 
<4ih;PT3HELP 




IS i_, Driver. 

I^^EnFocusPref. Folder 
\^ Font= 

ffl cawe 

l±l Q Java 


.".llHelp 


iijjtwain 3Z 




Jjime 


liijWeb 


■3 explorer 


^3^^PT3HUBrDLL 




Ojava 
<t3 Media 


Q|Win5xS 


JT'eiplorer 
V EyeCand3 


l^rrrfipa^ 




iQMetaCreations 


l^Adobereg 


; 1 FaxSetup 

■ J FeatherTexture 


LJnisdfmafi 




lO MetaCreations 
■"'"1 Minidump 

i£ 'Jii msagent 

.+■ ^ rr5app5 




4 amp 132 


iljFLCMT 






-barcode 


, Cone Fishing 


I^Merijpigital 




jmui 
laoFFIine Web Page. 


JiBlueLacel6 


_ Greenstone 

Ll^hh 






^rrul 


V ' 








»! 


15S objects tplu^ShTdderiJfDi^teEfB^-SfracHlS^^™) 


^^^ 


1Q,!HB 


l^-KyjTqfnfiufeit 


^ 



Fig 2.7(d) List View 
Details - This view displays details like file size, type, last modified 

76 



date and time along with file names and small icons. If you cannot find 
all the information, use the scroll bar available in this view. 



pie Edit Vi&H Favorites TuqIs Help 


^^^^" 








11 


ly^ Folders {[H]' 


ndriie-;:|i^ C:\WIND0W5 










_-ia 


Folders 




X 


Mame ■ 


S:& Tyc^ 


Date Modified 




E Q ^mD0W5 




Jjaddns 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:12 AM 




Q addins 




J,j Adobe Illustrator CS 


File Folder 


10/14/2004 10:40 AM 






^ Adobe Illijstratcr C5 




^AppPatch 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:12AM 






Q AppPatch 




\ Cache 


File Folder 


2/12/2005 12;19PM 






m [^ Cache 




.ConHg 


File Folder 


L0/13/200410;12AM 






O Config 






", Connection Wizard 


File Folder 


1Q/13/2D"Q4 10:12AM 






(^ Connection Wizard 






^j Corel 


File Folder 


10/14/2004 10:49 AM 






a O Corel 






Jj Cursors 


File Folder 


10/13/20Q4 10:12AM 






llP Cur^or^ 






J( Debug 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10;12AM 






@ l^ Debug 






llDownloaded Program Files 


Folder 


10/13/2004 10:37 AM 






1^ Downloaded Program 


File5 




^1 Driver Cache 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:12AM 






a C3 Driver Cache 






_-) Drivers 


File Folder 


10/26/2004 12:51PM 






B IQ Drivers 




'■ OEnfocySFrSFSFQJdef 


Fie Fglder 


2/12/2005 12:39 PM 






OJEnfocujPrel^ff Folder 




O fonts 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:12AM 






^Font* 




t:|Help 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:12AM 






a La Help 




^irre 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:12AM 






Sl^ime 




eitava 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:12AM 






ffl ^ Java 




CJMedia 


RIe Folder 


10/13/2004 10:12AM 






S Ilia Media 




iJijMeliaCreatioHS. 


File Folder 


1/29/2005 10:33 AM 






Q MetaCreations 




O Minidump 


File Folder 


ll/17/20a4't:34PM 






(r^ Minidump 




O msagent 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:12AM 






a 1^ msagent 




Omsapps 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:12AM 






H ^msapps 




li^niui 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:12AM 






yimy 




I^OFflineWgb pages 


Folder 


10/13/2004 10:37 AM 


















158 objects (plu55 hiddaciJtOisKFtaaspera: 979 


«4f 




iOA-m Jrty-CompLter 


i 



Fig 2.7(e) Details View 

Note- All the View figures have Folders Bar in the left pane. You can 
have Explorer Bar in the left pane also. 

You may wonder why we need several views. Views will help you in 
finding a forgotten file. You may forget the name of a file, but you may 
remember, the date of creation or the extension of that file. Then sort, 
the contents of a folder that you expect your file will be, by date or file 
type (extension), in Windows Explorer. You can see whether the file is 
there or not at a glance. 

Note: A better way to search a file is by means Search option. You will 
see it later. 



2.6 Creating a New Folder 

Often, you may want to create a new folder to store some of your files. 
Creating new folders using Windows Explorer is very easy. Already 

77 



you have seen a method to create a folder by simply clicking Make a 
New Folder under File and Folder Task in the Explorer Bar. It will 
create a new folder in the right pane. You can enter the name that you 
have chosen for the folder in the highlighted box and then press EN- 
TER key «J . First, select the folder under which you want to create the 
new folder. Then, right click anywhere in the empty space in the right 
pane of the Explorer window. Click on New from the menu shortcut. 
Select Folder from the submenu that appears. You can also obtain the 
same result from the menu bar by Clicking File -» New -» Folder. 



^ Administfi^icor 








yini® 


Fife E* ViW FaybrjleS Ttot 


Help 








9^ 


?drrh 


JtT; Folder, ini- 


! P*!je55-il£3 C;\Doi:ument£ dndSetting5\Admini£trator 






^10 GS 


ffW^^ 


K NBrte 


Size Type 


Date Modified 


IS ADOBEAPP 


*{ ^administrator's Documents 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:45 AM 




Q Corel temp 


" 'bCookJes 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:16 AM 




Q 1^ Documents and Settings 


._iDesktop 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:16 AM 




y Q Administrator 


^ ' Favorites 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:46 AM 




1*: .■_';! Administrator's Document 


iPhone Broi^ser 


File Folder 


1/11/2005 9:13 PM 




■.■_:, Cookies 




,5lart Menu 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:16 AM 




[ij o Desktop 




.^jWirjDows 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 11:12 AM 




't "^f Favorites 






• D AdobeWeb 


KB Text Document 


12/18/2004 4:39 PM 




\-_jj Mew Folder 






,_i fe-iajiBn 


File Folder 


2/15/2005 12i34PM 




^ IQ Phone Browser 














ffl Q 5tart Menu 














IS Q WIMDOWS 














IB i3 All U5er5 














!3 Q GACH 














+ . Guest 












+ -EMC 










+ .. KPCMS 










+ .1 Program Files 












._iTEMP 












.+■ . J WINDOWS 












■+: .^i Kitron 












i±i u- diska [Di) 










tt' us DISKA [E:) 


^ 








l^;|-^- 


>: 








J object? 5elected 






j/ My Comput 


r 


^^^^^^K ^ ^^^^^^^^^1 



Fig 2.8 Explorer Bar to create new Folder 

In the folders bar also you can right click on the empty space on the 
right pane. Click New in the ensuing shortcut menu then click the Folder 
in the submenu. 



78 



File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 


^^^^^ 


^^^^^■appi 


; Back - Search ^-r Falder^ ■' [011' 






rtddj-riEj Q C:\Program Files\flveo\ Attune 




3" 


FoIdBKS ■*^. 


i^ rj n in 


ig Shortcut 




!? ,"l^ Adobe 
*- '.^1 Ahead 
■=f i^ Aveo 

& Immune '1 
B £3 bin 

ir3 Bitmap i 
a 1^ Data 1 
■■^■| Help 

,,;_:r Setup 
IB Q Common File5 

t_j ComPlli5 Application? 
B 1^ Corel 
S O CorellO 
@ f^ Data 
^ lii EPSON 
E i^SFx 

S 1l3 Herrera Photo-Objects 50,00 
IP li) iLEAP 
B ,^ In^cnbei 
+ . 1 Intel 

+ . Internet E:>;plorer 
t 


birr Bitmap 

.1 


Data Help Pe 


il Briefcase 

1*< Bitmap Irrage 

9 CorelDRAW 10.0 Graphic 

^ CorelP.A.V.E, 1,0 

@l Corel PHOTO-PAINT 10.0 Image 
@ Microsoft Word Document 
[$(■ Portfolio Catalog Document 
S PageMaker Publication 
^ PageMakerS.D Publication 


Arrange Icons By ► 
Refresh 


PI Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation 

^ Adobe Photoshop Image 

B ^t^REL Texture 

15 Text Document 

^ Wave Sound 

[S] X3D Document 

^ Microsoft Excel Worliheet 

tU CompFe55ed Clipped) Folder 


Customize Thi. Folder... 


Puite 

PdsieSnoitcL" 

Undo Copy arl+I 






Properties f 










Creates a new, empty folder. 





Fig 2.9 (a) Click on New and select Folder 

A new folder with the temporary name "New Foldef is created as in 
figure 2.9(b) 





..■"^^HM^M 






ValEildl 


File Edit 

^^ - 


ifiei^ Favorites IchjIs halp 






^_ 


[£. Folders fM]- 


Afjdr&s_^ j^ c 


:yDocurrient5 and Setting? 






^IB^a 


FOldefB 




K M^me - 


Srsi Type 


Date Ho.diFied 


O ADOBEAPP 


rtj tiAdtninistratpr 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10:46 AH 




Corel temp 


lUJflll U?er5 


File Folder 


10/13/200410; 15 AM 


Bt^ 




li^SACH 


File Folder 


2/15/2005 12:03 PM 


15 


irS Administrator 


, Of^^t 


File Folder 


2/15/2005 11:43AM 




fl ta Adminisrrafnr'<,r.nr,im="nr | >fc<ri^HHIiri^« 


File Folder 


2/15/2005 12:41PM 




1^ Administrator'? 


Music, 1 








iS^ Adrrinistrator's 










ICa Cor^l User File 












^ £igene eEooks 












ffl l£3 My Webs 












^ wrapper Pic 












^ Coo^^ies 












S 1^ Desktop 












hO Favorites 












B t3 Phone Bro^.?er 










S Ij^ Start Menu 










l±4 lr3 WINDOWS 








i±i 


Li3 All Users 
■J GACH 








to 


LiJ Guest 
£3 New Folder 








fflO^NC 








ffl^ 


KPCMS 


il 














toit 


,11 


|.ob]ect5 selec 


ed 






iJ WyG'diinpatfer 



Fig 2. 9 (b) " New Folder " is created 



Simply type the name you want to give this new folder and press EN- 
TER. Here Test is the chosen name and My Documents is the chosen 
folder, under which TEST folder is created. 

79 





Ffe E-djt View Favorites. Tools Help 






» 


^F.id» g* 






pd<!i«s]^C;l 






V 1 GO 


Fdldqrs 


4 mn& - 


Size Type 


Date Modified 


^ Desktop 


~ IQflDOBEflPP 


File Folder 


12/9/2004 10:44 AM 


Q ti My Documents 


|q3 Corel terfip 


File Folder 


1/27/2005 2:37 PM 


^ My Music 


Ij^Documents and Settings 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10: 15 AM 


iSJ My Pictures 


QENC 


Fiie Foider 


10/30/2004 11:01 AM 


S l| My Computer 


I^KPCMS 


RIe Folder 


10/13/200411:16 AM 


a 4 3'A Floppy (A!) 


QProorafil Hies 


Rle Folder 


10/13/2004 10:37 AM 


SHlUcalDisklO) 


QTtMP 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 1:5SPM 


a 1^ diska (D;) 


lilWlHD0W5 


File Folder 


10/13/2004 10: 12 AM 


aiiiDI5KA(E;) 


QXitrbn 


File Folder 


2/11/200511:56 PM 


a t*DMA(F;) 


MESl 


Rle Folder 


2/15/2005 12:44 PM 


i±i 1^ CD-RW Drive (G:) 








i±i ©■ Control Panel 








S G2 Shared Documents 








i [^ Shared Must 








a 1^ Shared Pictures 








O Sample Pictures 








a i^ Administrator's Documents 








El Q Gflqn's Docurfients 








ffl Hj3 Guest's Docurfients 








ii ^ Nofe Phone Browser 








B *| My Network Place? 








^ Recycle Bin 








1 objects selected 






i m arriBlJSr 





Fig 2.10 Anew folder called TEST is created under My Documents. 
2.7 Selecting Files and Folders 

Windows Explorer allows you to copy, move and delete files and fold- 
ers. But, before you can do any of these, you have to select the files or 
folders that you want to copy, move or delete. Selecting one file or 
folder is very simple. Just click on the file or folder and it gets high- 
lighted. If you want to select more than one file or folder, you can do so 
in any one of the following ways: 

i) If the files or folders to be selected appear consecutively on the 
screen, then, click on the first file or folder. Using the scroll bars (if 



80 



necessary), point the mouse pointer to the last file or folder in the list, 
hold the Shift key down and click. Fig 2. 11 (a) shows a list of six con- 
secutive files, which have been selected. 






•S: 




Fir -^ sin 


irvi ^jTiKM Ln:i? ^M 


'HI'Ai*! 


1Li'L4.tiaiM LU:WJV1 


NtAMd 


IGfLj/;«>1 LD;]: tLH 


^hfllD 


ijizTiXnn J JlLV M^ 


W|*^*3n 


lO|'Ljrj«HEIJ:|iW 


FtefiJJdr 


|f!{IVJIl«Hl'1JAM 


fU'Mu 


iL'^Lt/iHn w.viim 


Ft^dln 


Wll^piKAtn-MOA 


^h'ofdn 


JiH\.JlliK»i\i:J:iKH 


Foih* 


WlJUKHtv.jjm 


fl^*,^ 


ii^tVnntun?4H 


rttfr^iM 


4flfWaMf3:3tBt* 




ZtMOO^V^m 


t^ilf^ 


rcfiwaw iu;]?*i 


r^fythi 


ID/llU»H HUifiM 


ri(j«ki 


]Uf [4dH kmi^Wl 


TM'^tim 


IGf L::;C11M EDIIZjW 




|r^^^^^mnl tO'irAH 


tkff^ 


ift?rH«jftntf* 


F^iMfe 


|t^LT;PBH:Wm 


th,iMlt 


]u^[j;diw luiiiwi 


F*AM>r 


infii^?ii£Miinii?^ 


I>M1M19I 


KVlJiUuh luiJ^'AH 


Wx 


lWt!Wi)WtO:J?4H 




iiViJflwm^^ 


rfarAlB 


JO^irtleflMtfilHWI 


FlFf*V< 


ICjwipwH k?:nPH 


tmiMn 


llfl'LL^LldEHlU^AI 


»nitiit 


|Qr|.3j;f1[MliD;|?M 


*iit>nbi( 


][^t;i,!iDW luiif j« 


Hrfl*f 


|C^Lj^i4CMBD:U4l 



T QA 




Fig 2.11 (a) Six consecutive files selected 

ii) If the files or folders to be selected are not displayed con- 

secutively, then, click on the first file, move the mouse pointer to the 
second file to be selected and click while holding the Ctrl key down. 
Repeat the procedure for each of the other files to be selected. Fig 
2.1 1 (b) shows five selected files that are not displayed next to each 
other. If you select a file wrongly, in order to deselect it from the group, 
press Ctrl and click on the file. Above selection can also be made with 
Explorer Bar in the left pane. 



81 



FJe Edit Viem 


Favorites 


T00I5 Help 
Search [• 


^ 


m- 




_^,B.*- 


■ Folders 




■iddis.'^ OC;\W1NDOW5 








- 



^ pdyiri5 

^ AflB"fi9tllU5tri|tBr CS 

li3 flppPatfh 
S & Cache 

Q Con fig 

[[•^ tcinnection Wcard 
S ta Corql 

Ir^ cursors 
il 1^ Debug 

(si Downloaded Program File? 
la IJ Driver Cache 
@ lO Drivers 

I^EnfocujPrefjl=older 

IQ Fonts 
IS lis Help 

^ 14etaCfBal:iDns 

1^ Minidump 
iS Q mi^a^ent 
m IQ insapos 

liamu, 
a 1^ Offline Web Pages 
a li2 PCNEALTH 

1^ Prefetch 



^ fepair 
S Ic3 Resources 
15 13 security 

Iii3 SHELLNEW 
'+I 1^ srchasst 



,1 Q add ins 

OAdobe Illustrator C5 
ifSAppPatch 



_(Detiug 

Al Downloaded Program File^ 
Driver Carhe 



-r-^ 



_imsagent 
Jrri5apps 

ta Offline Web Page5 
ijPQjEftLTH 



43Regt5tfatifln 
QjSHBLLneW 



12 AN 
40 AM 
12 AN 



ISAM 
ISAM 
49 AM 
IJAM 
IJAM 
37 AM 
IJAM 
31PM 



10/13/2004 

10/14/2004 

10/13/2004 

2/12/2005 12: 19 PN 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/14/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/26/2004 

2/12/2005 12:39 PM 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

1/29/2005 10:33 AM 

11/17/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/20/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 

10/13/2004 



34 PM 
12 AM 
12AM 
12 AM 
37 AM 
35 AM 



Fig 2.11 (b). Five non-consecutive files selected 

2.8 Moving and Copying Files and Folders 

Once the files are selected, you can move or copy them using Cut, 
Copy and Paste in three different ways. 

1 ) Click on the Edit menu and make appropriate choice. 

2) Right click on any one of the selected folders or files, in the 
ensuing short cut menu and make suitable selection. 

3) You can use the keyboard combinations Ctrl+X (Ctrl+x) to cut, 
Ctrl+C (Ctrl+c) to copy and Ctrl+V (Ctrl+v) to paste. 

The difference between copying and moving files is that moving 
removes the files or folders from the source location and places 
them in the destination location. Copying leaves the source files or 
folders untouched and makes a copy in the destination location. 



82 



The Windows Explorer copies or moves files using the Windows XP 
Clipboard. A clipboard is a temporary storage area where files or fold- 
ers are stored before being copied to the new location. 

Let us understand copying and moving files with an example. 

2.8.1 Moving Files and Folders 

You are going to see how to move the files or folders by using Folder 
Bar. Explorer Bar may be used to move the files with ease. But Folder 
bar is considered first. If the left pane of Explorer Window is not in 
Folder Bar then click Folders button on the toolbar. Now you are in 
Folder Bar. If the Folders button in the toolbar is highlighted, you are in 
Folders Bar, otherwise you are in Explorer Bar. 

Consider the folder My Documents. It has 17 files and folders. Sup- 
pose you want to move the files Student, Raj, kumar and Exam from 
My documents to the folder Test. Select the files as explained above. 



Ki iU* Mw 



• 



Qbl 



* ^I>ffeua 



&^jia.^.i';.4 111 





iiiOti^-,H*Ptvi: 


¥ M<i****tbrtffti 


_jh>tjtiiii 


* JJOCALTW 


_jFrth«h 


^Viwlw/am 


_]n^ 



r^f.j^ 


]fenv-'t'i-no.i?w+ 


HtFrtaa 


IJfUr^'tO^LO.HOA^ 


F*fF<i». 


IWIif2«WIC:J:-A« 


F*R*H* 


ZfLlfiOXJliJflPtl 


rieFcHH 


I0;L3ri0t»IDJ2AW 


rfcrcJ^ 


j<irnrJd«itiJi*« 


tieFMst 


ltirL-ttMwiO:«*t 


FbfflliM 


ifiria/iftMifr.iiftH' 


\btMK 


UUlSmMHK-.Jlftf 


\tt^ 


lWL3J5DlWie,3^Wt 


l-mr-AUv 


i'\f\ Urvt* ta-M U* 


MmH*lm 




hfaHd>^ 


jifiuv^a^t^ 


hfah^hl 


lunm^jM i&:B **t 


KkFiJft. 


iwri-^™in;s?*rii 


FkFrU. 


tori 3/310* i&ij*K 


FHtaRJ*. 


mfLjy^HHIO^lJA" 


PigFdik. 


3WLJi3«H|S:]!AM 


PtaF4M«r 


IJTO^WKJO^MM 


PlBF«((l!< 


ll/LTfJflH^iatm 


rurdax 


l4i;m™»l<J:l£»l 


ntrcWH 


T3;nrim*i<Ji^w 


rleFcfctei 


IC/nflHWlO:!!:*** 


r-tW* 


HV'iafilMHlO.^^W* 


UttMv 


imUfniinntAftH 


IklcriA)' 


itir[3jH*tiia*Twr 


HftnL^ 


KV^flflnHifTiKr^ 




ir^|^,W^qit*l*« 






inrtaftTMMiP-T/"* 
IflnafflnHII.IFTAH 
1iriri3j7W*|[lKIH 
liWIVMHlC.JfWf 



Fig 2. 12 Four files selected 



83 



Then, Cut the items by using anyone of the three methods explained 
above. 

Next, click on the folder or disk drive to which you want to move these 
files. In this example, click on the folder Test. 



^&ad; - ^ ^ _,.''5earth ,," Folder;' [7]- 

'fiddt^ l^ C'lDoc ument; and Setting;\GACmMy [iocument;\TEST 

rtHfc ^ Name 

si My Document. ©WINWORDS 

^ My Mu^ic SlKt component Final-5h 

^ „.^ pj^t^j,^^ gKit component Ia5t rorrec 

& ■- .-^ |]5S5 

Q y My Computer 6^°^^ 
ffl y My Network Place? 
t EecydeBin 



397 KB M 


crosoft Word Doc, 


12/3/2004 4:51 PM 


UKB M 


crosoft Word Dot,, 


8/1/1997 6:07 AM 


603 KB M 


cro5oft Word Doc. . 


11/19/2004 7:06 PM 


635 KB M 


cro5oftWord[ 


11 4+ PM 


1KB M 


cro5oft Word [ 


11 4'^ PM 


19 KB M 


croOTftWordr 


11 M 1 PM 



TEST Folder 



Fig 2. 13 The Test folder 

Now, Paste the items by using anyone of the three methods explained 
above. 

Figure 2.13 shows the folder Test after the files have been pasted. 
Remember that they have been removed from the folder My Docu- 
ments. 

Now let us see how to move files and folders with Explorer Bar . You 
can move or copy selected files easily in the Explorer Bar. If you are 
not in Explorer Bar, click the Folder in the toolbar. You will be shown 
the Explorer Bar with the following options under File and Folder 

84 



Tasks. 

Move the selected items 

Copy the selected items 

Publish the selected items on the Web 

E-mail the selected items 

Delete the selected items 



Let us suppose you want to move the selected items. To do so you 
click on Move the selected items. You will be provided with Move 
Items list box; you can browse and select the desired destination. You 
can even create a new folder by clicking Make New Folder button 
found at the bottom of the Move Items list box. Click Move button 
adjacent to Make New Folder button to store the selected items in the 
newly created folder. That is all; you have successfully moved the se- 
lected items under TEST. If you want to move a single item, clicking on 
the item will show you 6 options one among them is Move this folder 
under File and Folder Tasks. Follow the same procedure for moving 
group items. 



obbi 






r.Oj? 




Fig 2. 14 Moving Files and Folders with Explorer Bar 
You can also move selected items with Edit menu also. 



85 



From the menu bar, click Edit®Move To Folder as in fig 2.1 5 





r^> 




^^ 






Bm 


** Of C^llS 






liokn <:«« cMhc 










«3 


«iB^ 




S^ 


f3 

1 ttEHcmrutH? 




















* 




^^^ 






■tPM 



F/g 2. 75 Moving through Edit submenu 

You will be taken into Move Items drop down list box. Then follow the 
steps explained in the previous paragraph. 

2.8.2 Copying Files and Folders 

When you copy a file, the original file is left untouched and a fresh copy 
of the file is placed in the destination location. For example, you want 
to copy the files INAUG and GACN from the folder My Documents to 
the folder TEST. 

Again, first select the files 



86 






m- 



^h.A3L'vU •.f^'.,: ■■-:,ti^tiif*r t- 






IBlTn.t^^m In 



H r ta tfKntet mind Dw 



lft,TttEA'rt«JDOq^. 



V A''^^4q^U:k 






« 4ii S*CTrn:^Ti»~ri* 






/^ 




F/g 2. 76 F/7es selected for copying 

Then, Copy the items by using anyone of the three methods explained 
in 2.8 

Click on the folder Test. 

Now, Paste the items by using anyone of the three methods explained 

in 2.8 






Fig 2. 1 7 The Test Folder after copying 
87 



When you want to copy files or folders to a disk in A or B drive, you can 

use the Send To option in the pop up menu, which appears when you 

right click on the file or folder. For example, you want to copy the files 

Kumar and Raj , from the folder My Documents, to a floppy in drive 

A. To do so, first select the file and then, right-click on the selected 

files. 

A shortcut menu as shown in Fig 2.1 8 appears. 



File Edit View Favorites Wh Help 



Folders I (H?]- 



ffiiifw^ Q Ci^Docunients and SettingslGACH^Hy Documents ^TE5T 
Foldets 



30,9 



S 153 My [locumerts 
l^ My Mu5ic 
S My Pictures 

Q 8 '^i' Computer 
a. Jl 3'^ Floppy (A;) 
S tiS Local Disk(C;) 
Q ef disb (D:) 
a 6eEISKfl(El) 

S CD-RW Drive (GI) 
a Q' Control Panel 
Q Q Shared Documents 
S ^Shared Music 

^ Sample Music 
'-' -3 shared Pictures 

': Sample Pictures 
S 1,^ Administrator's Documents 
@ ^ GACH's Documents 
S 1^ Gufes.t's Documents 
S ^lilDte Phone Browser 
S "^ My MetwQrk Places' 
■fif RecydeBin 



Maine: • 
§ddcl 
§Doc3 

BjKit components Final-sh 
SJlit nif nunt+ld iiariei 



icrosoft Word Doc 
crosoft Word Doc 
crosoft Word Doc 
crosoft Word Doc 
crosoft Word Doc 
crosoft Word Doc 
crosoft Word Doc 



Date Modified 
12/3/2004 4:51 PM 
1/20/2005 12:18PM 
11/19/2004 7:06 PM 
11/20/2004 4:37 PM 
lD/10/2004 5:33 PM 
8/1/1997 6:07 AM 
8/27/2005 1:39 PM 



Copy 

Create Shortcut 

Delete 

Rename 

Properties 



Compressed (zipped) Folder 
J Mail Recipient 
'3 My Documents 
Jj^S'A Floppy (ft:) 
^ CD-RW Drive [Gi) 



S 



Fig 2.18 Select Send To 

Click on Send To and 3 V2 Floppy [A] 

Click on 3 V2 Floppy [A] in the left pane to check that the files have 
been copied. 



88 



QbkK * ^ ^ 



E^fli^--- 






i i#piSfih|E:) 

4 gv eil'aA{^.;. 






Fig 2. 19 Contents of floppy disk in drive A: after copying 

Let us see how to copy the files or folders by using Explorer Bar. 

You can copy selected files easily in the Explorer Bar. If you are not in 
Explorer Bar, click the Folders in the toolbar. You will be shown the 
Explorer Bar with Five options under File and Folder Tasks, if you 
select more than one item. Already you have seen the options under 
Moving and Copying Files and Folders 

Let us suppose you want to Copy the selected items you click on Copy 
the selected items, you will be provided Copy Items drop down list 
box ( Fig 2.20 ), you can browse and select the desired destination. 
As already stated, you can even create a new folder by clicking Make 
New Folder tab found at the bottom of the Copy Items drop down list 
box. Click Copy button adjacent to Make New Folder button to store 
the selected items in the newly created folder. That is all; you have 
successfully copied the selected items to the desired location. If you 
want to copy a single item, clicking on the item will show you Copy 
this folder under File and Folder Tasks. Follow the same procedure 
for copying group items. 

89 



l^'Search „ ' Folders |;s;|' 



ind Setting5\GACH\Mi' Docunients'iTEST 




Micro^ofL Wi 
S35 KB 



iivl V' 

I "'I I Microsoft Word Document 



e i My Computer 

lie* Local tek(C;) 
SJBtfdiskaCD;) 
5) 6* DMA (E;) 


S 

1 


S'ilrfDISI!A(F;) 




® si CD-RW Drive CG;) 
■+ '^^ Noha Phone Browser 


V 



To view any subfolderSj dick a plus sign above. 

I Make New Folder | I Copy J Cancel 



:B y Ny Computer | 



Fig 2.20 Copying Files to 3 V2 Floppy [A] with Explorer Bar 

You can also copy the selected Items with Edit menu also. Refer Fig 
2.21 

From the menu bar, click Edit ->CopyTo Folder... 

You will be taken into Copy Items drop down list box. Then follow the 

steps explained in the previous paragraph. 



If you want to copy the selected files from the Explorer Bar to 3 V2 Floppy 
[A], if you have not inserted the Floppy into the Floppy drive, do it so 
now. You just click the option Copy the selected items under File 
and Folder Tasks. Choose 3 V2 Floppy [A] from Copy Items drop 
down list box, under My Computer. Click 3 V2 Floppy [A] then click the 
copy tab at the bottom of Copy Items drop down list box. That is all 

90 



you have copied the selected items into the Floppy disk. If you want to 
copy only a single file you follow the same procedure. 
Note: Remember that the clipboard can hold only one set of items at a 
time. When you copy or move a file or folder to the clipboard, it over- 
writes whatever was stored there earlier. If you need to store the items 
you place in the clipboard permanently, you should make use of 
clipBook. The clipBook has 1 27 pages and you can store an item in 
each page. The clipBook gets items through the clipboard. You can 
transfer item from the clipboard to ClipBook. The items stored in 
clipBook can be shared with the users through the Internet. For using 
clipBook, click Start -* Run. In the Run textbox , enter clipbrd viewer 
and click OK. You will be taken to clipBook Viewer. Click Help -> Con- 
tents. In the ensuing help click Related Topics at the end of the help 
and click Save the contents of the Clipboard to the local clipBook. 
Follow the instruction in the ensuing Help. 

2.8.3 Copying Files to CDs 

Coping files to a CD is often referred to as burning the CD, because a 
laser actually burns the information on to the disk. If you write files on 
CD you should have CD burner installed, of course you should have 
blank disks. There are two types of CD burners and two types of blank 
CDs in the market. CD-R, CD-RW are the two types of CD burners. 
There are CD-R, CD-RW disks also. 

CD-R burner is used to burn data to blank CD-R disk. You can make 
use of the resultant disks in any computer that has CD drive in it. If it is 
an audio CD you can use it in any standard stereo. 

CD-RW burner is used to burn data to either a blank CD-R or CD-RW 
disk. The resulting disk can be used only in computers that have a CD 
drive. The CD-RW disk can be used as an ordinary floppy. You can 

91 



add or delete files from it. But CD-R can be written only once. 

General Method for Copying to CD 

Insert a suitable blank CD into the suitable drive and wait for a few 
seconds. 

In the ensuing dialog box click, open writable CD folder using Win- 
dows Explorer and click OK. 
Here CD-RW Drive is used. 

1 . If dialog box does not appear on the screen within a few seconds of 
inserting the blank disk, open your My Computer folder. Then right 
-click the drive's icon and choose Open, then follow the previous 
step. 

2. Go to the source folders. 

3. Select items you want to copy to the CD. Right click any selected 
item and choose Send to a CD -RW Drive. 

4. Each item to be copied will appear as a temporary file, with black 
arrows pointing downwards as shown in fig 1 .78 

5. Check whether all files that you want to copy are there and verify that 
the data capacity of the combined files is less than the capacity of 
the disk. Then click write these files to the CD under CD Writing 
Tasks in the Explorer bar of the CD's folder Window. 

6. In the first page of CD writing wizard, you can enter a new name for 
CD. It is just like a label to the floppy disk. Delete the date that ap- 
pears. 

7. Wait until the wizard burns the data to the CD. Then click Finish 
button on the last page of the CD Burning Wizard. That is all. 



92 



Open 

New 
Prinh 
Open With. 



Cut 
Copy 



Create Shortcut 

Delete 

Rename 



PrCipertjes 



l^f Desktop (create shortcut) 

! J." I Compressed (zipped) Folder 

__j Mail Recipient 

^^ My Documents 

■j^ a-*^ Fbppy (A:) 

?ctr-W nerve ^'.j 



F\g 2.21 Selecting CD-RW Drive 

When you click Send To, if you have CD-RW drive you will be shown 
CD-RW Drive otherwise the last option will be there. In Fig 2.22 you 
can see CD Writing Tasks, this category will appear only in the com- 
puters which have CD-drive. 



^^DSQI 



I^ 0> <t^t rvKit<B Ted Mr 

o***- ' '<j "t >''*»*^' . f***" pro- 








*- 


M^'.. an 








-a«= 


J 




i^^-— 












_j ■*f»i-i[>...i-Tj, 




iw^rik. v: 




L>:t]|Hb 





Fig 2.22 Files ready to be written to the CD 
93 



2.9 Renaming Files and Folders 

Normally you Rename only one file or folder. In this case, you can Re- 
name the file in any one of the following ways. 

1 ) Click the file or folder. When you are in Explorer Bar, you can choose 
Rename this folder from File and Folder Tasks. The name of the 
selected file MANI gets highlighted. Now, type the new name (SHIVA) 
and press Enter. The new name of the file SHIVA appears in the 
window . Fig 2.23 (a) shows the renaming process. 



O"- o- t 


14A 


»ttb 




^^^ 


» 








- Oo. 




», 


'^^J 


*mr ■ 


>iT 'pt 


p«iL*i>1[4IVd 






rh.r«Ut> 


■WIlfl^H |[k Efa Wi 
■ i>ri)<>£<»« ID- IbMH 

HllJ-Hnfl»:i>?iJ* 




«wi™*«# 1 




-1 - '-•— 
J .,.,.,1 


rtwiT 






'."j,^^ " '..'1 




91 




«a 


ml tM-enMimifBiifiMef Euifl AH&rii mms 




1^^^^ 


M^^iiBl 



F/g 2.23(a) Single file Renaming option ( Explorer Bar) 

You can follow the following methods when you are either in Explorer 
Bar or folder Bar. 



2) To rename a file or folder, right click on the file or folder. Select 
Rename from the shortcut list, which pops up on the screen. Now 
change the name as given above. 

3) From the menu bar, click File -> Rename and rename the file as 
explained in method 1 . 

94 






3.^ 



■^tfyPli^tt 


li3i*^PKti«»t 


UTPir 


««r».i-T^ 


JljKr'iwv^^ 


« «aui[dDld{i::) 


aAOTSfflw 


o.*-i-.i. 




&UAib*ktrAr 


£ L;1 L*<nFtfr«Wi E*»r<M^ 


i^i'.nJ—i 


A LJCWIOP 


fl^Vr-^'i" 




« (^ -n^ frta., 


» tJ urUXKlV^ 


ut iSMlJHiL 


•ri^tuqh 




* LJt^ 


>» tjipijn!: 


XI L](^«T>mFln 


!_jirtti 


,J lEl 


<P O '^OV>^S 


'^ U.Hli™ 


i.»*i.MlRO 


■> ur-i-+-ft'Ci 




]egi3;70iM||[.];Ul 



F/g 2.23(b) Single file Renaming option with Folders Bar 




- 3'-- 



jy.'ij.'a'j' iu-i«,wi 



.1 J ooDiTd Hu tndfHA «IJf«?«tWM'GaeF i[F:itH 






F/g 2.24 The file MANI has been renamed as SHIVA ( Folders Bar) 

95 



If you want to Rename a group of files or folders, there is no special 
help from Explorer Bar. In fact, Explorer Bar misleads you. When you 
select files or folders to Rename, Explorer Bar will not show anything 
about renaming the group of files or folders. But you can follow method 
2 and method 3 explained in the previous page. If you use the right- 
click method the file or folder that you have chosen to right-click, will 
get the name that you have chosen. For example, you have selected 
kumar.doc, student.doc, exam.xis and raj.xis. If you have chosen the 
name "rajan" to rename the group of files or folder, the item that gets 
focus is named as rajan, the other file are named as rajan (1 ), rajan (2) 
and rajan (3). If you follow the menu method, you will have the same 
result. 



File Edit View Favorites Tdois Help 



i 



Q'Bqcl; '■ 1^ ,jt ' 'Searcli ""■ Folders , ]\^' 
flflite' ji3 C:\DQCumentsjrid Settings^GACH'iMy Documents! TE5T 

^ Desktop 
3 ^ My Documents 
■j^ My Ml SIC 
.■^1 My Pictures 
■_.' TEST 
S .)[ My Cnnipiter 

.'^3'^ Floppy (A;) 

9 U-: Local Disk[C;) 

_ ADOBEAFF 

Q Corel temp 

i IQ Document; and Settings 

li ^ Administrator 

i iiij Administrator's Document 

Q CoolJes 
S Q Desitop 
lii '^': Favorite; 
i Q Phone Browser 
i i^ Start Menu 
i ^ WINDOWS 
a ^ Al Users 
S^GACH 
i Q duest 
H Q EWC I 

a [b mm 

ffi \Q Program Files 

[Q TEMP i 

IE3TE5T i 

i E) WINDOWS 

IS ^ disl<a(D;) 
ff t*DrSi;A(E:) 
S t?DI5KA(F;) 
B ij, CD-RW Drive (G;) 



■iSk 



F- I fc""]ft^"crd Dg-jtiiert 



I" 



\ Invitation from SCARF 
■ ■ . ■ ■ ■!""",ijment 



iiitcorriponentsFinal-sh 





Renames the selected item, 



Fig 2.25 Renaming Group of Files 
96 



rtt Sit ifmi piHflM Tnti 



*>•« ^ CVoairoO v^^MbiSfV^iUTfin [>caj>dn^TiOT 









ai3h«uii"ib 






J 



II 



- a.i 






^HK^TM rNi HlHC*t4«x 



F/g 2.26 GroL/p of F//es Renaming process 






a •-...•. 



e 



f*.-.;i.-/:-v.-. if( 



B^"" 






?5 









if LllNu 

OUST 

* HP r*5UiF i 

ih ti CDS*' D'l* LkS'l 



F/g 2.27 Group of Files Renamed 
97 



2.10 Deleting Files and Folders 

Windows Explorer uses a special folder called the Recycle Bin to 
hold deleted files. The Recycle Bin is like the garbage can in your house 
that you empty once it is full. In the same way, you can empty the re- 
cycle bin when you want. Using the recycle bin gives you a chance to 
get back files that you have deleted by mistake. 

To delete files, first select them. Then right click on the files and the 
shortcut menu appears. 



^Jjffl^n^^H 






^HfnjiK. HsliMer Zjiyaut. Il:l 






0'F5I 



J^i'fli ^CrAU/E Wii4 DK.l. IZflt^SH^i 






■jujoefffp 



lira Herimt<nmDti.,. 9)iHViJfixrff\ 






u vJ Arksttth/iliv'iCkvimirt ' I 






frrri r ^irlcti 



1 



Fig 2.28 The shortcut menu with the Delete option 

Select Delete from the shortcut menu and the files will get deleted. (In 
reality, they are moved to the Recycle Bin). You can drag the selected 
file / files to the Recycle Bin or to its Explorer Windows 

When you are in Explorer Bar, you can delete selected files by just 
clicking Delete the selected items from File and Folder Tasks. 



98 



FSa Edit View Favorite? Tool? 



Qa 



■m- 



jbd^S' [@ My l>3cument? 

Li3 Desttop 
- ■ My Documents 
.i,-,l My l^usic 
^ My Pictures 

13 j My Computer 

J|3'ft Floppy (A;) 

a gtf Local Disk (C:) 

\0 ADOBEAPP 

IQ Corel temp 

1^ ir^ Document; and Settings 

B (^.Administrator 

1^ 1^ Adrfiinistrator's Document 

^ Cooljes 
S 53) Pesktop 
li 'if Favorites 
ffl Q Phone Browser 
13 O Start Menu 

aQ.AIlLlsers. | 

fJi I'ij GACH 

4' ■!:- ENc 

li 'li KPCM5 

Si i_ii Program Files 

."_l TEMP 

'Jj TEST 
!ii '^ WINDOWS 
li I J Xitron 
@ ^ disks (D;) 

lia B.a MSKA (E:) 
e £2 D15KA (F:) 
'+■ ^ CD-RW Dnve(G;) 



f fjarrre 

n .^ My Music 
j^ My Pictures 
_|TEST 
il]Doc3 
@ document 
B]lnYitation 
! ^Kit components 



Type - 

File Folder 
File Folder 
File Folder 
Microsoft Word Doc. 
Microsoft Word Doc. 
Microsoft Word Doc. 
Microsoft Word Doc. 
Microsoft Word Doc. 
Microsoft Word Doc. 
Microsoft Word Doc. 



Date Modified 
2/15/2Q05 12:03 PM 
2/15/2005 12:03 PM 
2/15/2005 12:49 PM 
1/20/2005 12:18 PM 
12/3/2004 4:51 PM 
a/27/2005 1:39 PM 
n/19/2004 7:06 PM 
10/18/2004 5:38 PM 
8/1/1997 6:07 AM 
11/20/20044:37 PM 



5S the selected items. 



3B,« 



^y B ; 



Fig 2.29 The My Documents folder after the files have been deleted 



The Recycle Bin folder is available on the Desktop and 
can be used like any other folder. Double-click on the 
Si icon to open it and check if the deleted files are present. 
^pf If you do not want to send the deleted items to the Re- 
RecycieBin cycle Bin, Shift + Delete key combination will achieve 
your goal. If you delete some items from floppy or from 
CD-RW, the contents will be deleted for ever. The con- 
tents will not go to the Recycle Bin. 



99 



Q O i» -P*^ *:■"«" 311- 






» 


b»»U>l ^ BE^nAkB^ 








Aa&. 






mi\^ — ™-. 


fe^^-.™. 








1 





F/g 2.30 r/7e Recycle Bin 

To empty the Recycle Bin, click on the File menu and choose Empty 
Recycle Bin. If you double click the Recycle Bin, it will open in the 
Explorer Bar. You can see the Explorer bar in the left pane. Contents 
of the Recycle Bin are shown in the right pane. Under the Recycle Bin 
Tasks you are shown two alternatives. If you want to restore some 
item, you select them. Then click the Restore, all the selected items 
are sent to their former destinations. If you click Empty Recycle Bin, 
even if you select a few items, all the items whether they are selected 
or not will be eliminated from your computer's storage. First you select 
those items, which you want to recover from the right pane, and click 
Restore all items. You can then click Empty the Recycle Bin. Re- 
member that once the Recycle Bin has been emptied, you cannot get 
back the deleted files. 

Deleting Files and Folders from CD-RW disk : 



You already know that a CD-R disk cannot be modified and CD-RW 
can be used as a floppy. If you want to delete the contents of CD- RW 

100 



disk, you have to follow the following steps. First you should open the 
disk, next you should delete the contents. 

1 ) Insert CD-RW disk into your CD-RW drive. Then one of the three 
possibilities will happen. 

i) The Windows XP Professional may provide you 
with a dialogue box asking you what you want 
to do. Choose open folder to view files using 
Windows Explorer. Go to step 2. 

ii) A program opens and starts playing the CD, close 
the program and then choose open folder to view 
files using Windows Explorer. Go to step 2. 

ill) If nothing happens, open your My Computer 
folder, right-click the icon for the CD-RW drive and 
choose open folder to view files using Windows 
Explorer. Go to step 2. 

2) In the ensuing Explorer Window, click Erase and follow the in- 
structions on the screen. 



—i I. :IL^iif.1*r,(i tfj 'jH 



V tJfo 





Htpr^nnLlhrW^ 






_1 r**rw«i*f 


AntcEi ««h RniHvaUt Hovbdc 


Q. CwtwPmd 


iJ^I-taWi'fl;) .i"T^rA*\Mn 






1 h<#t£«K»:|M|« 


iiOwijtKMAtUW 


^^■^^H 


hV.ln[1»irk.lum 







Fig 2.31 Using Erase 
101 




J^(;DWr.i|i[igi2d[(l _^^^^ 


R 


Erasing the [D... 

lour files m being erased from the CD, 


S 


Erasing all files on the CD-RW disr,,, 






1 






Estiroafed tine left: 35 seconds 










Cancel i 





Fig 2.32(a) Using Erase -1 
2.11 Creating Shortcuts 



Fig2.32(b)UsingErase-2 



Among the many applications available on your computer, there will be 
a few that you use frequently. For example, you enjoy painting and fre- 
quently use Paint. To start Paint, you should click on Start ^ All Pro- 
grams -> Accessories -> Paint. It would be more convenient if you 
could start Paint directly from the desktop. Windows XP allows you to 
create such shortcuts for frequently used applications. When you cre- 
ate a shortcut, Windows XP creates a link which points to the physical 
location of the program. 

Windows XP allows you to create two kinds of shortcuts. 

i) Keyboard shortcuts 

ii) Desktop shortcuts 



102 



2.11.1 Keyboard shortcuts 

You can create a keyboard shortcut for any program by using the Prop- 
erties dialog box of that application. Let us understand this better with 
an example. 

Suppose you want to create a keyboard shortcut for Paint. To do so, 
first click on Start ->AII Programs -» Accessories -* Paint and right 
click on it then select Properties. 




3! Accessibility 
rJTJ flommunications 
^2 E)^l:erl:ainmen^ 
^j System Tools 
J Address Book 
jl Calculator 

Command Prompt 
Notepad 



^B^IV 


Open 


Ml Program Compa 


Run as.,, 


■ Scanner and Ca 


Pin to Start menu 


■ Synchronize 


Send To \ 


%^ Tour Windows > 


Cut 


T^ Windovv5 Explor 


Copy 




Paste 


^ Windo\^5 Movie 




^ WordPdd 


Create Shortcut 




Delete 




Rename 


I 


Sort by Name 


1 


■L..^..^^ m 



Fig 2.33 The shortcut menu with Properties 

The Properties dialog box opens on the screen. Click the Shortcut 
tab. 



103 



Paint Prpperties 



\id Paint 



Target type: Application 

Target location: Svstenn32 
Target: 



C: \"WI N D O WS \Svstem32 



None 



^taH in: 
Shortcut ke^: 
Run: 

Comnnent: Creates and edits drawings^ and displavs and edit 

I Find Target... J | Change Icon... J | Advanced... J 



Normal "A'indo'A" 



3 



OK 



^^1 



Fig 2.34 Paint Properties dialog box 

In shortcut key text box type a letter of your choice, say P and click on 
OK. Now to start Paint, press Ctrl + Alt + P together. 

Note: The shortcut key box will display " None " until you select the key 
and then the box will display Ctrl + Alt + "the key you selected", you 
cannot use ESC, ENTER, TAB, SPACEBAR, PRINT SCREEN, SHIFT 
or BACKSPACE keys. 

2.11.2 Desktop Shortcuts 

To create a desktop shortcut, first locate the application using Win- 
dows Explorer. For example, to create a desktop shortcut for Paint, 
start Windows Explorer and go to the Windows folder (Fig 2.35). 



104 





Be m *Ji FswitH Tools Help 




> 


Qrt* {i j /Seafil 


1^ Folders 


i- 




■!WS*QClW»OW5l!»!ten3Z 


-Qai 



M»s >: 


tos • 


BOsyslE* 


iinslB3!,dil 


ij 3cor^_dm 


JnsllWO.dll 


U'W 


jSmsietotfdl 
JflSBSptJ 


^m^ 


HH. 


Stisokdl 


a in 


|aspeaccE,dll 


Qm? 


ItiscttiJ 


ma 


SmsoMai 


Qm 


SliSoicKidl 


i« 


VBH 


&JIK 


*|[liJFqtcfia,d|| 


Q3(?i 


|m;pbdpjfld|l 


iOMobe 


Hoijpm^ii^l 


S Q aopngit 


^ni;pni';pf"J 


li J,i CatRoot 


^niiportSidl 


iJ ./.CitRootZ 


Pispti' ' dll 


_kOIOR 


_n,;L:dll 


'ijim 


_ini?;ceru,dll 


i Q [onfig 


■ irfisratelc.dll 


^dlicp^ 


^rfisrating.di 


IfiteiK 


ilr^^cHCdll 


a 3l drivers 


*''risrd2x35,dll 


Q eigort 


rfisrd^xlU.I 


Q» 


_,msrd3x'lD,dll 


aiissmi 


^MSROO20,DLL 


IQM 


>srea-4Q,dll 


,jlnet5rv 


jrfisrepl40.| 


iB '^ Macror^ed 


jrfisrle32,dll 


iaNsDtc 


llffiRT^jr.lL 


igtig 


|rf^d5;S,aV 


dniT 


lm4' 


E ^ oobe 


i^5Siti.M. 


3QuikTme 


|m55lgn3Z,d|| 


jl ras u 


^m55ip32,dll 



jEe riipp 

143 KB Applii 

209 KB Applii 

248 KB Applii 

lUKB Applii 



Description; Raint Cor^pany: nicrosoft Cerooratiori File Version: f.i,;;60[i.O Dale Created; 




Fig 2.35 Paint application file in the Windows folder 

Right click on the application file and select Create Shortcut from the 
menu. A new file called Shortcut to is created. Restore the Ex- 
plorer window so that you can see a part of the desktop. Drag and 
drop the shortcut file. Now your desktop will look as shown in the figure 
below. 



105 






;\i^indoiAis Media; 
I 'Rlavei* j 










t? 



Tfm Windows 



F/g 2.36 Desktop with the Shortcut to Paint icon 

Note - The small arrow to the left of the icon indicates that the icon is a 
shortcut. 

You can start Paint by clicking on the shortcut icon. 

2.12 Search 

If you ask a novice computer user where his/her files are, the most 
probable answer will be "in the computer". This is just like saying my 
book is somewhere in the world. Even the experienced users some- 
times lose their files; no matter how well they organize their files into 
folders on their hard drives. The computer will not eat the files. So the 
items must be In the computer, unless you deliberately removed them. 
The Search facility of Windows XP allows you to find the so-called lost 
item. Suppose you want to find a lost file. You cannot find something 
out of nothing. So you should know something about the file that are 
being searched for. 

106 



You may inform the Search, all or part of the file name, approximate 
date (or with in a week, month etc.) on which the file is saved or modi- 
fied or downloaded. 

If you search for a document containing text you should provide a word 
or phrase that appears in the document. You click Start -^ Search (or 
you open any Explorer windows click search button in the toolbar or 
click View -> Explorer Bar -> Search). The left pane of the Explorer 
windows becomes Search Companion. In the right pane you can see 
To start your search, follow the instructions in the left pane. In 
the left pane you can see what do you want to search for ? the first 
choice is Pictures, Music, or video. The meaning is self-explanatory. 
You select this under appropriate conditions. The next choice is "Docu- 
ments (Word processing, spread sheet, etc.)". Select this, under ap- 
propriate conditions. The next choice is All files and folders (remote). 
If you want to search in All files and Folders, select this. If you want 
Computers or People choice, you should have the Internet connection. 
Here you are going to find a lost file, so you have clicked All files and 
folders. You have shown the dialogue box expecting you to furnish the 
information about All or part of the file name. You can make use of 
the wild card entries such as ?,*. The ? Stands for a single letter and * 
stands for zero or more letters. For example, if you know the document 
to be searched starts with "pur" and it is a picture document then you 
should enter a pur* in the text box. In the next text box you are expected 
to provide a word or phrase that appears in the file. You enter .jpg 
there. In look in: drop down list box you browse through it to select 
appropriate entries. Here click Local Hard Drives (c::d:;e:;f:), you click 
it. (You may have to select the above differently, you better consult your 
teacher.) 

107 



File Edit View Favorite 


T00I5 Help 
. 5earth 






^^^^" 




^ 


» 




Folder. [^. 












■ ■ Search Re5ull:5 














"IHs" 


Search Corrpamon 


s^ 


Wame 


In Folder 


5lze Type 


Dateh 


odtfied 




^_- 




To 5tart your search, FoIIolm the in5 


ruction, in the left pane. 












What do you want tosearch fori 

£3 Picture?, rfiU5iCj or video 

H Documents (word processingj 

5pread5heetj etc.) 
H All file, and folder? 
£1 Computers or people 
tjj Information in Help and Support Center 




J- 



J 



Fig 2.37 Search options 



To answer the query when was it modified, if the required file is 
modified within the last week click on appropriate radio button. If you 
do not remember any thing about the period of modification, copying 
or downloading, leave the default selection as such. Click what size 
is it . It will display five options. You have to specify whether the size of 
the file is small, medium, large and another options is specify size. If 
you do not remember the size, leave the default selection as such. You 
do not disturb more-advanced options. Then click Search. Then in the 
ensuing dialog box click Yes, finished searching or else you follow 
the instructions given on the screen or click Bacl< button to repeat the 
Search. The result is shown below. Even though. All Files and Folders 
is chosen for the Search, to introduce you many options, the natural 
option for this Search is Pictures, Music, or video. 

108 



File. Edit VjeW FavpriteS Tools Help 








^^^" 


*• 


O"* O t»jp"«*d-~ 


dars [n|]- 










AcJdress 1 13 Search Results 










"ISSO 


Search CcimpanLon ^ Na 


T,e 


In Fplder 


■Size Type 


Date Modified 





■1 


search by any or .ell of the c 
lielowi. 

All or part of the file name: 


... 


Pir 1 


A word pr phrase in the file: 




Look in: 


\0 Desktop 


*i 


When wa^ it modified? 

Wliat size is it? 

More advanced options: 


'X 


Back 1 Search J | 




K^»^^l 



Fig 2.38 Expanded Search options 

2.13 The Run Command 

The Run command on the Start menu offers an alternate method to 
start applications or open data files. There is one advantage in using 
the Run command. When you use the Run command to open a data 
file, say a word processing document or a paint picture, it automati- 
cally starts the corresponding application also. The Run command is 
most often used to install new software or games from a CD or a floppy 
disk. The disadvantage of using the Run command is that you should 
enter the complete file name along with the Path. Path is the location of 
the file. Path names always start with the drive followed by folder names 
and end with the file name. The drive, folder names and file name are 
all separated by \ (backslash). For example, c:\My Documents\Project 
Report.doc refers to the document file named Project Report in the 
folder My Documents in the C: drive. 

To use the Run command, click on the Start button and select Run. 
Type the file name in the Open box. 



109 



€7 



Typathenarn&of apfogram, fdldetj dacUmentj or 
intErnet re?ource^ and Windows will open ii: hor you. 



Open I l"Li\ProgramFiles\MicrosDfl:Offjce\Office\Wlf-JWOR ^ 



DK 



Cancel 



Browse,,, 



Fig 2.39 The Run command 

The inverted triangle in the Open box displays a list of recently used 
pathnames. The Browse button lets you search for a file or folder. 

2.14 What is new in Windows XP? 

1) Easier Installation and Updating 

Roughly speaking, installation means the addition of program files and 
folders to your hard disk. Windows XP includes several features de- 
signed to make it easier to install and to keep up-to-date, the program 
files and folders 

2) Effective Multi-user Capabilities 

Windows XP keeps each user's files separate so that no user can see 
another users files unless they have been shared deliberately. It lets 
multiple users Log on at the same time. End users run their applica- 
tions. 



110 



3) Redesigned Start menu 

Windows XP provides a redesigned start menu that is easier and 
quicker to use. The start menu appears as a panel containing two col- 
umns. The lower part of the left column automatically reconfigures itself 
to show your most used applications. The Start Menu can also be 
customized to the show Classic Start Menu (similar to the start menu 
of Windows 98). 

4) Taskbar Changes and Enhancements 

These improvements are designed to help beginners. Experienced 
user may switch back to how it was in the earlier versions of Windows, 
if they like. 

Taskbar locking: By default, Windows XP Professional locks 
the Taskbar. This prevents taking the taskbar to an inacces- 
sible area. 

Taskbar scrolling: Taskbar locking prevents flexibility. If the 
taskbar is of a fixed size, buttons for the running applications 
must become very small and useless when 1 or more applica- 
tions run. To tackle the situation Windows XP provides a scroll 
bar on the taskbar when required. 

Taskbar Button grouping: Windows XP provides only one 
button per application when there is not enough space to ac- 
commodate buttons on the Taskbar. This too prevents minimiz- 
ing the size of buttons displayed on the taskbar. It shows the 
name of the current active window along with the number of win- 
dows and a drop-down arrow. If you click the button, it will show 
you the list of Windows by title, you can select any one of them. 

111 



5) Notification area 

The status area (system tray) is known as notification area. Notifica- 
tion area shows a few icons of the programs which are automatically 
executed at start up 

6) Better Audio and Video Features 

Windows XP includes a set of new features and improvements for audio 
and video. 

7) CD Burning 

Windows XP provides built-in CD burning capabilities, which reduce 
the effort taken by the user while writing something into the CD. 

8) Searcli Companion 

Windows XP includes Search Companion, an enhanced search fea- 
ture to search for finding information both on your PC and in the World 
Wide Web. 

9) Enhanced Autoplay Feature 

If you insert a CD and if it starts playing the music from it or installing 
any software it contains, immediately, this facility is called Autoplay. 
This feature is enhanced considerably in Windows XP. 

10) More Games 

Windows XP includes more games than the previous versions of Win- 
dows. This may be a welcome move for young people 

11) Remote Deslttop Connection 

This improved feature lets you use your computer to access a remote 
computer with less effort. 

112 



12) A more Useful Winkey 

One or two winkeys may be provided in modern keyboards. Normally 
the key is situated between Ctrl and Alt keys. This key possesses the 
Windows logo. Windows XP includes more functionality for the Winkey. 
You are provided table with the uses of Winkey. 

WINKEY COMBINATIONS 



Winkey Combination What it does 

Winkey Toggles the display of the Start menu 

Winkey+B Moves the focus to the notification area 



Winkey+Break 
box 

Winkey+D 

Winkey+E 

Winkey+F 



Displays the System Properties dialog 



Displays the Desktop 

Opens an Explorer window showing My 
Computer 

Opens a Search Results window and 
activates Search Companion 



Winkey+Ctrl+F 



Winkey+F1 



Opens a Search Results window, acti- 
vates Search Companion, and starts a 
Search for Computer 

Opens a Help and Support Center window 



113 



Winkey+L Locks the computer 

Winkey+M Issues a Minimize All Windows command 

Winkey+Shift+M Issues an Undo Minimize All command 

Winkey+R Displays the Run dialog box 

Winkey+Tab Moves the focus to the next button in the 

Taskbar 

Winkey+Shift+Tab Moves the focus to the previous button in 

the Taskbar 

Winkey+U Displays Utility Manager 

1 3) Improvement for portable computers 

Windows XP includes several improvements for portable computers 
(such as Note book computers). 

14) More Help 

Windows XP delivers more Help-and more different types of Help-than 
any other version of Windows. You have already seen some help top- 
ics of interest. 

15) Network Connectivity 

Windows XP provides various improvements in network connectivity. 

16) Multiple Monitor Support-For Both Desktop and Laptop. 

Windows XP Professional also introduces a new technology called 
Dual View, which offers excellent opportunities to multiple monitor sup- 
port especially to laptops. 

114 



The above characteristics can apply to both Windows XP Professional 
and Windows XP Home. 

The following Characteristics strictly belong to Windows XP Profes- 
sional 

17) Backup and Automated System Recovery (ASR) 

Windows XP Professional includes a Backup utility and an ASR fea- 
ture that can be activated from boot up to restore a damaged system. 

18) Offline Files 

Offline files allows you to store copies of files located on network drives 
on your local drive so that you can work with them when your computer 
is no longer connected to the network. 

19) Remote Desktop 

Remote Desktop allows you to access the Desktop of the computer 
connected remotely as if you are accessing the Desktop of your own 
computer. If you need to connect to your computer remotely via Re- 
mote Desktop Connection, you need Windows XP Professional rather 
than Windows Home. So far, you have seen features that caught your 
eyes. Now, you are going to see the facilities hidden in Windows 
XPProfessional. 

20) Protected Memory Management 

Windows XP offers fully protected memory management. With this fa- 
cility, Windows XP can handle memory errors effortlessly. 

21) System File Protection 

Windows XP offers a feature called System File Protection that pro- 
tects your system files from inadvertent mistakes on your part. 



115 



22) System Restore 

Windows XP provides a System Restore feature. This is more effec- 
tive than System Restore feature found in Windows Me. 

You can use System Restore to rollback the changes to an earlier point 
at which the system was working properly.. 

23) Device Driver Rollback 

Windows XP tracks the drivers you install and lets you roll back the 
installation of the driver. In other words, you can revert to the driver you 
were using before. 

24) Compatibility with Windows 9x Applications 

Windows XP runs all applications that would run on Windows 9x, Win- 
dows NT and Windows 2000. 

2.15 Guarding Against Viruses 

The literal meaning of virus is poison. Virus enters into the living things 
and passes its code to the cells of the host. The host cell forgets to 
undertake its own work, it becomes the industry for producing viruses. 
Computer virus is a mischievous program designed to damage the 
Software, Hardware and / or data. 

The technique of the biological virus is employed by the computer vi- 
rus also. It enters your computer as innocuous software and multiplies 
many times. In that process, it takes the lion's share of the memory 
normally, erasing your own useful programs. 

Though virus started from the Bell Laboratory in the name of core wars, 
it showed its ugly head to the world by the handiwork of a self taught 
Software Engineer. But still the method of creating viruses was kept as 
a secret. One of the eminent computer professionals, while receiving 

116 



a prestigious award, revealed the secret of creating viruses to the au- 
dience. The entire computer world was shell-shocked. This opened 
the Pandora box. From then on, the computer world is cursed with many 
viruses. Most of them are created by the students to just show their 
intelligence to the world, thus causing a loss of millions of dollars. The 
virus designers mainly attack windows OS. 

Viruses come in three basic flavours. They are File infectors. Boot 
sector viruses and Trojan horse viruses 

i File infectors attach themselves to executable files and spread 

among other files when you run the program. 

i Boot sector viruses replace the hard disk's master boot record 

(or the boot sector on a floppy disk) with their own twisted ver- 
sion of the bootstrap code. This lets them load themselves into 
memory whenever you boot your system (the famous 
"Michelangelo" virus is one of these boot sector beasts). 

i Trojan horse viruses, which appear to be legitimate programs 

at first glance but when loaded, proceed to viciously damage 
your data: 

i Viruses are, by now, an unpleasant fact of computing life, and 

you just have to learn to live with the threat. But somehow in the 
beginning, the Microsoft chose to ignore this ugly threat, but 
now Microsoft deals with this crime more seriously in Windows 
XP. There are vendors who provide antiviral vaccines that will 
protect you from the hazards of this threat. Antivirus is a pro- 
gram to safeguard your system from the virus programs. 

There are many such antiviruses, which make the life of the program- 
mers somewhat easy. 
Here are two tips to keep your system virus-free: 

1 . The main source of the viruses is the floppy disk. So, one should 
be very careful about the floppies. 

117 



2. Now-a-days, the Internet is the major source of producing vi- 
ruses. One should be very careful while downloading files from 
the Internet. Keep your virus utility's virus library up-to-date. By 
some accounts, more than 1 00 new virus strains are re- 
leased each month, and they just get nastier and nastier. Regu- 
lar updates will help you keep up-to-date. 

The Economical Explorer Keyboard 

If you want to have alternative methods for the mouse click, here is the 
table. 



Alt+Enter Display the properties sheet for the selected objects. 

Alt+F4 Closes Explorer ( actually closes the active window ). 

Alt+left arrow Takes you back to a previously displayed folder. 

Alt+right arrow Takes you forward to a previously displayed folder. 

Backspace Takes you to the parent folder of the current 
folder. 



Ctrl+A 



Selects all the objects in the current folder. 



Ctrl+C 
Ctrl+V 

Ctrl+X 
Ctrl+Z 



Copies the selected object to the Clipboard 

Pastes the most recently cut or copied objects 
from the Clip 

Cuts the selected objects to the Clipboard. 

Reverses the most recent action. 



118 



Delete Sends the currently selected objects to the 

Recycle Bin. 

F2 It helps to rename the selected object. 

F3 Displays the Find dialog box with the current folder 

as the default. 

F4 Opens the Address toolbar's drop-down list. 

F5 Refreshes the Explorer window. This is handy if you 

have made changes to a folder via the command line 
or a DOS program and you want to update the Ex- 
plorer window to display the changes 

F6 Cycles the highlight among the All Folders list, the Con- 

tents list, and the Address toolbar. 

Shift + Delete Delete the currently selected objects without sending 
them to the Recycle Bin. 

Shift+F1 Displays the context menu for the selected objects. 

Tab Cycles the highlight among the All Folders list, the 

contents list, and the address toolbar. F6 does the 
same thing. 

Summary 

i All information on disks are stored as Files. Every file has an 

unique file name. 

A collection of files is called a Folder. 
i Windows Explorer is an application that allows you to manage 

your files and folders. 
i Windows Explorer provides two Bars. They are Explorer Bar, 

Folders Bar. Explorer Bar provides easy way to move, copy or 

delete. 

119 



i Using Windows Explorer, you can, View the files and folders on 

your disk- 

i Create new folders. Copy and move files and folders. Rename 
files and folders 

i Delete files and folders 

i Create shortcuts for frequently used files and applications. 

i CD-RW can be used as a floppy. 

i The Search feature allows you to search for files or folders. 

i The Run command provides an alternate way to start applica- 

tions and open data files. 

i Viruses are ugly programs that spoil work. One has to be care 

ful about them. 

Exercises 

I. Fill in the blanks 

1 . Information is stored as in your computer. 

2. Every file name has two components: the 
. and the . 

3. is collection of files. 

4. allows you to manage your files and folders. 

5. The pane in Windows Explorer displays a list 

of folders. 

6. The display in the Explorer Bar is sensitive. 

7. The command allows you to search for files or 

folders. 

8. The command provides an alternate method 

to start applications and open data files. 

9. The Search command is available on the Start menu. It is also 
available on the toolbar. 

1 0. A plus sign to the left of a folder in the left window of Explorer 
indicates the presence of . 

1 1 . The key is used to select a group of files whose 

names are not displayed next to each other in the Explorer win- 
dow. 

120 



1 2. The CD can be used as a Floppy. 

13. Alt + F4 key combination is used to 
active window. 

II. State whether the following statements are True or False 

1 . In Windows XP two files in the same folder can have the same 
name. 

2. Windows XP allows you to give file names with spaces. 

3. A folder can contain several subfolders: 

4. Windows Explorer allows you to work with only one file at a time. 

5. You can start Windows Explorer by right-clicking on the Start 
button. 

6. There is no difference between copying and moving files. 

7. In Windows XP, files cannot be deleted. They can only be moved 
from their folders to the Recycle bin. 

8. The Clipboard is a temporary location for files being copied or 
moved. 

9. The Send To option is used to copy files to a floppy disk. 

1 0. You can search files based on file type using the Search com 
mand. 

11. In Windows XP, the file name should not exceed more than eight 
characters. 

1 2. Shift + Delete deletes the selected item / items permanently. 

III. Answer the following 

1 . Write short note about opening Explorer Window in Explorer 
Bar and Folders bar ? 

2. What is the Run command used for? 

3. What are files and folders ? 

121 



4. Write a short note on file names. 

5. Explain the Recycle Bin. How is it used? 

6. How do you select files in Windows Explorer ? 

7. Describe briefly the different ways in which you can view infor- 
mation in Windows Explorer. 

8. Describe the different parts of the Windows Explorer window. 

9. How do you create a new folder? 

1 0. What is the difference between copying and moving files? 

1 1 . Describe the different methods to copy the selected files. 

1 2. How will you Rename a group of Files ? 

13. How will you Copy files to CD? 

1 4. Distinguish between CD-RW and CD-R ? 

1 5. Explain the different ways in which the selected files are moved. 

1 6. What are the special features available in Windows XP Profes 

sional alone ? 



122 



CHAPTER 3 

LINUX 

3.1 History of Linux 

While Linus Torvalds was studying in the University of Helsinki, 
Finland, he had to do a project according to the norms of the University. 
At that time, students used a version of Unix called Minix created by 
Prof.Andrew S.Tannenbaum. After studying Minix, Linus was very much 
attracted by the elegance and effectiveness of its parent Unix. The Unix 
operating system was created mainly by the efforts of Ken Thompson. 
Linus Torvalds decided to develop an effective PC version of Unix for 
Minix users. He called it Linux by combining his first name with the last 
letter of Unix (also Minix) and he released version 0.11 in the year 1 991 . 
Linux was widely distributed over the Internet. The other programmers, 
in the subsequent years, refined the new operating system, Linux and 
added some features found in standard Unix systems. Interested 
programmers all over the world contributed something to the 
improvement of Linux. In this way, it has got a distinctive advantage 
over the other Operating Systems. Normally, the Operating Systems 
are developed under a closed environment. A very limited number of 
people were allowed to remove the errors in the entire code within a 
fixed deadline, whereas the Linux code was available to one and all, 
they could fix the errors, under friendly atmosphere without any 
constraint. All these produced useful code. Linux has all the utilities 
needed for the the Internet. 

In its simplest format, it can run effectively requiring just 4MB of memory. 
It is amazing that this operating system with all its features, occupies 
such a small memory. This has not affected its stability or speed. 

Even though Linux was developed by the contribution of many people 
throughout the world, it is not unwieldy. Linux was developed from the 
beginning according to the ANSI standard for Unix called the Portable 
Operating system Interface for Computer Environments (POSIX). Linux 
is specifically designed for Intel-based PCs. 

123 



There are two versions for each release of Linux .One is a stable version 
and the other is a trial (or beta) version. In a n. x .y version, the first 
number n specifies version number, if second number x is even then 
this is stable otherwise it is a beta version. For example 2.2.5, here 
X = 2. Therefore this is a stable version. 

The Internet is a boon for Linux development; it enables the people 
through out the world to interact with others to develop Linux. Today, 
many companies provide support for Linux over the Internet. There 
are many Linux groups on the Internet, and registration to these forums 
is free. You can subscribe to and get the latest information from these 
forums. 

3.2 Logging in / Logging out of Linux 

Linux systems allow many users to work simultaneously. A user normally 
works at a user terminal. You have to establish connection to the Linux 
system, the system after showing some information; will show Login 
prompt(prompt is a helping message), which is the location where you 
enter your user name. Your Login name is nothing but user (your) name. 
You need not be frightened by the word Login, which simply means 
user here. 

Assume a house with many rooms and one person occupies one room 
and each room contains invaluable treasure. How will you safeguard 
each room of that house? The entire house should be locked inside 
and a watchman should be employed. The arrangement is that you 
should tell him your name and your identity code. He has a list of names 
and matching identity codes for each individual. If the name and the 
identity code match with any of the name and its identity code, then 
and only then, he will allow you to enter into your room. If the name and 
the identity code do not match with any of the names and the 
corresponding identity codes then you will be asked to repeat your 
name and identity code. This process continues until user says the 



124 



valid name and identity code. 

The same process happens in Linux also. When you connect to the 
Linux system, you will be asked to enter your Login name at the Login 
prompt, you have to enter your Login name and you will be shown the 
Password prompt. You have to enter your password. To keep your 
password a secret, the Linux system will not display your password. 
The system compares these two items with the system files. If the match 
is not found, then you should enter these two items. Ofcourse, if the 
match is found you will be shown the following prompt; 

[ilamathi@localhost ilamathi] $ 

Here you assume your login name is ilamathi. 

You should be careful about the lower case and upper case letters 
because the system is case sensitive. The verification process does 
not allow any unauthorized person to access any of your directories or 
files. Normally, not necessarily, the name of the user is the Login name. 
The Home Directory is assigned to the user when he/she enters into 
the system for the first time, by the System Administrator ( SA ). You 
will learn about SA later. 

Logout Process 

If you come out of the system without closing your /home directory then 
the other people may tamper with your work. So it is mandatory to 
Logout of the Linux system. Entering exit or logout at the command 
prompt will end your current Linux session then the system displays the 
Login prompt on the screen for other users. 



125 



Changing the password 

Suppose you have an uneasy feeling that someone knows your 
password. Then you have to spend sleepless nights. The Linux 
operating system has its own method of solving your problem. It allows 
you to change your password. A user can change his/her password 
with the passwd command. The steps followed by the user, ilamathi, 
to change her password are depicted below. The actual prompt is 
similar to the one shown here. 

Example: 

[ilamathi@localhost ilamathi]$ passwd ( the user enters his/her 

password) 

Changing password for ilamathi (current ) password: (User enters the 

current password) 

New password: (User enters the new passeord) 

Retype new password: (User re-enters the new password) 

passwd: all authentication tokens updated successfully 

[ilamathi@localhost ilamathi]$_ 

The passwd command asks for the old password. This command is 
essential to check up the authenticity of the user, otherwise the mischief 
mongers will play havoc on the work of the other people. Again the 
system demands that the user should make up his/her mind about the 
new password. That is why it asks the new password twice. 

Example: 

[ilamathi@localhost ilamathi]$ passwd 

126 



Changing password for ilamathi 

( current ) password: (User enters the current password) 

New passwd:(User enters the new passeord) 

Retype new password: (User misspells the new password) 

Sorry, passwords do not match 

New password: 

If you commit a mistake in typing the current password (that is the 
password that you want to change) then you may not be an authenticated 
user. So, there is a suspicion that you are trying to change someone 
else's password. Therefore you will not be allowed to change the 
password. If two entries of the new password do not match then the 
system is in a dilemma. The system does not know which is to be 
accepted. So, your new password is outrightly rejected. Hence you 
should be careful about the old as well as the new passwords. 

Some of the rules for changing the password: 

The password should not be less than six characters in length. 

When changing a password, the new password should differ from the 

old password by at least three positions 

The password should be different from the user's Login name. 

The new password cannot be the same as the old password. It is 

ridiculous to change the password with same password. 

Since the SA can execute control over the entire system, SA can change 

the password of any user of the Linux system. 

3.3 The Linux File System 

How will you store information in a computer as long as you wish to 

127 



retain them? The information can be stored in a file. But, what is a file? 

File is a collection of records. A record gives information about 
an entity. An entity may be a student or a railway passanger in the 
reserved compartment with a valid ticket. For example your mark sheet 
also is a record. A record consists of fields. Elementary fields cannot 
be further subdivided to give any meaning. Name, Rolino are examples 
for fields. The collection of the mark sheets of your classmates is an 
example of a file. Now consider the collection of mark sheets of all 
students of your school. This is a collection of files, which is called as a 
directory. The school has got many files such as mark sheet, TC, Pay 
roll. They should be kept separately under suitable captions. The school 
has data about each student for TC. For a class, these data will 
constitute a file. All relevant files of the same type will form another set 
of files called a directory as already stated. In this fashion a school 
may have several set of files. Mark sheets file should be separated 
from the data files for TC and so on. So the school has to place mark 
sheet file separately from other collection of files. The collection of same 
type of files is placed in a directory. A single fixed disk can store 
thousands of files. Arranging the files in the above mentioned manner 
would make accession a particular file easier. All the files are stored 
on the disk under one main directory called the root directory. The files 
are arranged under a tree structure. If you stand on your head and 
watch a tree (without trunk), the root of the tree is at the top then comes 
braches, braches will give rise to other branches and ends up with 
leaves. The leaf represents the file, the branches represent directories 
or sub directories and the root as you have guessed is the root directory. 
The root directory has been further sub-divided into directories such 
as bin, boot, home, usr, etc, lib, dev, tmp. User directories are created 
under the home directory. The home directory is written as /home. This 



128 



shows that home directory is the child of /(called root) directory and 
root directory is the parent of home directory. There is no parent for 
the root directory. There is no child for the file. 



root 



bin 



ilamathi 




bin 



personal 



h 




\ 




t 


3 

1 




r 

3 


t 




j 


h 




n 

i 

n 










9 



Fig 3.1 Linux directory structure 

When a child is born, the child should be named. In a similar fashion, 
when you create a file, you should name it. You should follow the following 
rules to create a file. 



129 



The file name 

1 . may contain characters, underscores, numbers, periods and 
commas. 

2. can be up to 256 characters. 

3. should not have a number as the first character. 

4. should not begin with a period. (Even though under certain 
special circumstances you may start a filename with a 

period, you will be in a better position if you do not make use of it. If a 
file starts with a dot, that file is called a dot file. The dot files are used 
normally by the system.) 

5. should not contain slash, question mark and asterisk. 

6. should not duplicate command names. 

The filename may have a primary and a secondary name. The name 
before the period is called the primary (or proper) name. The name 
after the period is called the secondary name or extension. The 
extension is used to classify the files. For example consider files with 
extension c (.c files). These represents c files. 

The name that you give, when you create a file or directory, is not its full 
name. The full name of a directory is its path name. The tree structure 
of the file system can be used to unambiguously identify and reference 
any directory or file. For 

example full name of the file C programming is /home/kumaran/ 
cprogramming 

3.4 Types of Users 

There are four types of users in the Linux system. They are 

1. The System Administrator or the Root User 

The System Administrator (SA) is primarily responsible for the smooth 
functioning of the system. The SA also creates /home directories for 

130 



the users and he/she does the service to groups of users for the system. 
He/she is the only one to use floppy disk and CD-ROM in the system 
and takes backups to prevent loss of data due to system breakdown. 
In Linux, he/she is also known as the root user or super user. The prompt 
for the root user is # while the prompt for others is $. 

2. File Owner 

The user who creates a file is said to be the owner of that file. The 
owner of a file can perform any operation on that file such as copying, 
deleting, and editing. He/she can execute a file after changing the file 
access permission by chmod command. You will see chmod 
command later. 

3. Group Owner 

A group of people who work on a single project should share their files 
for efficiency. The files are created in the group leader's /home 
directory. All the members of the group share their files. This group of 
people is called group users. A group of users is also given a name, 
just as a user is given a name. 

4. Other Users 

All the users of the system who are not members of a project group are 
referred to as Other Users, for the files of that group. Other Users are 
users who do not belong to that particular group. 



131 



3.5 Directory Commands 
The general form of Commands 

The first thing that you are expected to know is some fundamental 
concepts of commands. The general format of a command is: 
Command option argument 

Not all commands need the "option" and "argument". Some needs 
option alone some needs argument alone and while others need both. 
For example Is (abbreviation for list but do not try to help the system by 
typing list instead of Is. This helping action is greeted with an error 
message. The command Is saves you from typing two more characters, 
but it adds human memory load.) command works without option and 
argument, with argument alone, with option alone and with both. 

Example : 

Command option argument 

Is 

Is -I 

Is *.c 

Is -I file1 

You will meet the above shortly. 

Command consists of a single word. The command generally starts 
with an alphabet. You do not have any control over the names of the 
commands. You should give the spelling and case as such. 

Option starts with a minus (dash) sign followed by a single letter but 
you can combine two options. Case of the letter is very important. There 
should be no blank space between the minus sign and the letter. The 
minus sign distinguishes an option from a command and argument. 
The same option will not behave in the same fashion with different 
commands. The option is influenced by the command preceding it. 
For example -a option with Is command (Is -a) brings details 

about the files in the current directory including the hidden files. But the 
same option -a in [ $mark -ge 81 -a $mark -le 100 ] behaves as 
logical and of C programming. 

132 



Argument usually refers the name of the file on which the command 
should work with. It should start with an alphabet. Some system files 
called dot files start with a . (dot). 

In the Fig. 3.1 even though there are two bins and two personal 
directories, they can be uniquely identified by the system because of 
the path name. The path names for the bin directories are /bin and / 
usr/bin. The first slash (/) always represents the root directory. Similarly 
the path names of the personal directories are/home/kumaran/personal 
and /home/ilamathi/personal. Even though the personal directories 
shared the common path upto /home, they take different routes later. 
This tree structure prevents the name collision. If you place all your files 
at one place, the same names cannot be used. Further it will take more 
time to search for a particular file. In Linux, you write a path name by 
listing each directory in the path separated by a forward slash. As 
already stated, a slash before the first directory in the path, represents 
the root. Path name also applies to files. The file is created within a 
directory by specifying a name. The system identifies the file with 
filename combined with the path of the directories from the root to the 
file's directory. 
Path names are of two types. They are 

1 . the Absolute path name and 

2. the Relative path name. 

An absolute path name is the complete path name of a file or directory 
starting with root directory. 

A relative path name begins with your working directory. It is the path of 
the file relative to your working directory. 

Referring to the directory structure of the Fig. 3.1 , if your working 
directory is kumaran, the relative path name for the file 'job' is /personal/ 
job. The absolute path name for the same file is /home/kumaran/ 
personal/job. 



133 



How will you identify the current directory path? At times, you may not 
know where you are in the directory system. At such times pwd (print 
working directory or path of your working directory or the present 
working directory) is handy. You may assume that ilamathi has logged 
on the system and given pwd command in the $ prompt as follows: 
[ilamathi@localhost ilamathi] $ pwd 
/home/ilamathi 
[ilamathi@localhost ilamathi] $ 

will be displayed. The /home/ilamathi is the response of the system 
and gives the absolute pathname of home directory of ilamathi. Unless 
otherwise specified, the line next to the command is the output. 

Changing the Current Directory 

The cd (change directory) command changes the current directory to 
the specified directory. For example the current user ilamathi wants to 
switch over from her home directory to /usr/bin. She first finds out the 
current directory to ascertain her position and then she switches over 
to /usr/ bin. She executes the following commands at the command 
prompt. 

[ilamathi@localhost ilamathi] $ pwd 

/home/ilamathi 

[ilamathi@localhost ilamathi] $ cd /usr/bin 

[ilamathi@localhost bin ] $ pwd 

/usr/bin 

If she wants to move to parent directory of the current directory then 
she has to use cd .. at the $ prompt. 

cd command will not show the directory on the screen. To show the 
directory, pwd command should be given at the $ prompt. 

Note: The double dots (..) denote the path of parent directory. The single 
dot(.) represents the directory itself. There should be a blank space 
between cd and .. and there should be no blank space between the 

134 



two dots. 

Example: 

[ilamathi@localhost bin] $ cd .. 
[ilamathi@localhost/usr] $ pwd 

/usr 

[ilamathi@localhost/usr] $ cd .. 
[ilamathi@localhost/] $ pwd/ 

Now kumaran has logged into the system and he is currently in the 
directory 

/usr/bin. The user now wants to go to his home directory and he has to 
give simply the cd command. This will take him to his home directory. 

Example: 

[kumaran@localhost bin] $ cd 
[kumaran@localhost kumaran] $ pwd 
/home/kumaran 

Note: The cd command without any path name always takes a user to 
his/her home directory. 

kumaran is currently in the directory, /usr/bin. He decides to go to his 
personal directory. The easiest way in which this can be achieved is 
to use the combination of tilde (~) sign and /personal. 
[kumaran@localhostbin] $ -/personal 
[kumaran@localhost personal] $ pwd 

/home/kumaran/personal 
[kumaran@localhost personal] $ cd ~ 
[kumaran@localhost kumaran] $ pwd 
/home/kumaran 

Note: The tilde sign is a substitute for your home directory. 

135 



Assume kumaran is in his personal directory and he wants to go to his 

health directory. The cd .. command combined with /health will do the 

trick. He can give the following command at the $ prompt. 

[kumaran@localhost personal] $ cd .. /health 

[kumaran@localhost health] $ pwd 

/home/kumaran/health 

A directory under another dirctory is called the subdirectory of the latter 

directory. 

Creating a Directory 

The user kumaran wants to create an insurance directory under his 
health directory. He is already in the health directory. He should make 
use of micdir (mal<e directory) command. This command creates the 
directory specified after the ml(dir command, under the current 
directory. But the newly created directory will not become the current 
directory automatically. If you want move to the newly created directory 
you have to make use of cd command. 

[kumaran@localhost health] $ ml(dir insurance 

A new directory under health is created. 

You can specify the full path to make a directory with ml(dir command. 

Removing a Directory 

When there is a provision to make a directory, there should be a 
provision to remove a directory also. Can you guess the command? 
Yes, you are right! It is rmdir (remove directory). 



Example: 

[kumaran@localhost health] $ rmdir insurance 

If you want remove a directory, the directory 

136 



1 ) should be empty and 

2) should not be the current directory. 

Kumaran did not store any thing in the insurance and the current 
directory is only health not insurance. So, it is possible to delete the 
insurance directory. 

If you want to remove a directory, which is not empty, you can make 
use of rm command, which will be discussed shortly. 

As in the case of mkdir command, you can use full path. 

Listing the Contents of a Directory 

Suppose you want to find out the name of the files and the subdirectories 
of a directory. Is is the only candidate to achieve this. For example the 
user Kumaran wants to know the names of the files and directories of 
/home/kumaran, he must give the following command. 
[kumaran@localhost kumaran] $ Is /home/kumaran 
health cprogramming c++programming personal. 

[kumaran@localhost kumaran] $ Is - F 

health / cprogramming C++ programming personal / 

The option -F adds / at the end of the directories and sub-directories. 

Note: The simple Is also will give you the same result since kumaran is 
in his /home directory (without / at the end of the subdirectories). 
If you want to have the information about the current directory, simple Is 
command fulfills your requirement. If you want to have more information 
about the files and sub-directories you should give -I option with Is 
command. The option -I will not list any hidden files but -a option with 
Is will list all the files and the sub-directories including the hidden files. 
You can combine the options -a and -I in any one of the following ways 
-al,-la, -a-l or -I -a. 



137 



The common options available with Is command are given in the 
following table. 

Option Function 

-a Lists all the files including hidden files. 

-F Shows the file type along with the name (Vis added at 

the end of each directory to distinguish it from file). 
-R Lists Working Directory as well as all sub-directories.. 

-r Displays files and sub-directories in the reverse order, 

-s Sorts by file size. 

-A Displays the files of almost all directories except the . 

and .. directories 

3.6 Other Commands 

Manipulating the screen 

The clear command clears the screen. The same thing can be achieved 
by tput clear command also. 

The command tput cup 20 20 will position the cursor at row 20, column 
20. 

Extracting the Help 

If you want to have help for some command say Is you have to use the 
command man (manual). The man command works as Man Friday 
(a general servant or employee who does all kinds of jobs) 

Example: 

$ man Is 

You can also specify the level of help you need from man, the level 
number should be specified in between man and the command for 

138 



which the help is sought. Now you can get help, online. 

The echo Command 

The echo command works as a combination of printf () and "\n" of C 

programming. If you want to display a message to the user you can 

make use of echo command. 

Example: 

$ echo " Please enter your name" 

Please enter your name will be displayed on the screen and the cursor 

will be on the next line. If you want to have the cursor in the same line 

with the message, then you should use the -n option with the echo 

command. 

Example: 

$ echo -n "Please enter your name" 

The double quotes ("") improve readability. You can also give the above 

statement as follows 

$ echo -n Please enter your name 

Summary 

You may enter into a Linux session by Logging on to the Linux system. 
You may come out of a Linux session with the Logout or exit command. 
You can change your password. 

Linux uses a hierarchical file system to enable faster access to files. 
There are different types of files in Linux, such as: 

■ Ordinary files ■ Directory files ■ Special files 

The types of users for files are: 
. Root user 

■ File owner 
■Group owner 

■ Other users 

The general format of a command is: 

139 



command option argument 

Some of the commonly used as directory commands are: 



■ pwd 


Prints the current working directory. 


. man 


gets help 


. mkfs 


formats a floppy. 


■cd 


changes the current working directory 


- mkdir 


creates, a new directory . 


■rmdir 


Removes an empty directory 


■Is-I 


displays the contents of a directory. 


.echo 


used for prompting. 


Fill in the blanks 


1. 


Ken Thompson is the creator of the 




system. 


2. 


Minix was created by 



operating 



3. The root user (SA) is empowered to change the 
of any user. 

4. The user can login into the system by entering his / her 
nameand 

5. The user can change his / her password by entering the 
old (current) Password with 

6. Linux is a user system. 

7. The prompt for the root user is . 



8. To find out the current directory the 
command is used. 

9. There should be at least one between cd 

and .. 

1 0. sign represents full path of your home 

directory. 

State whether the following are True or False 

1 . Ken Thompson created Minix. 

2 . A small number of people from Hungary alone improved 

140 



Linux. 

3. In simplest form Linux needs only 4MB of memory. 

4. The version n.x.y is stable if x is an odd number 

5. Login can be achieved by the user password alone. 
6.. Logout can be achieved by entering both logout and 

exit. 

7 . The user alone can change his/her password. 

8 . In Linux, hierarchical structure is employed to make the 

search easier. 
9. All users without any exception have $ prompt only. 

1 0. One of the other terms for SA is super user. 

11. To change from one directory to the other change 
directory command is used. 

Answer the following 

1. Who is the super user? 

2. How will you change your current password? 

3. What are the rules that you should follow when you change 
your password? 

4. How will you know your working directory? 

5. What are the privileges of the root user? 
6.. How will you know a hidden file name? 

7. How will you sort your files by size? 

8. What are the essential conditions to remove a directory 
using rmdir command? 

9. How will you execute a file in a floppy disk with the help o 
ofSA? 

10. How will you create a directory? 

1 1 . How will you display the files, directories and 
subdirectories and explain with options? 

12. Explain the function of man. 



141 



3.7 File Commands 

Displaying the contents of the file 

The cat command lets the cat (contents of the file) out of the bag (file) 
but the more command does more. The cat command shows the 
contents of the specified file normally on the screen. If the file is 
lengthy, it will run so quickly, what you see, in the end, is the last page. 
The command more is handy, in such situations. It will show one page 
at a time; if you want to move to the next page or the previous page you 
have to press f (forward) or b (backward) keys 
respectively.Strictly speaking the cat and more are filters. They filter 
the data that pass through them. 

There is one tee command, which does double the work of the cat 
command. The tee command is just like the T pipe. This pipe is made 
up of two tubes. The first part is a horizontal tube and the second part 
is a vertical tube. If water is allowed to flow through the T pipe, (placed 
in a horizontal plane) water flows horizontally and vertically 
simultaneously. In a similar manner the tee command takes the input 
from the standard input and displays the content on the screen (just 
like cat command) and stores the same in the file specified, after the 
tee command. 

In Linux all files are arranged as a continuous stream of bytes. There is 
only one standard type of file in Linux,the byte-stream file.The input 
data stream is called as the standard input and the output stream is 
called as standard output. If you input the data, the data are converted 
into the data stream of continous set of bytes. This is called the 
standard input. Normally the standard input is connected to the key 
board. The standard output is also data stream of continous set of 
bytes.Normally the standard output is connected to the printer. You can 
redirect the standard input to the floppy disk etc. In a similar fashion 
standard output can also be redirected to a storing device such as 
CD, floppy. 



142 



You will be given examples on the above commands. Hereafter instead 
of giving the prompt as [ilamathi@localhost ilamathi] $, you will be 
given only the $ sign on command line. 

Suppose you want to see the contents of the file1 on the screen, you 
should give the command as explained in the following example, 

Suppose file1 contains the following text: 

It is a fun. 

You are encouraged to work with the Linux. 

$ cat file1 

The output is: 

It is a fun. 

You are encouraged to work with the Linux. 

Suppose you want to see the contents of the file1 on the screen page 
by page, you should give the command as. 

$ more file1 

The output is: 

It is a fun. 

You are encouraged to work with the Linux. 

From the above, you will not see any difference between cat and more 
commands. If the contents of the file1 exceeds one page, you can see 
the last page in cat, but you can see page-by-page in more 

You will be given more examples for cat, more, tee after learning about 
redirection and piping. 

In the absense of a proper rain-harvesting system, rain water collected 
on terraces of houses was usually let out on the streets. That is, the 
default connection of the terrace was the street. After the introduction 
of rainwater harvesting, people redirected the water collected, during 
the rain to the well or to the collection pits. Linux system can also redirect 
the output or the input to files other than screen or keyboard. (Linux 
considers the standard input, standard output, the screen and the 

143 



keyboard as files.) The redirection operator (>), "greater than" symbol 
achieves output redirection. The redirection operator (<), "less than" 
symbol achieves input redirection. The output redirection operator, 
redirects the contents of the left hand side file (that is the file name 
before the ">" symbol) to the file in the right hand side (that is the file 
name after the ">" symbol). 

$ cat file1 displays the contents of file1 on the screen. Suppose you 
want to send (redirect) this output to file2 you have to give the following 
command 
$catfile1 > file2. 

$ cat file2 command displays the contents of file2 which is nothing but 
a copy of file1 . The output of the above command goes to the standard 
output. Since there is no redirection the standard output is directed to 
the screen. But in the command $ cat file1 >file2, cat file1 sends the 
output to the standard output but the redirection operator (>) sends 
(redirects) output of the standard output to the file2. The redirection 
operator (>) prevents the output from going to the screen. If file2 does 
not exist, file2 will be created and the contents of file1 will be copied 
into file2. What will happen if the file already exists? The contents of 
file2 will be destroyed and the contents file1 will be copied. Actually 
there is something more than what the eyes meet. Even though cat 
file1 part appears before the > sign; only file2 part will be executed 
first. If file2 already exists it will be destroyed and then it will be 
constructed afresh. Then contents of the left hand side file namely file1 
is sent to the standard output. The output of the standard output is taken 
as the input for file2. In short the contents of the file1 is copied into the 
file2. From the discussion you can conclude that commands like the 
following, will not work. 

$catfile1 >file1 

When the above command is tried, since the file1 exists and the right 
hand side is executed first, file1 is destroyed. Then the left hand side 
is executed, now the file contains nothing. So, the command fails. 

You can set the noclobber feature to prevent overwriting an existing 
file by the redirection operation. In this usage, overwriting of the existing 

144 



file will fail. But even this can be circumvented. To overcome the difficulty 
of overwriting the existing file append (») operator is used. The append 
(») operator adds the contents of the file, appearing left side of "»" 
operator to the file appearing to the right side of the same operator, at 
the end of the existing material. For example the command $ cat file1 
» file2 appends the contents file1 to the contents of file2. 
The Standard Input 

Many Linux commands receive data from the Standard Input. The 
standard input is connected to either a device or to a file. By default the 
standard input is connected to the keyboard. The characters typed into 
the keyboard are taken to the standard input, which are then directed 
to the command. 

The cat command without any argument takes the input from the 
standard input. You have to enter the data for cat command through 
keyboard, which is taken to the command through the standard input. 
Example 
$cat 

This command expects data from the standard input (Input from the 

keyboard) 

This command expects data from the standard input (output) 

Now you have to enter the data from the keyboard (Input from the 

keyboard) 

Now you have to enter the data from the keyboard (output) 

Ctrl+D 

$ 

The lines in normal letters are entered from the keyboard. At the end of 
the first line, the entered message is taken to the standard input from 
the buffer, which is directed to the cat command. Since there is no 
redirection operator, cat displays the message on the screen. The 
second line is the message sent by the cat command to the screen 
through standard output. The third line is the line entered by the user 

145 



and the fourth line is the response of the system. When you have 
completed your work, you have to inform the computer that you have 
finished your work. This is achieved by giving the command Ctrl+D in 
a separate line. 

Note: Data can be compared to the water in a dam. Buffer is like a 
dam where water is collected before sending for irrigation (the standard 
output) when there is copious supply of water (data). It stores and sends 
water (data) in more orderly manner when there is a request for water 
or when the dam is full. Ctrl+D character is the end-of-file character 
for Linux file. 

You can combine the cat command with output redirection operator. 

Example: 

$ cat > files 

The typed in material will be redirected 

to the cat command through the std input (Input from the keyboard). 

and this message is sent to the file after ">" 

symbol. 

Ctrl+D 

$ cat files 

The typed In material will be redirected 

to the cat command through the std Input 

and this message Is sent to the file after ">" 

symbol. $ 

Input Redirection operator (<) 

The data is normally sent to the standard input through the keyboard. 

You can make the standard input to receive data from files also. This is 

made possible by the redirection input operator. In order to make the 

cat command to get data from the fileS (not from keyboard) you have 

to give the following command at the prompt. 

$cat < files 

The typed In material will be redirected 

146 



to the cat command through the std input 
and this message is sent to the file after ">" 
symbol. 

Since there is no > symbol the message is sent to the screen. 
The redirection operator sends the contents of fiieS into the standard 
input. Then the cat command reads the standard input and displays 
the contents of fileS on the screen. If the standard input is to be redirected 
to receive its data from fileS, and the standard output is to be redirected 
to place its data in file4, you have to give the following command. 
$cat < files >file4 

Pipes 

The redirection operator is completely helpless, if you want to send the 
output of one command to another command. Redirection operator 
works only on files. Pipe is handy in this situation. 

Here you should understand clearly, the difference between files and 
commands. Consider an example. Let there be a godown where you 
store wood. You employ a carpenter to make chairs out of the wood 
and a painter to paint the chairs. Now wood is converted into chairs 
and the chairs are sent by the conveyor belt to the painter's place. 
Here the chairs are taken from carpenter to painter. The conveyor belt 
in this instant is a pipe. That is the goods are sent through a pipe (the 
conveyor belt) from a worker (command) to another worker (command). 
This is a piping operation. 

After painting the chairs, they are sent back to the godown by a lorry. 
This time lorry is used to carry the chairs from a worker to the godown, 
to be stored there. This is redirection. File is like a strange warehouse 
with the related items when its contents are sent, it will not become 
empty, and it will get another copy. File is a storage medium (like 
warehouse in the above example) to store the data whereas command 
is a program (Just like a worker in the example) to execute a set of 
instructions. You can save data into or retrieve data from a file. A 

147 



command may read from or save into a file, but a command itself cannot 
store the data. Redirection simply places output in a file, but pipes 
send output to another command. Suppose you want to have the 
contents of file to be printed. The cat command gets contents of a file 
and sends it to the standard output. The output of cat is piped to Ipr ( 
line print ). The Ipr command takes the standard output as input and 
sends it to the printer. Here you have two commands. As you have 
seen, redirection operator will not serve the purpose; you have to seek 
the help of pipes. The pipe receives the data from the command, placed 
before the pipe and sends the data as input to the command placed 
after the pipe. The piping symbol is the vertical bar "|"- The above 
requirement can be met by the following command. 
$ cat files | Ipr 

The contents of fileS are sent to the line printer connected with the 
Linux system currently. 

You know already how to send the material through the keyboard to the 
screen. The cat command without any file name will do the work. What 
will you do to send the output to be printed on the line printer, instead of 
the screen? Ah ! You already know the answer! The combination of 
simple cat command and the Ipr command will solve your problem. 
Bear in mind that these two are commands, so you should combine 
them by | .Did you guess the answer? Yes, you are right. The answer is 

$cat I Ipr 

The printer should be made ready. 

Interesting things are going to be printed. 

Ctrl+D 

The above message (excluding Ctrl+D) will be printed. 

There arises another situation in which you are expected to print a file 

(say fileS) along with line number, on the printer. This can be solved by 

the following combination. 

$cat-n files | Ipr 

The cat command with the option -n sends the contents of the fileS to 

the standard output after numbering each line. The option -n in the 

148 



presence of cat command numbers the lines of the contents of fileS 
and forces the cat command to send the numbered contents to the 
default printer. Now you are going to meet your old friend more. Already 
you have been told, if the file is lengthy and if you use the cat command, 
you can see only the last page. To overcome this difficulty the command 
more is used as follows 

$ cat files | more 

Suppose you need to display the contents of the fileS along with the 

line number, the above command can be modified as follows. 

$ cat -n files | more . 

You can have more than one file in the above command as follows. 
$cat-n file1 file2 fileS | more. 

Note: Comma should not be used between file names; only blank space/ 
spaces should separate them. 

There is another useful command, known as sort command, which 
sorts each line of the given file alphabetically and sends the sorted 
version to the standard output. You can send the sorted output to more, 
cat -n, Ipr or to any of the suitable combinations of these. 

Examples 

$ sort files | more 

$ sort files | cat - | more 

$ sort files | cat -n | Ipr 

You have some acquaintance with the tee command. It plays dual role. 

The tee command copies the standard output to a file. It takes as its 
argument the name of the new file to which the standard output is copied. 
It seems when the standard output sees the tee command; it will split 
into two copies. Normally, one of them is redirected to the file 

appearing after the tee command and the other goes to the screen. 
The following example not only copies fileS to fileS but also displays 
the contents of fileS on the screen. 



149 



$ cat files | tee file6 

The sorted contents of the file can be copied into another file and also 
can be displayed on the screen. 

Example: 

$ sort files | tee sfileS 

Here sfileS gets the sorted version of the contents of fileS and sorted 
version is displayed on the screen. 

The contents of fileS are not at all affected by the sort command. Only 

a copy of the contents of fileS is sorted. Suppose fileS contains the 

following text. 

Chandran 

Ashok 

Malar 

You can combine sort, cat, tee and Ipr as follows: 

Example: 

$ sort files | tee sfileS | Ipr 

The output is : 

Ashok 

Chandran 

Malar 

The above message is shown in the screen and also copied into sfile. 

In addition to it, you can get a printed copy of the same. 

$ sort files | cat -n | tee sfileS | Ipr 
The output is : 

1 Ashok 

2 Chandran 

3 Malar 

1S0 



The above message is shown in the screen and also copied into sfile. 
In addition to it, you can get a printed copy of the same. 

You can interchange tee and cat -n commands. The result will change 
accordingly. 

Copying file 

While you deal with files, you will need frequently to copy the contents 

of one file into another. Even though you have been introduced to several 

sophisticated commands by means of which copying of files is made 

possible, you can do the same in a straightforward manner by the 

command cp (copy). 

Syntax 

$cp [options] <source file/s> <destination directory/file> 

The word/words appearing within brackets will be taken as optional. 

You can include or exclude word /words appearing in the bracket. Here 

you can either include "options" or exclude them. The word/words 

appearing within angle brackets ("< >") should be given compulsorily 

and actual names should be substituted while the actual command is 

issued. 

Now you want to copy the contents of the file1 into file6. The command 

is 

$cpfile1 file6 

The file1 is the source file (that is data emanate from file1 ) and file6 is 

the destination file (that is data go to file6). The above command will 

not affect the contents of the file1 . If file6 already exists its contents will 

be overwritten by the contents of file1 . The cp command copies the 

contents of source file after creating destination file. If the destination 

file already exists then the existing file is destroyed then a new file with 

same name is created. So, you should be vigilant about loosing 

contents of the destination file (if it exists already) in the copying 

process. You should add option -i in the above command for getting a 

warning from the system before overwriting, so you can stop the copying 

process. 



151 



Example: 

$ cp -i file1 file2 
overwrite file2 ? n $ 

If files are not in the current directory, then the full path should be given. 
If you want to establish a link between file1 and file2, you should replace 
-iby-l. 

You can also copy a directory recursively using cp command with the 
-r option. 

Example: 

$cp -r alpha alphal 

This command copies all the files and sub-directories of the alpha 
directory to the alphal directory recursively. Here you do not have the 
danger of loosing the already existing data. If directory alphal exists 
already, all the contents are put inside the directory. If alphal does not 
exist it will be created and all the files and the sub-directories are stored. 
This alphal is created under the current working directory. You need 
not be afraid of the term recursion. 

In Mathematics n! = n*(n-1)! and 0!=1 is given the definition forfactorial 

(n). Factorial (1)=1*factorial (0)=1 . Similarly factorial (2) =2*factorial 

(1 )=2. In order to find factorial (n), we have to find factorial (n-1 ) then it 

should be multiplied 

by n. This is an example for recursion. 

There are two more options -s and -v. The option -s creates a symbolic 

link and the option -v (stands for verbose) explains in detail, what is 

being done. 

Removing Files 

To delete files or directories the rm command is used. This is superior 
to rmdir. 

152 



Example: 

$ rm file1 file2 

Now file1 and file2 are removed from your current directory. If the file/s 
is /are not in the current directory then the complete path name has to 
be given. You have already seen the command rmdir, is not of any 
help if the directory is not empty. But rm can be employed in such 
conditions with the -r or -R (for recursion) option to remove the 
directory. 

Example: 
$rm -ralphal 

The above command removes alphal directory along with its sub- 
directories. You can use -i -v with the usual meanings. There is one 
more option -f , you will be in a better position if you do not make use 
of it. 

Wildcard entries and filename arguments 

If you have partial information about the names of files, the Linux 
provides special characters *,?,[] (comma is not included in the list) 
which will help you to find out the exact name(s). if you want to list out 
the files which start with ch or end with .c, the special character * will be 
helpful to you. 

Example 

$ls 

main.c fact.c swap.c char1 char2.ex doc1 doc2 

$lsch* 

char1 char2.ex 

$ls*.c 

main.c fact.c swap.c 



153 



The special character * stands for any number of characters 

$rm* 

This command is a very dangerous command, which will wipe out all 

the files. 

The question mark,?, matches only a single incomplete character in 

filenames. 

$ Is char? 
char1 

Note: the question mark, (?), fixes the number of characters. The name 
char? fixes the length as 5. While the first four characters are fixed, the 
last one may be any character including numbers. 
Note: char2.ex will not be displayed, since the length of char2.ex is 
greater than 5 characters. 

The bracket [ ] gives you a set of characters to search the file with 
them. Suppose you want list the files that start with doc and end with 
either 1 or 2, you should give the following command 
$lsdoc[12] 
doc1 doc2 

Here the characters are 1 and 2, it will not be treated as 1 2. You can 
also set a range. 

Example: doc[1 -5] doc[a-g] 

Here system may search for doc1 , doc2, doc3, doc4, doc5. 

Similarly system may search for doca, docb, docc, docd, doce, docf, 

docg. 

Edit Text and Commands. 

Before pressing the Enter key you can edit the command line with the 
help of left arrow (or Ctrl + B ) , right arrow ( or crti + F ). Back space 
(Ctrl + H ) and Delete key are used to erase the character as usual. 
Ctrl + U deletes the entire line. You can enter more than one command 
in the same line but you should separate them with a semicolon ( ; ). 

154 



You can also enter only one command in several lines by typing a 
backslash in each line. 

Moving and Renaming the Files. 

The mv (move) command is used for 

1 . to move a file or directory from one location to another. 

2. to change the name of a file or a directory. 

Note: Moving a file from one location to another is different from copying 
a file in that no file is created while moving a file. 
Syntax: mv [options] <source> <destination> 

Example: 

$ mv temp temporary 

Here the temp directory is renamed into a temporary directory. A file 
can be moved as shown below: 

Example: 

$ mv file1 /home/ilamathi/personal/file1 

You can use -i, -v and -f options along with this type of commands. 

Viewing the System Date and Time 

You can view the system date and time by giving the command date 
after $ prompt. 

Example: 

$date 

Wed July 07 11 :41 :12 EST 2004 

There are several options that can be used to format the date and time 
before displaying them. The options are specified within double-quotes, 
and within the quotes, they must begin with a +symbol. 

155 



The day, the month, the year, the date, the time in hours, in minutes and 
in seconds can be referred to, as shown below. 

Option Function 



'/od Day of the month(in digits) 

'/om Month of the year (in digits) 



o> 



'/oy Year(last two digits) 

'/o D Date as mm/dd/yy 



o> 



'/oH Hour(00to23) 

'/oM Minutes(OOto 59) 



%S Seconds(00 to 59) 

%T TimeasHH:MM:SS 

%a Abbreviated weekday(sun to sat) 

%h Abbreviated month (jan to dec) 

% r Time in the AM/PM notation 

Options of the date command 

Note: You should be very careful about %m and %M, the first one 
represents month of the year in number, the latter represents minutes 
in numbers. Similarly, you should be careful about %h and %H .The 
%h stands for abbreviated month but %H stands for hour You will see 
an example using date and %D when you see the grave accent. 

Example: 
$date "+%m" 
7 

$date "+%D" 
07/07/04 
$date "+%T" 
11:43:14 

156 



Note: With the help of the above options, the SA can change any part 
of the date command. 

3.8 File Systems: mount and umount 

All the files in your Linux system are connected into one overall directory 
tree; the files may reside on various storage devices such as hard disk 
drives, floppies and CD-ROMs. The Linux files on a particular storage 
device are organized Into a file system. Your Linux directory tree may 
include several file systems, each on different storage devices. The 
files themselves are organized into one perfect tree of directories 
beginning from the root. Although the root may be located in a file 
system on your hard drive partition, there will be a path name to files 
located on the file system for your CD-ROM and floppy. 

A floppy disk with Linux files will have its own tree of directories. This 
tree is a sub-tree, detached from the main tree. Your school is just like 
a sub-tree. In order to function smoothly, it should be attached with the 
Director of School Education. But, your school can take some action 
without consulting the Director of School Education, the floppy or even 
CD-ROM completely dependent upon the root directory. If you want to 
access the contents of the files, in the file system, you should start from 
the root directory. For that you have to connect the sub-tree to the main 
tree. Until it is attached, you will not be able to access the files on your 
floppy disk. This applies to all the storage mediums unless they are 
connected already. Even the file system on your hard disk partition has 
to be mounted with a mount command. But the system takes care of 
this activity. 

Establishing the connection between a file system on a storage device 
and your main directory tree is called mounting the device. This is done 
with the mount command. You can then change to that directory and 
access those files. The main drawback is that the root user can alone 
do the mounting operation. Even though this appears as a handicap, it 
protects the integrity of the system. You may observe that the command 
line prompt is changed into # from $. 

157 



Naturally the mount command should take two arguments. One of the 
arguments Is the storage device such as floppy disk, through which 
Linux accesses the file system. The other one Is the directory In the file 
structure to which 

the new file system Is attached. Suppose "destination" Is the directory 
on your main directory tree where you want the files on the storage 
device to be attached. The "device " Is a special device file that 
connects your system to the hardware device. The syntax for the mount 
command Is as follows: 

# mount device destination 

Device files are located In the /dev directories. They usually have 
abbreviated names, ending with the number of device. For example, 
fdO (the last character of fdO Is zero (not the letter o)) may reference 
the first floppy drive attached to your system. Similarly fd1 may reference 
the second floppy drive (If any) attached to your system. On Linux 
systems operating on PCs, the hard disk partitions have a prefix of hd 
followed by an alphabetic character that labels the hard drive and then 
a number for the partition. For example, hda2 references the second 
partition on the first hard drive. The letter a stands for the first hard 
drive, the number 2 refers the second partition. 

For a file system to be accessible. It must be mounted. Floppy disks 
and CD-ROIVIs, however, have to be explicitly mounted. The 

following example mounts a floppy disk in the first floppy drive device 
(fdO) to the /destination directory. 

# mount /dev/fdO /destination 

The mounted file systems should be unmounted either before you shut 
down your system or before you want to replace a mounted file system 
with another. Your main file system Is automatically unmounted for you, 
as already stated. Assume you have mounted a floppy disk and now 
you want to take it out and put in a new one. First, you must unmount 
that floppy disk. Next you remove the floppy and you can put in and 
mount the new one. You unmount a file system with the umount 
command (Note the spelling there is no n between u and m). The 

158 



command umount can take as its argument either a device name or 
the directory where it was mounted. Here is the syntax: 

# umount device (or destination ) 

The following examples unmount the floppy disk mounted to the / 
destination directory: 

# umount /dev/fdO 

# umount /destination 

There is one important constraint on the unmount command. You can 
never unmount a file system that you are currently working in. You will 
never cut the bottom of the branch of a tree while sitting on the same 
branch. 

Mounting and Formatting Floppy Disks 

If you want to read a book you should first havethe book. In a similar 
manner if you want to access the contents of a file on a floppy disk, first 
of all you should mount it. As already stated /dev/fdO references your 
floppy drive. You can mount any directory of your choice. However, 
your OpenLinux installation already created a convenient directory, to 
use your floppy disks which is /mnt/floppy directory. The following 
command mounts the floppy in the system. 

Note : mnt stands for mount. 

# mount /dev/fdO /mnt/floppy 

The system tries to read the files in your floppy disk. If you change a 
floppy by another one without unmounting the first floppy you will get an 
error message. If you want to replace a floppy disk by another one, you 
have to unmount the floppy in /dev/fdO and then explicitly mount the 
new floppy as follows: 

# umount /dev/fdO 

or 

# umount /mnt/floppy 

159 



and 

# mount /mnt/floppy 

Note: The mkfs (make formattings) command formats a floppy. 

Mounting CD-ROMs 

If you want to mount a CD-ROM disk, you are not expected to specify 
the device name. The OpenLinux system has the directory /mnt/cdrom 
for CD-ROM file systems. The following command mounts a CD-ROM. 

# mount /mnt/cdrom 

If you want to change a CD-ROM disk by another one, first you have to 
unmount the existing CD-ROM disk and then mount the new CD-ROM 
as follows: 

#umount /mnt/cdrom # You can interchange the CD-ROM. 

# mount /mnt/cdrom 

If you want to mount a CD-ROM to another directory, you have to include 
the device name in the mount command. The following example mounts 
the disc in your CD-ROM drive to the /destination directory. The 
particular device name for the CD-ROM in this example is /dev/hdc. 

# mount /dev/hdc /destination. 

Summary 

Some common file-handling commands are: 
. cat -Displays the contents of files 

more -Displays the contents of specified file page by page 

and you can move forward or backward by using f and 

b respectively. 
. tee -Displays the contents of the file on the screen and copies 

into the specified file 
. pipe. -Takes data from one command to another command. 

. > operator -Takes data to the file. 

160 



< operator -Takes data from the file to the command. 

cp - Makes copies of files 

rm - Removes a file or directory. 

mv - Moves or renames files and directories. 

mount - Establishes the connection between a file system on a 

storage device and your main directory tree. 
mount -Command should take two arguments. 
umount -Unmounts a file system. 
fdO -References the first floppy drive attached to your 

system. 

Some other commonly used commands are: 

. date - Used to view and change the current system date and 

time 
tput clear- Clears the contents of the screen 
tput cup - Used to position the cursor on a specified row and 

column 
man - Displays help on any Linux command 

Fill in the blanks 

1 . Files can be copied directly by command. 

2. If you want to get help for a particular command, the 
command will provide you help. 

3. The command shows the contents of a big file page 

by page. 

4. The option in cp command warns you from overwriting 

the destination file. 

5. $catfile1 file2 appends the contents file1 intofile2. 

6. feature can be set to prevent overwriting an existing 

file by the redirection operation. 

7. End of file Is given by . 

8. Mounting a device means the connection 

between a file system on a storage device and your main 
directory tree. 

161 



Although the root may be located in a file system on your 
hard drive partition, there will be a 



to the files located on the file system for your CD-ROM. 

10. The/a can only do the mounting operation. 

11. All the files in your Linux system are connected into one overall 
tree. 

1 2. A floppy disk with Linux files will have its own of 

directories 

State whether the following are True or False 

1 . The Is command displays the contents of the files. 

2. The mv command moves a file into another location. 

3. tput cup 20 20 is equivalent to gotoxy ( 20,20 ) of C 
programming. 

4. echo - n " This is nice ", command will print. This is nice and 
Othe cursor is taken to the next line. 

5. gets ( myname ) of C programming is equivalent to read 
myname of 

shell script. 

6. The cat command displays the contents of a file page by page. 

7. The$catfile1 >file1 overwrites itself. 

8. The $ cat filel > file2 works only when both filel and file2 exist. 

9. The Ipr command takes the standard output as input and sends 
it to the screen. 

1 0. The mount command should take two arguments. 

1 1 . The command umount can take as its argument either a 
device name or the directory where it was mounted. 



Answer the following 

1 . What is the difference between the commands rm-r and rmdir? 

2. How will you display your name like My name is x ? 

3. How will you delete a directory along with its sub directories? 

162 



4. What does cat command do? Write and discuss all the variations 
ofcat command. 

5. Distinguish between pipes and redirection. 

6. Distinguish between mv and cp commands. 

7. How will you copy contents file1 into file2 in different ways? 

8. How can you copy a directory along with all files in the directory? 

3.9 VI EDITOR 

Editors are mainly used for creating, deleting, and editing the files. 
There are several editors in Linux and some of them are highly 
sophisticated but all systems have two standard editors, they are Ed 
and Vi editors. Ed allows the user for one line editing only, so it is not of 
much use. Vi editor allows the user to edit text of one screen at a time. 
So, Vi editor is still widely used. When Vi editor was introduced in 
Unix, it provided lot of facilities, which the other editors could not even 
dreamt of, at that time. 

Editors use the keyboard for two entirely different purposes. They are 

(1 ) to specify editing commands and 

(2) to receive character input. 

Common PC editors divide the two functions among the keys of 
keyboard; alphabetic character keys are used to input whereas the 
functional keys and control keys are used to edit commands. Such PC 
editors can rely on the extended keyboards and the number of keys is 
ever increasing. 

But Unix and hence Linux are frugal in many respects. Any keyboard 
can be used in the Linux system. Editors in Linux were designed to 
assume a minimum number of keys with alphabetic characters; some 
control characters as well as ESC and ENTER keys. How can Vi Editor 
manage its affair with minimum number of keys? 



163 



You behave as a student in your school but you also behave as a son/ 
daughter at home. You act in a formal way when you are at school but 
you act in an informal way when you are at home. The same person 
plays a dual role (actually more number of roles). In a similar manner 
Vi editor makes the keyboard to play a dual role. Vi editor has got two 
modes. They are 

(1) the command mode and 

(2) the input mode. 

In command mode all the keys on the keyboard become editing 
commands. In the input mode, the keyboard behaves as a normal 
typewriter with the exception 

When you change the mode, the functionality of the keyboard also 
changes. For example when in the command mode, the key x, just like 
the delete key of your ordinary keyboard, erases the character where 
the cursor is on. In the input mode the same key x simply adds x to the 
file. The ESC key is the only exception. While you are in the input mode, 
if you press ESC key, you will be taken to the command mode but if 
you are in the command mode itself, there is a beep sound. This activity 
can be of much help to a novice user of the Vi editor. If you have doubt 
about the mode in which you are working, press ESC key. If you hear a 
beep sound, you can conclude that you are in the command mode and 
if you do not hear the beep sound, you can presume that you are in the 
command mode at present, but previously ( before presing ESC key ) 
you were in the input mode. So ESC key eliminates lot of confusions. 

Even though Vi command mode handles many editing operations 
effectively, it cannot perform actions such as file saving. The line editing 
commands handle these actions. When you are in the command mode 
(the colon) : takes you to the line-editing mode. After completing the 
necessary actions if you press ENTER key that will take you again to 
the command mode. In addition to the modes that you already know, 
you have been introduced to the line mode also. 

164 



Creating, Saving, Editing And Quitting a File in Vi 

If you want to edit an existing file or to create a new file with name 
student, you have to give the following command. 
$ vi student 

If the file already exists, you will be shown the contents of the file page 
by page on the screen. If the file does not exist then you will see an 
empty screen and a column of tildes at the left hand side. Whether the 
file exists or not, you will be in the command mode only. Tildes inform 
that part of the screen is not in the file. If you want to input data, you 
should change to the input mode. By pressing a, i or o you will be 
taken to the input mode, after entering the data, pressing the ESC key 
will take you to the command mode. Then you press upper case ZZ 
(without space) (You hold down the SHIFT key and press Z twice when 
caps lock is not in effect). This action saves your file and then control 
exits the Vi editor, to return to the Linux shell. When you are in the 
command mode, you should save and exit from the file. But, while you 
input the file, you have to save it frequently. You have to press ESC to 
change to the command mode and then you have to press : (colon) to 
go to the line editing mode. Then press w. This sequence of actions 
will save the file, and you will return to the command mode. The 
command :w with a file name saves the file with the given name. It 
works as a "save as" command in the other word processors. 

You can create unnamed file as follows 
$ vi (Creates a file without a file name.) 

When you create a file without a file name, there is no actual file. The 
entered data enters the buffers but you can input, edit on the matter 
that you have created on the buffer. Now you cannot save the file with 
ZZ command. The ZZ command saves the file when the file actually 
exists. ZZ will not save the file but :w some-name will save the file. In 
this case the contents of the buffer are copied into some-name file. 
Clash of file names will not be tolerated. If you give a file name, which 
already exists, the name that you give will be rejected. You have to 
retry with another name. If you want to quit Vi editor, if you give :q 
command it will take you to the shell but if you have made one or more 

165 



changes then this command will not work. In this case :q! will take you 
out of Vi editor without saving the changes. 
Cursor movement 

You can use the arrow keys for moving into the text but if you want to 
strictly follow the character keys alone h, j, k, I will solve your problem 

h = left arrow 

I = right arrow 

j = down arrow 

k = up arrow 

The keys h, j, k, I lie in the middle row of the keyboard and they 
are closer to your right hand. Among these four keys h is the left most 
key and I is the right most key, that is why, h is used as substitute for B 
(left arrow) I is used as substitute for a (right arrow). 
You can also use Enter for h and spacebar for I. 

Each text line begins at the left most column of the screen and 
ends where you press the Enter key. The space between the end of 
the line and the end of the screen is called the dead space and will not 
be stored in the file. You can move with h and I keys within the line. If 
the cursor is at the end of the line and if you want to move to the end of 
next line, use j key and if you want to move to the end of the previous 
line press k. You can move through the text, a whole screen at a time, 
using ctrl+F and ctrl+B key combinations. ctrl+F moves one screen 
(F) forward and ctrl+B moves one screen (B) backward at a time. 
Line number G 

Vi sequentially numbers each line of text using that line number; you 
can go to any line by entering the line number followed by (upper case) 
G If you want to move to the end of a file, you enter G without giving line 
number. 

166 



If you want to set the word wrap margin you can do so by 
:set wm=col (col should be replaced by a suitable number) 

When you press the a key, Vi editor places you into the input mode, 
after the character where the cursor is currently on. The i key places 
you into the input mode before the character where the cursor is on. 
The (lower case) o key opens a new line below where the cursor is on 
and places you into the input mode at the beginning of that new line. 

Deletion 

X key, in the command mode deletes a single character. As already 
stated, it acts as the delete key of your ordinary keyboard. Repeated 
use of X will delete the desired number of characters. 

The dd command removes the entire line that the cursor is presently 
on. A number immediately followed by x or dd removes that much 
number of characters or lines from the file. 

Suppose you want to delete 5 characters from the position of the cursor, 
you have to give the command as 5x when you are in the command 
mode. Suppose you want to delete the line where the cursor is on, 
simply give the command dd in the command mode. The line is erased. 
If you give 5dd, 5 lines starting from the line where the cursor is on, are 
erased. 

Undo 

The u command will undo the last modification. 
Break a line 

To break a line, you have to enter into the input mode and press the 
Enter key. To join two lines press (upper case) J key. 



167 



Moving 

Suppose you want to move a certain part of the text, you have to delete 
those lines by using ndd (Where n is the number of lines to be moved). 
This statement is somewhat equivalent to cut facility of WINDOWS 
XP PROFESSIONAL.The deleted lines will be placed in the buffer. 
Here buffer is used as clipboard of WINDOWS XP PROFESSIONAL 
Next you move the cursor where you want to move the text, press p, 
then the editor inserts the deleted lines after the line, on which the cursor 
is on. This is equivalent to the paste facility of WINDOWS XP 
PROFESSIONAL. 

Copying 

You can copy a line by yy command. If you want to copy n lines then 
nyy copies n lines starting from the where the cursor is on into the 
buffer. Then you have to paste the text in the buffer to the desired 
detination. Move the cursor till the desired detination and press p key. 
Copying is succesfully done. You already know the difference between 
moving and copying from Windows XP. As you did for moving, you 
can copy with nyy. But here the text is not deleted. 

Searching 

You can search any pattern within the text. Suppose you want to find 
out the occurrence of a particular word or any pattern, you have to use 
either / or ?.. The (/) allows you to search the pattern, forward in the 
text. The ? allows you to search the pattern backward in the text. When 
you press / key a line opens at the bottom, the character / appears in 
the first column. The cursor is immediately placed after it, you should 
key in the pattern and press the ENTER key. The search will start 
functioning from the position of the cursor, where the cursor had been 
before the / key was pressed and the search continues upto the end of 
file. The search goes on in the forward direction. 
The ? mark does the same thing as that of /, but in a reverse direction. 
The search does its function from the position of the cursor, where the 

168 



cursor had been before the ? key was pressed and the search continues 
upto the beginning of the file. The search goes on in the bacl^ward 
direction. 
Changing 

The cc command allows you to change the entire contents of a 
line. First it erases the line and changes to the input mode. So, you can 
enter the fresh line and then press ESC key. It is the combination of dd 
and o. The r (replacement) command allows you to change a single 
character where the cursor is currently on. Unlike the other commands 
it will not take you to the input mode. After typing in the replacement 
character, you remain in the command mode only. The R 
(Replacement) command allows you to overwrite text. It is similar to 
the overwrite command of the other text editors but it allows you to 
change the text because you are in the input mode and you have to 
change that mode by entering ESC key. It differs from the other text 
editors in this aspect. 

What you do to a line with a cc command, you can do to a word 
by simply replacing the last character namely c by w. That is, the 
command cw allows you to change a word. The command dw deletes 
a word. 

Now let us apply this newly acquired knowledge to the following 
text. 

Having computer knowledge is an invaluable asset, it will do a 
world of good to young people seeking jobs. 

1 Reliability: Linux is a highly reliable system. Linux servers are not 
shut down for years together. Normally operating failures are 
unknown to Linux systems. It does not mean that you need not be 
vigilant. Do not forget the computer adage. If something can go 
wrong, it will. 

2 Backward Compatibility: Linux has excellent support for older 

169 



hardware. It can run on different types of processors including the 
older ones. It can run the commands of its ealier version 
successfully. 

3. Simple Upgrade and Installation: The installation procedure of 
most Linux versions is menu driven and easy. 

4. Suitable to any machine: Suitable Linux version can run on any 
machine available now. This allows low investment for the hardware. 
The users, who have low configuration machines, prefer to use Linux 
OS compared to other OSs that require higher configurations. 

You should make the third point as the first point. Bring the cursor to the 
beginning of the number 3. If you are not in command mode, press 
ESC key. Now issue the command 2dd. These two lines are deleted 
from the screen and stored into the buffer. Now go to the second line. 
For going to the second line you should issue the command 2G. Now 
press (lower case)p. You want that point 3 to appear in a seperate 
line. Press (lower case) a key to change into input mode. Then press 
ENTER key. Point 3 appears in the third line and then press ESC key 
to return back to the command mode. But you have to alter the point 
numbers. Place the cursor under number 3 and press (lower case) r 
key. The number 3 is deleted, but the cursor waits for the replacement. 
Enter the number 1 . You will not be taken into the input mode. Again 
bring the cursor to the number 1 and change it into 2. Similarely change 
the number 2 into 3. Now you want to enter the incomplete statment "I 
want to stress the point that " at the end of the text. Press G key, you will 
come to the end of text and again press o key. In the ensuing blank line, 
enter "I want to stress the point that " (without the "). Go to the beginning. 
Issue the command 2yy. Now those two lines are copied into the buffer. 
Again issue command G that will place the cursor after the space after 
the letter t then press p key. Then those two lines are copied after the 
word "that", now you have to change H of having into h. Place the cursor 
under P then press r key. The H is deleted and the cursor is waiting for 
your command. Enter the h. 



170 



Having computer knowledge is an invaluable asset it will do a world of 
good to young people seeking jobs. 

1 Simple Upgrade and Installation : The installation procedure 
of most Linux versions is menu driven and easy. 

2 Reliability: Linux is a highly reliable system. Linux servers are 
not shut down for years together. Normally operating failures are 
unknown to Linux systems. It does not mean that you need not be vigilant. 
Do not forget the computer adage. If something can go wrong, it will. 

3 Backward Compatibility: Linux has excellent support for older 
hardware. It can run on different types of processors including the older 
ones. It can run the commands of its ealier version successfully. 

4 Suitable to any machine: Suitable Linux version can run on 
any machine available now. This allows low investment for the hardware. 
The users, who have low configuration machines, prefer to use Linux 

05 compared to other OSs that require higher configurations. 

3.10 Shell Script 

A shell script is a text file that contains Linux commands. You can create 
a file by using any of the standard editors such as Vi editor (which you 
are going to study at the end of the chapter). Suppose you want to 
repeatedly execute a set of Linux commands, in the same order then 
you will seek the help of shell script. Entering the commands in the 
command line sequentially is not only a frustrating job, but also an 
exacting one. Either you may commit mistakes in spelling or you may 
change the order of the commands. In either case, you will run into 
difficulties. A shell script is handy in these circumstances because you 
have to enter the command only once. Shell scripts allow input/output 
operations and manipulation of variables. 



171 



Executing a Shell Script 

When you Logon to the Linux system, you get a copy of the shell to 
work with. This shell is known as the Login shell. Your default shell is 
BASH shell. The BASH shell has the capabilities of the programming 
languages. You can create complex shell programs with its capabilities. 
A shell program combines Linux commands to solve the given 
problems. The Linux shell provides many of the tools found in C 
language. You can create variables and assign them values. You can 
also create variables in a script file, which can be assigned values 
interactively by the users. By giving sh command in the command 
prompt, a new shell is created. This new shell is known as the sub-shell 
or the child shell of the current shell, which can be used to execute a 
shell script. The shell script is passed to the child shell for execution. 
This arrangement makes the Login shell impervious to the whims and 
fancies of the user. If any undesirable event happens, only the child 
shell is affected and that may be deleted immediately without causing 
any damage to the Login shell. 

You should create the shell script carefully. When you create a file, you 
will have the read and write privileges but you will not be granted 
execute permission automatically. Even with these limited capabilities 
you can run the shell program with either of the following commands in 
the command prompt. 
$ sh file_name 
$ . file_name 

If you want to run a shell script directly at the $ prompt, you can change 
the File Access Permission (FAP) of the specified shell script by 
granting the execute permission. This can be achieved by chmod 
command. Suppose you want to run the edufile directly from the $ prompt 
the following commands should be given. 
$ chmod u+x edufile 
$ edufile 

+x command in tandem with chmod gives the execute permission 
to any user. The u+x command gives the owner of the file the execute 

172 



permission. When you execute the above shell script, the current shell 
creates a new shell and executes the script in the newly created shell. 



3.11 Variables 

Variables are placeholders to store values. All Linux variables are 
treated as character strings. This may seem that you cannot do any 
mathematical operations with those variables. However, this limitation 
can be overcome by expr and let commands. 

Creating Variables 

As already stated, the BASH shell is your default shell; you have to do 
your work in BASH shell only, unless you desire to change to some 
other shell. The variable created within a shell is called a shell variable. 
Variables can be created as and when the user wants to create them 
by simple assignment of values. A variable can be created without a 
value being assigned to it by leaving the right-hand side including the 
assignment operator. 

The variable name in shell script may consist of alphabetic characters, 

the underscore and a number. 

It can not include the exclamation mark (!), the ampersand (&) or the 

blank space. 

The number should not be the first character. 

It should not be of unreasonable length. 

Command names should not be used as variable names. 

Valid script variable names: file1 , bookshell, book_shell, a+b, rs-paise 

Invalid script variable names: a + b, a+ b, alb, ab&, a=b. 

The syntax for creating a variable is given below: 

<variable_name>=<value> 

Note: When declaring a variable, there must be no space on either 

side of the assignment operator (=). It is like the assignment statement 

of C programming. If you leave blank space before and after the "=" 

173 



operator it is like "==" (equality) operator of C programming. 

If the value being assigned contains any delimiters (such as embedded 
spaces), then it should be enclosed within either single or double quotes. 
From the above statement it may seem that single quote and double 
quotes can be used interchangeably. But, there is a subtle difference, 
which you will see later. 

Example: 

name= "Ezhil kumaran" 

You can also write the above command as 

Name='Ezhil Kumaran' 

If the value does not have spaces, the quotes are optional. 
Example: 

name=llamathi 

name='llamathi' 

name= "llamathi" 

All the above are equivalent. 

Consider the following assignment 
number=12 

In the above assignment, the variable number, though in the form of the 
number, it is not a numeric value. It is a character string. Therefore, the 
variable number contains the character '1 ' and '2' not the number 1 2 = 
1100 in binary form. So, you cannot do fundamental operations of 
algebra, that is, you cannot add, subtract, multiply or divide. 

Referencing Variables 

The $ symbol is used to refer the contents of a variable. The $ sign 
extracts the contents of the variable following it. Consider the example 

174 



var1 =${var2}. The variables var1 and var2 refer to the memory locations. 

${var2} command extracts the value found In that location. The copy 

of the obtained value from that location is stored in var1 . The braces 

are optional. But, if you want to concatenate the contents of one 

variable with another value, the braces are essential. For example 

the variable father contains the value John and if you want to add son 

to John and store the result in son1 variable, you should give the 

following command 

$son1=${father}son 

then the contents son1 will be Johnson. 

What will happen if you omit the braces? The result is obvious. Without 

braces the command will be 

$son1=$fatherson 

The first $ is the prompt and the second $ is the reference operator. 

Since there is no blank space in between father and son, fatherson will 
be taken as a variable, and if such variable does not exist, you will get 
one type of error. Unfortunately if that variable exits then that value will 
be assigned without any warning .The result is an unpleasant surprise 
(If you leave a blank space in between father and son the variable will 
be rejected). 

Reading a Value into a Variable 

If you want to get the name from the user, you should enter 

"please enter name " 

Then you should make arrangements to store the entered name into 

the memory. 

The above can be written in Linux as follows. 

echo " Please enter your name" 

read name 

The echo command simply prints the string on the screen. This serves 
as a prompt for the user. The read command, on execution, waits for 
the user to enter a value for the variable. When the user presses the 

175 



<Enter> key, after entering the value, the remaining part of the shell 

script, if any, is executed. 

The response of the user is caught into the variable name (called) 

name. The read command can be used at the shell prompt, but is 

usually used in shell scripts. 

Note: As already stated, the double quotes ("") improve the readability. 

3.12 Expressions 

The expr and let Commands 

For any individual, a day hardly ends up without doing any arithmetic 
calculation. Can you imagine a world without arithmetical calculations? 
The answer is an emphatic "no". Most shells do not support numeric 
variables. All variables are treated as character strings. However, to 
program in the shell, it is imperative that you will be able to 
mathematically manipulate variables. This is possible by the use of the 
expr and let commands. The expr command is used to evaluate 
arithmetic expressions. The output of this command is sent to the 
standard output (screen). 

Example: 

$expr 21 + 51 

will display 72 on the screen. Note that there must be a space on either 

side of the operator (+). Variables can be used in the expr command 

such as 

$ num1=7 

$ num2=3 

$ expr $num1 + $num2 

Since output is sent to the screen, the value 10 is displayed on the 

screen. Remember $ when it is not used as the user prompt, is used 

to refer the value of the variable. 

Therefore $num1 is replaced by character T and $num2 is replaced 
by character '3'. The command expr then converts these characters 
into numbers and the addition is done afterwards. 

176 



The expr command supports +, -, *, and /. But you should be careful 

when using the * operator. Since * is used for wildcard character, it 

should be distinguished for multiplication operation. If you write \*, then 

this will be treated as multiplicative operator. 

$ expr 1 / 2 and will display and not 0.5. Please note the blank 

space before and after the / sign. What will happen if you give the 

following command? 

$ expr 0.5 / 2 

What you get is an error message. Since the decimal point will be 

treated as dot, 0.5 will not even be treated as a number. 

The command let lets you do arithmetic calculation and compare two 

values. The syntax for let is 

$ let <value1 ><operator><value2> 

Here the operator stands for either the arithmetic or the relational 
operator. The command let is an improvement over expr. The command 
let evaluates any variable and converts its value into an arithmetic 
variable. This capability is utilized in shell script to manage control 
structures. While expr needs blank space/spaces before and after 
the operator, the command let demands no blank space/spaces either 
before or after the operator. If you want to leave blank space/spaces 
then you can do so by enclosing the entire expression within quotes. If 
you do not assign the result of an operation of the let command, the 
result is displayed on the screen. 

Example: 

$ let pr=5*10 

echo "The product is $pr" 

The product is 50 

Note: The operator * (multiplication) should not be entered as \*. 
Note : Unlike expr , let should have variable name in the left hand side 
of assignment operator. 



177 



If you want to leave blank space/spaces before and after the operator, 

you should enclose the entire operation within quotes. 

Example: 

$ let "pr = 5*10" 

echo "The product is $pr" 

The product is 50 

Suppose you assign, the result of an operation to a variable, the result 

will not be displayed on the screen, whereas the result is assigned to 

the variable. If you want to see the result on the screen you should use 

the echo command. 

Example: 

$ let " sum = 2 + 4 " 
$ echo "The sum is $sum" 
The sum is 6 

The following assignments are also possible in script programming 
by using the let command as follows. 

let a=0 

let a=a+1 

Note: Alas, let also fails with decimal numbers such as 2.3, 0.5 etc.. 

You were told that there is subtle difference between single quotes and 

double quotes. You will now see that difference. The variable name 

contains llamathi. Suppose you give the following commands 

echo "The given name is $name" 
echo The given name is $name' 

what you see on the screen are 

The given name is llamathi 

The given name is $name 

Double quotes actually references the variable. $name is replaced by 

its contents namely by llamathi. But single quote, simply reproduces 

whatever is found within it. That is, $name is reproduced as such. 

178 



3.13 Command Substitution 

Suppose you want to access the current date of the system within a 
message, $date will not be of any help (reference can extract values 
only from variables not from commands). If you want to extract data 
from a command you should place the command within backward 
quotes (or grave accent). In this condition, you should place date 
command within single backward quotes (or grave accent). The grave 
accent key is found normally ahead of the number 1 (or "!"). The 
backward quote is found under ~ (tilde) sign. If you want to display 
today's date, you should give the following statement. 

Example: 

echo "Today's date is ^date +%D^ " 

When message displayed 'date +%D' is replaced by system date. 

You better note that there is a blank space in between date and + sign. 

Otherwise the above command will not work. (The +%d symbol extracts 

the date part alone in the format mm/dd/yy). That is, the shell first replaces 

the enclosed command of the output, and then executes the entire 

command. Command substitution can also be used to store the output 

of a command in a variable. 

Example : 

cfiles=Ms*.c I wc-r 
The variable, cfiles, will now contain a count of the number of files in the 
current directory whose names end with .c. 

The output of expr, as stated earlier, goes to the standard output. If you 
require this output to be stored in a variable instead, you can use 
command substitution. For example: 
$ varl=5 

$ varl='expr $varl + 20' 
would assign 25 to var1 . 



179 



The command "expr" is in single backward quotes. The shell first 
replaces the enclosed command of the output, and then executes the 
rest. 

You can make use of commands such as if, for, while available in 
other higher level languages in Advance Shell Script. 

3.14 Features of Linux 

Reliability: Linux is a highly reliable system. Linux servers are not shut 
down for years together. Normally operating failures are unknown to 
Linux systems. It does not mean that you need not be vigilant. Do not 
forget the computer adage. If something can go wrong, it will. 

Backward Compatibility: Linux has excellent support for older 
hardware. It can run on different types of processors including the older 
ones. It can run the commands of its ealier version successfully. 

Simple Upgrade and Installation: The installation procedure of most 
Linux versions is menu driven and easy. 

Suitable to any machine: Suitable Linux version can run on any 
machine available now. This allows low investment for the hardware. 
The users, who have low configuration machines, prefer to use Linux 
OS compared to other OSs that require higher configurations. 

GUI Interface: The graphical interface for Linux is the KDE, GNOME. 
It is divided Into two sub systems consisting of a server and a client. 
The KDE, GNOME provides nearly all the comforts of the Windows 98 
system. 

180 



Multiple Distributors: There are multiple distributors for Linux. Each 
one provides one's own added facilities. This results in the buyers 
market. Some distributors of Linux are Red Hat, Caldera, Mandrake, 
Debian, and Slackware. 

No Virus Attack: Virus is the most dreaded word in the Computer 
industry. Virus actually decelerated the spread of the internet. Linux is 
said to be free of any virus attack. It is rumoured only now that a kind of 
virus attacks Linux system also. 

Security Features: Internet mischief mongers play havoc on other 
people's work. Linux provides excellent security features. This is the 
reason why many Internet Service Providers (ISPs) switch over to Linux 
systems. 

Can Support a High User Load: Linux can support a large number 
of users working simultaneously. 

Development Libraries: Linux offers an excellent platform for many 
development languages like C++ and Perl. 

Summary 

♦ (nyyornY) p Commands to copy n lines. 

♦ Shell scripts can be created in Linux using any text editor 

♦ The expr command is used to evaluate arithmetic expressions. 



181 



♦ The let command is superior to expr command. 

♦ The Vi editor can be invoked by the vi command 

♦ The Vi editor works In two modes, the input mode and the 

♦ command mode. The <ESC> key is used to determine in which 
mode the user is currently in. 

♦ In addition to the above modes, you have been introduced to 
the line mode also. 

♦ Command substitution is used to have more than one command 
execute as a single command 

Fill in the blanks 

1. $ vi filename. The file is saved by entering two uppercase 



2. :w means and the file. 

3. When you press ESC, if you hear a beep sound, you are in 
mode. 

4. The command ndd and moves a specified text to the 

desired destination. 

5. The command does arithmetical calculations more 

efficiently. 



182 



CHAPTER 4 

PROBLEM SOLVING TECHNIQUES AND C PROGRAMMING 
4.1. Problem Solving Techniques 

The computing we do is independent of the computer language 
we use. It does not depend on the computer also. The choice of the 
computer and the language mostly depend on their suitability for the 
given situation. While developing a program, we think only in the natural 
languages like Tamil and English. Only at the last moment the design 
is converted into a program in a high level language. 

In the computer languages every statement must be written 
precisely, including commas and semicolons. One has to be very 
careful while writing these lines. In the natural languages the sentences 
may be long. Sometimes they may be vague. All the natural languages 
have this property. So, to understand things clearly without any 
ambiguity, we write it in an intermediary language. This will be easy to 
write and understand, and also without any ambiguity. These 
intermediate languages are in between the natural languages and the 
computer languages. We shall study two such intermediate languages, 
namely, the flow chart and the pseudo code, which are widely used. 

First let us consider the flow chart. Since the flows of 
computational paths are depicted as a picture, it is called a flow chart. 
Let us start with an example. Suppose we have to find the sum and 
also the maximum of two numbers. To achieve this, first the two numbers 
have to be received and kept in two places, under two names. Then 
the sum of them is to be found and printed. Then depending on which 
one is bigger, a number is to be printed. The flow chart for this is given 
in flow chart 4.1 . In the flow chart, each shape has a particular meaning. 
They are given in flow chart 4.2. 

183 




Flow Chart 4.1 



Start, End 



Calculations 



Direction of control flow 



Input, Output 




Decision 

O 

Connector 



Flow chart 4.2 



184 



In the flow chart mentioned above, there is a special meaning in 
writing C = A + B. Though we use the familiar equal to sign, it is not 
used in the sense as in an equation. This statement means — Add the 
current values available for the names A and B, which are on the RHS, 
and put the sum as the new value of the name C, which is in the LHS. 
For example, under this explanation, A = A + 1 is a valid statement. 
The value of A is taken, incremented by one and the new value is stored 
as A. That is, the value of A gets incremented by 1 . Note that we can 
write A = A + B, but not A + B = A. On the LHS there must be only a 
name of a place for storing. 

We can write all the computations we can do with the computers 
as flow charts. If the problem is small, the flow chart is also small. What 
about big problems? Real life problems are always very big. Only the 
class room problems are small, as they are meant to teach some 
particular concepts within limited time. For big problems, the flow chart 
will also be big. But our paper sizes are limited. We may need many 
pages for one flow chart. But how to go from one page to another? 
This is solved by using small circles, called connectors. In this circle, 
we put some symbol. All connectors having the same symbol represent 
the same point, wherever they are, whether they are in the same page 
or on different pages. Flow chart 4.3 gives an example. 




O 




O 




Flow Chart 4.3 

185 



The advantages of the flow charts are: 



They are precise. They represent our thoughts exactly. 
It is easy to understand small flow charts. 



The disadvantage is that real life flow charts can occupy many 
pages, and hence very difficult to understand. So no one uses flow 
charts in such situations. 

Consider the small flow charts given for the following problems. 
See whether they will solve the problems. Do not memorize them. Try 
to understand them. Note how much we have to think before writing a 
program. 

Flow chart 4.4 estimates the volume of a box using its length, 
breadth and height. 



Start 



I 



Read length, breadth and 
height 



i 



Volume - length * breadth * height 



I 



Print volume 



T 



End 



Flow Chart 4.4 

186 



Flow chart 4.5 reads a number between and 3 and writes it in words. 




Flow chart 4.5 

187 



Flow chart 4.6 finds the minimum of 3 given numbers. 




Flow chart 4.6 



188 



Flow chart 4.7 provides a method to solve the quadratic equation 

ax^ + bx + c = . 



Print 'not a 

quadratic 

equation' 



c 



End 



e=Vd 

rl=(-b+e)/2a 

r2=(-b-e)/2a 



Print 'different 
roots', rl, r2 



i 



f Start J 




r = -b/a 




Print 'equal 
roots', r, r 



(1^ C^D 



Print 

'imaginary 

roots' 



f End J 



Flow chart 4.7 



189 



Flow chart 4.8 reads 1 00 numbers and prints their sum. 




sum = sum + a 
n = n+ 1 



Flow chart 4.8 



190 



Flow chart 4.9 determines whether a given integer is a prime 
number or not a prime a number. 




Print 'prime 
number' 



c 



Print 'not a 
prime number 



End 



Flow chart 4.9 



191 



Flow chart 4.1 finds the smallest integer n such that, 1 + 2+ 3+...+n 
is equal to or just greater than 1 000. 




Flow chart 4.10 



192 



4.1.1 Fundamental Conditional and Control Structures 

In a computer pseudo code, we have to instruct the computer 
regarding each and every step. Only if we can decide all these things 
by ourselves, we can write a computer pseudo code. The computer 
will simply do what we say. And exactly as we say. It won't do anything 
on its own. We can even say that the computer is the fifth disciple of 
Paramaartha guru. Do you wonder why? 

We shall see one episode in a sequence of such episodes. 
Paramaartha guru's disciples are named (in Tamil) as Matti, Madayan, 
Moodan and Muttaal, all different forms of the word 'fool'. They buy an 
old horse for their guru. The guru sits on the horse and the disciples 
come by walking. The guru's turban hits a branch of a tree and falls 
down. After some time the guru asks for the turban. The disciples say 
that it fallen down. When he asks why they had not brought it, they say 
that he had not told them so. The guru says that they should take and 
bring anything that falls down. 

One disciple goes back and brings the turban. The guru is 
annoyed to see the horse dung in his turban. When the guru asks why 
he had put the dung in the turban, the disciple answers "You only asked 
us to bring whatever has fallen down. How do we know which one to 
take and which one to leave? Better give us a list of things to take, so 
that there won't be any confusion." The guru dictates a long list and 
then they proceed. 

After some time, the old horse trips and falls down. Then one 
disciple starts reading from the list. Things like turban, dhoti, towel etc. 
are taken one by one. The guru lies there only with the loincloth. He 
asks them to take him and put on the horse. For this comes the prompt 
reply " You are not in the list, guru." When his pleadings fall on deaf 
ears, the guru asks tem to revise the list, and include his name in the 
list. Then he asks them to check the list again. Now he was helped to 
get up. 

193 



A computer pseudo code is like that list. The computer is like 
one of these disciples. It is not much different. It is our responsibility to 
instruct the computer properly and elaborately. We should get trained 
in thinking in such elaborate manner. 

In all these, they are only three techniques, which occur again 
and again. All the computing is done using only these techniques. 
Understanding them is just as necessary as the fisherman learning to 
swim. 

Sequencing 

Usually the calculations are done one after another, in a 
sequence. This is one of the fundamental control structures. 

4.1.1.1. Branching 

Two-way branching 

Ask a question. Get the answer as 'Yes' or 'No'. Depending on 
the answer, branch to one of the two available paths. This is depicted 
by a diagonal shaped box. You can see this box in many flow charts. 
Also many times in the same flow chart. Branching is also a 
fundamental control structure. 

For example, if A > B, then print A, otherwise print B. 

This is called the "If ...Then ...Else" structure. If no action is to be 
taken in one path, then we can use the "If.. .Then" structure. In this, if the 
answer is 'No', then it means that the execution goes to the next 
statement without doing anything. 

For example. If you find anyone there then say hello. 

194 



Multi-way branching 

For some questions there may not be just a Yes or No answer. 
For example -" What is the age of this boy?" the answer can be one of 
many integers. Depending on the answer, we may have to make 
different set of computations, by going through different paths. This is 
called multi-way branching. This can be depicted as in the flow chart 
4.1.1 




Flow Chart 4.11 



195 



For example, if n is then print 'zero' 

1 then print 'one' 

2 then print 'two' 

3 then print 'three' 

4.1.2 Iteration 

Definite Iteration 

The third fundamental technique is iteration. That is, repeating a set of 
actions again and again. Of course, we do not repeat the same actions 
for the same data, as this will be just a waste of time. The action will be 
the same, but the data will change every time. For example, reading 
100 numbers, or, finding the interest payable for 1000 customers. In 
both these examples, we know how many times we are going to repeat 
the same action. Hence the name definite iteration. In this method we 
have to keep track of the count of the number of times the actions are 
performed. For this we use a variable called the index variable or control 
variable. 

There are 4 basic steps involved in using an index variable. 

• The index variable should be given an integer as the initial 
value to start with. 

• The current value in the index variable v should be 
compared with the final value to decide whether more 
iteration is required. 

• If the answer is Yes, then 

■ Do the required actions once. 

■ Then increment the index V by 1. 

■ Go to step 2 and do the checking again. 

• If the answer is No, then 

■ The iterations are over. 

■ Go to the next action in the sequence. 

196 



The flow chart 4.1 2 explains about definite iteration. In this case, 
the iteration is shown by the presence of a loop formed by the directed 
lines. 



i 



i=l 




Required 
computations 



Next 
statement 



i = i+l 



Flow chart 4.12 

In some situations, we may not know exactly how many times 
the iteration is to be performed, as a number, in the beginning. For 
example, suppose we have to find the smallest number n such that 1 + 
2 + 3 + ... + n gives at least 1 00. Suppose we add numbers one by one 
and test whether 1 00 has been reached. We will stop when 1 00 has 
been reached. Here we do not know when we are going to stop as a 
number. A count is not going to work here. Only a condition is to be 
checked for this. Such iteration is called an indefinite iteration. 

Using sequencing, branching and iteration, all the computation 
can be carried out. 

4.1.3 Pseudo Code 

Instead of using flow chart, pseudo code can be used to 
represent a procedure for doing something. Pseudo code is in-between 



197 



English and the high-level computer languages. In English the 
sentences may be long and may not be precise. In the computer 
languages the syntax has to be followed meticulously. If these two 
irritants are removed then we have the pseudo code. 

There are only a few basic sentence types in this. They are also 
small in their size. But they have the power to specify any procedure. 
We have one more felicity. We can use the usual brackets in the usual 
sense of combining many things together. By indentation also we can 
club statements together. It is easy to understand things written in 
pseudo code. 

The flow chart fundamental control structures for branching and 
iteration correspond to the following pseudo code. 

• If ....then ....else.... 

• If ....then.... 

• For to ....do 

• While ....do 

A few examples for these are as follows. 

• If a > b then print a else print b 

• If a< 10 then b = c + d 

• For i = 1 to 20 do 

n = n + i 

• While sum < 100 do 

sum = sum + i 
i = i + 1 

Note that in the while .. do example, the two lines with indentation 
are to be clubbed together and treated as one unit for execution. The 
corresponding flow charts for the above examples are given below: 



198 






Flow Chart 4.13 

Note that all these control structures have only one entry point 
and only one exit point. That is after executing the things mentioned in 
these statements, the control is transferred to the next statement. That 
is, after this statement computer takes up the next statement for 
execution. This is one of the strong points of these control structures. 
This makes the understanding and debugging (finding and removing 
errors) easier. 

The pseudo codes corresponding to the problem we have 
worked out in an earlier section are given below. Compare the flow 
charts and the pseudo codes, and ascertain their equivalence. 



199 



• Finding the volume. 

start 

read length, breadth and height. 

volume = length x breadth x height 

print volume 

end 

Only sequence is used in the above example. 

• Write in words. 

start 
readn 
if n is 

then write 'zero' 

1 then write 'one' 

2 then write 'two' 

3 then write 'three' 
end 

• Finding the minimum of 3 numbers. 

start 

read a, b, c 
if a < b then 

(if a<cthen 
print a 
else 

print c 
) 



else 



end 



(if b<cthen 
print b 

else 

print c) 



200 



To solve quadratic equation, 
start 

read a, b, c 
if a = then 

( 

write 'this is not a quadratic equation' 

exit 

) 
else 

find d = b^ - 4ac 
if d < then 

write 'imaginary roots' 
else 

if d = then 

r = -b/a 

write ' equal roots' 

write r, r 



else 



r1 = (-b + d)/ 2a 
r2 = (-b - d)/2a 
write 'unequal roots' 
write r1 , r2 



end 



Sum of 100 numbers 

start 

sum = 

n = 1 

while n<= 100 then do 
read a 

sum = sum + a 
n = n + 1 

print sum 

end 

201 



• Prime number 

start 
readn 
for i = 1 to n-1 do 
if i divides n then 

(write 'not a prime' 
exit program 

) 
write 'prime number' 
end 

• Sum giving 1 000 or more 

start 
i = 1 

sum = 1 

while sum < 1000 do 
i = i + 1 

sum = sum + i 
print i and sum 
end 

There are a few points to be noted. 

• Within one 'if then else' statement, there is another 'if then 
else' statement. To show this clearly indentation is used. 

• Only the inner statement is written with extra indentation. 
All the statements in a sequence have the same 
indentation. 

• Just as we use brackets in Mathematics, here also we 
use brackets for bunching. 

• Since the procedures written in the pseudo code look 
similar to a program, it is very easy to convert it into a 
high-level language computer program. 

202 



4.1.4 Walkthrough 

As a first step in writing a program, a flow chart or pseudo code 
is created, to represent the solution method. This comes under the 
designing a solution for the problem. From this, the program is written 
with the specific syntax rules of a particular language. Before writing 
the program, one must be sure of the correctness of the method used. 
Hence it is necessary to check the correctness of the flow charts and 
pseudo codes. First we shall see what an algorithm (solution method) 
is. Then we shall see a method, called walkthrough, of checking the 
pseudo code or flow chart. 

An algorithm is a procedure with the following properties. 

• There should be a finite number of steps. 

• Each step is executable without any ambiguity. 

• Each step is executable within a finite amount of time, 
using a finite amount of memory space. 

• The entire program should be executed within a finite 
amount of time. 

Suppose a pseudo code or flow chart for an algorithm is given. 
A method of checking the way in which a computer will work using this 
is called a walkthrough. Let us consider an example of a flow chart. 
Assume that you are the computer. You have to start at the box named 
start. From this point you have to move along the path indicated by the 
arrows. If you enter a rectangular box do the necessary calculations. 

If it is an input box, assume some specific values for the particular 
variables. Each time assume a different set of values so that you will 
take different paths. For small problems, it is not difficult to exhaust all 
possible paths from start to end. This is one step in assuring that the 
method is correct. 

If it is an output box, write down the current values of the vari- 
ables mentioned. 

203 



4.1.5 Creating a Program 

Writing a small program is easy. A flow chart or pseudo code 
can be drawn for this first. Then from this the program can be written 
easily. But this method does not work in the case of real life programs, 
which are big. A systematic approach is very much essential in this 
case. 

In a program we have to provide many details. But, when we 
start a big venture, if we start thinking about finer details, then we will 
not be able to concentrate on the real job. We may never be able to 
finish the job. 

This is the right way to do any big job. We know the strength of 
unity. We have read many stories to illustrate this. For example, we 
cannot break a bundle of small sticks. But when they are unbundled, 
each stick can be broken very easily. This divide and conquer approach 
is used in many places. This method is useful in creating a big program 
also. 

To create a program, the problem should be divided into many 
smaller problems. We should know the method of putting together the 
results of these sub problems to get the result for the bigger problem. 
This is one step in creating a program. This step is repeatedly used, 
until the problem becomes small enough to write a flow chart or pseudo 
code. 

The interesting thing is that the logic for combining the sub 
problems also can be written using the same pseudo code we are 
familiar with. A flow chart can also be used for this. So using many 
pseudo codes or flowcharts, the entire program methodology can be 
written. Converting these into a computer program is a simpler job 
now. 



204 



This method of approach is called the Top Down Approach'. In 
each step we concentrate on a single thing, find how to get the solution 
by combining the results of smaller problems. In the case of computer 
programs, when this method was used first, more importance was given 
to the procedures, that is, the method of executing things, and not for 
the data. It is called 'Structured Programming'. When dividing a problem 
into smaller parts, if both the procedure and the data are taken into 
account, then we have what is called the 'Object Oriented Approach'. It 
is found that this approach is best suited for developing programs. 
Computer languages like C++ and Java help in writing programs 
developed using the object oriented approach. We will not be going 
into details of this approach here. 

We shall illustrate the use of top down approach, using an 
example. You should use this method to develop any program. 

Problem: Write a program to arrange 100 numbers in the ascending 

order. 

The method is: 

• Read 1 00 numbers and put them as a1 , a2, ... 

• Find the smallest of these. 

• Interchange this number with the first number. 

• Repeat these steps, 98 times (can you say why?), starting 
from the second position, third position etc. 

• Output the 100 numbers. 

Let us write this in pseudo code in a more systematic way. 

Read 1 00 numbers and put them in an array, as a(1 ), a(2) etc. 

Do for i = 1 to 99 

Find the smallest of a(i) to a(100) 

Let the smallest number be at the jth position 

Interchange a(i) and a(j) 

Output a(1),a(2)...a(1 00) 

205 



Here we have told that we can get the answer, if we can do a few things 
like, 

• Inputting and outputting the 1 00 numbers. 

• Finding the smallest of a given set of numbers 

• Interchanging two numbers 

We have not bothered to talk about the details of achieving these. 
That is left to the next stage of processing. In the second stage we take 
these smaller problems one by one and try to solve them. 

Reading 1 00 numbers: 
For count = 1 to 100 do 
Read a(count) 

This method can be used for outputting also. 

To find the smallest of the numbers a(1 ) to a(1 00): 

Let i = 1 

Let position = 1 

Let min = a(i) 

Forn = i+1 to 100 do 
lfa(n)<minthen 
min = a(n) 
position = n 

Letj=position 
Interchanging a(i) and a(j): 

Let temp = a(i) 
a(i) = a(j) 
a(j) = temp 

Here, it will be wrong if we write 

a(i) = a(j) 
a(j) = a(i) 

That is because, after executing the first statement, the old value 
of a(i) is lost. 

206 



4.2 Introduction to C Programming 

The C programming language is a popular and widely used 
programming language for creating computer programs. Dennis 
Ritchie at AT & T Bell Laboratories developed the C language three 
decades ago. Though it was designed originally as a language to be 
used with UNIX operating system, the C language is a general-purpose 
language. It is an efficient, flexible and portable language. Portability 
refers to the case in which a unit of software written on one computer 
may be moved to another computer without any or little modification. 
C has a wide diversity of operators and commands. C can be 
effectively utilized for development of system software like, operating 
systems, compilers, text processors, and database management 
systems. C is well suited for developing applications programs too. 

The C language is composed of the following basic types of 
elements: 

constants, identifiers, operators, punctuation, and [keywords 

These elements are collectively known as toltens. A token is a 
source program text that the compiler does not break down into 
component elements. 

Consider the statement: number = number + 1 ; 

The tokens are, 

number - identifier (variable) 
- operator 
+ - operator 
1 - constant 
; - punctuation 

The above statement has a collection of tokens such as identifier, 
constant, operator etc. The words like if, while, for etc., are termed 
as keywords in C programming language and their usage is restricted 
to specific purposes. The keywords are discussed in a later section of 
this chapter. 

207 



4.2.1 Constants 

A constant is of numeric or non-numeric type. It can be a 
number, a character or a character string that can be used as a value 
in a program. As the name implies, the value of a constant cannot be 
modified. A constant is immutable. Numeric data is primarily made 
up of numbers and can include decimal points. Non-numeric data may 
be composed of numbers, letters, blanks and any special characters 
supported by the system. In other words, non-numeric data consists of 
alphanumeric characters. A non-numeric data can be called as a literal. 
Constants are characterized by having a value and type. 
Numeric constants are of three types: 

• integer constant 

• floating-point constant 

• character constant 

The fundamental data types of C language are discussed later in this 
chapter. 

4.2.1.1 Integer Constant 

An integer constant is a decimal number (base 10) that 
represents an integral value (the whole number). It comprises of the 
digits to 9. If an integer constant begins with the letters Ox or OX, it is 
a hexadecimal (base 1 6) constant. If it begins with then it is an octal 
(base 8) constant. Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal. 

23, 36 and 948 are decimal constants 

0x1 C, OXAB, and 0x23 are hexadecimal constants 

071 , 023, and 035 are octal constants 

Integer constants are positive unless they are preceded by a 
minus sign and hence -18 is also a valid integer constant. Special 
characters are not allowed in an integer constant. The constant 2,345 
is an invalid integer constant because it contains the special character. 

208 



4.2.1.2 Floating - point Constant 

A floating-point constant is a signed real number. It includes 
integer portion, a decimal point, fractional portion and an exponent. 
While representing a floating point constant, either the digits before 
the decimal point (the integer portion) or the digits after the decimal 
point (the fractional portion) can be omitted but not both. The decimal 
point can be omitted if an exponent is included. An exponent is 
represented in powers of 1 in decimal system. 

Example: 

58.64 is a valid floating-point (real) constant. It can be 
represented in exponent form as follows: 

5.864E1 => 5.864X10^ => 58.64 
5864E-2 => 5864 X 102 => 58.64 
0.5864e2 => 0.5864 X 10^ => 58.64 

The letter E or e is used to represent the floating-point constant 
in exponent form. 

4.2.1.3 Character Constant 

A character is a letter, numeral or special symbol, which can be 
handled by the computer system. These available symbols define the 
system's character set. Enclosing a single character from the system's 
character set within single quotation marks forms a character constant. 
The characters used in C language are grouped into three classes. 



• 



• 



Alphabetic characters a, b, c, ...., z. A, B, C, , Z 

Numeric characters through 9 

Special characters +-*/%# = ,.'"()[]: 



209 



Example: 

'1 ', 'a', '+', and '-' are the valid character constants. 

Since two single quotes are used to represent the character 
constant, how do we represent the single quote itself as a character 
constant? It is not possible to represent a single quote character 
enclosed between two single quotes, that is, the representation '" is 
invalid. 

An escape sequence may be used to represent a single quote 
as a character constant. Character combinations consisting of a 
backslash \ followed by a letter are called escape sequences. 

'V is a valid single quote character constant. 

Similarly some nonprintable characters are represented using 
escape sequence characters. 

Examples: 



'\a' 


Bell (beep) 


'\b' 


Backspace 


'\f' 


Form feed 


'\r' 


Carriage return 


'\n' 


New line 


'\0' 


null character 



To represent the backslash itself as a character, two backslashes 
are used ('W). 

4.2.1.4 String Literal 

A string literal or a string constant is a sequence of characters 
from the system's character set, enclosed in double quotes. By default, 
the null character '\0' is assumed as the last character in a string literal. 
To have a double quote itself as a character in the string constant, an 
escape sequence 'V" is used. 

210 



"hello" Is a valid string literal. The actual number of characters 
In this string literal Is 6 Including the null character at the last. The null 
character Is Invisible here. Six bytes are required to store this string In 
memory. However, the physical length of this string Is 5 characters. 

4.2.2 Identifiers 

Identifiers are the names that are to be given to the variables, 
functions, data types and labels In a program. The name of a variable 
can consist of alphabets (letters) and numbers. Other characters are 
not allowed In the name of a variable. An underscore character can be 
used as a valid character In the variable name. The variable name 
starts with an alphabet and Its length may vary from one character to 
32 characters. The first character In a variable's name should be an 
alphabet, le., a number Is not allowed as a first character In the variable 
name. The valid variable names are: 

X 

length 
x_value 
y_value 
a123 

Keywords (which have special meaning in C) cannot be used 
as identifiers. The following variable names are invalid and the reasons 
are stated. 

123 -The first character is a number 

1abc -The first character Is a number 

X value - A blank character Is used 

x&y - A character other than alphabet and number Is 

used & Is not a valid character in a variable 

name, 
for - It Is a keyword 



211 



4.2.3 Fundamental Data Types 

Data is one of the most commonly used terms in programming. 
Data can be defined as the raw information input to the computer. Data 
is differentiated into various types in C. There are three numeric data 
types that comprise the fundamental or primary data types. The 
fundamental data types are: int, float and char. They are also called 
as pre-defined primitive types associated with the C compiler. The 
C compiler knows about these types and the operations that can be 
performed on the values of these types. The following are the 
declaration statements of variables of different types: 

int x; 
float f ; 
char ch; 

We know already that an integer is a whole number, a float is a 
real number and a character is represented within single quotes. 

Example: 

1 is an integer (whole number) 

1.0 is a real number (floating point number) 

'1 ' is a character constant 

"1" is a string literal 

The data type associated with a string literal is char * (character 
pointer) and the explanation is provided in the Arrays section of this 
chapter. 

An integer requires 2 bytes of memory to store its value, a float 
requires 4 bytes of memory and a character requires 1 byte of memory. 

4.2.3.1 Derived Types 

Long, double, unsigned, arrays and pointers are the derived 
types from the fundamental primitive types. A long Integer can be 
declared as follows: 

212 



long int i; 
or 
long i; 

To store a long integer value, four bytes of memory are required. 
To store the real (float) values more precisely, the type double is used. 
It occupies 8 bytes in the memory. 

Unsigned numbers are represented as follows: 

unsigned int i; 

Unsigned int occupies 2 bytes as normal integers but all the 
bits are used to store the value. In a regular integer, the most significant 
bit (the left most bit) is a sign bit. 

4.2.3.2 Pointer Variables 

The variables in C are classified into ordinary variables and 
pointer variables. An ordinary variable can take values of its 
associated type. 

Example: 

int x; 

Here, x is an ordinary variable of type integer and assumes a 
whole number as its value. 

x = 10; 

A pointer variable is declared as follows: 
int *y; 

The above declaration is a pointer variable declaration. Here, 
y is a pointer variable whose type is an integer pointer (int *). 

213 



A pointer variable assumes only address as its value. Each 
variable takes some locations in the main memory according to its 
type. Every location in the main memory is addressable. 

In the above examples, x is an ordinary variable and y is a 
pointer variable, x is an ordinary integer and y is a pointer to an integer. 
Hence, we can store the address of x in y. 

y=&x; 

There are only two operators associated with pointers - an 
address of (&) operator and an indirection (*) operator. Both 
operators are unary operators. The unary operators have been 
discussed in the next section. 

Since x is an integer, it occupies two bytes in the memory. Pictorially it 
can be represented with its address as follows: 



948 


949 







The address of the variable x is 948 as shown above. Every 
byte is addressable in main memory. To obtain the address of the 
variable, we have to use the "address of" operator (&). So in the state- 
ment y = &x; the address of x is stored into the pointer variable y. 
Since y is a pointer variable, it can assume only an address of a vari- 
able. We can say that y points to X. We can represent this as follows: 

948 949 




214 



Assume, the value of x is 1 0. To retrieve the value of x through 
the pointer variable y (since y already points to x), we can use the 
"indirection" operator (*). That is, *y will give the value contained in the 
location pointed by y. If the value of x is 1 and the pointer variable y is 
pointing to x then the value of the expression *y is 1 0. 

Remember in the above example, 

• y represents the address of the variable x (&x) 

• *y represents the value of the variable X (x) 

Both address of and indirection operators are used as unary 
operators here. 

4.2.4 Operators 

C has rich set of operators. Operators are what make things 
happen. An operator is defined as a symbol that specifies an operation 
to be performed. Operators inform the computer what tasks it has to 
perform as well as the order in which to perform them. The order in 
which operations are performed is called the order of precedence. It 
is also called hierarchy. The direction in which operations are carried 
out is called associativity. There are three types of operators in C. 

• Unary operators 

• Binary operators 

• Ternary operator 

4.2.4.1 Unary Operators 

Order of precedence is high for the unary operators and they 
have only one operand. The order of evaluation (associativity) is from 
right to left. Table 4.1 lists the unary operators and their functions. 



215 



Table 4.1 Unary Operators 



Symbol 


Type of operation 


Associativity 


++ 

* 

& 
! 


Increment 

Decrement 

Indirection 

Address of 

Negation 

(logical NOT) 


Right to Left 



The increment or decrement operator is used to increase or to 
decrease the current value of a variable by 1 . Generally the unary 
operators appear before the operand. For example, to find the address 
of integer variable x, we can use the expression & x. In case of 
increment and decrement operators, they may appear before or after 
the operand. 

Hence there are two forms: 
Postfix increment or decrement 
Prefix increment or decrement 

The unary operators ++ and — are called prefix increment or 
decrement operators when they appear before the operand. The unary 
operators ++ and — are called postfix increment or decrement 
operators when they appear after the operand. Their usages are 
explained in the other sections of this chapter. 



4.2.4.2 Binary Operators 

Arithmetic Operators 

The arithmetic operators like +, -, *, /, and % are binary operators 
as they have two operands. Table 4.2 shows the list of arithmetic 
operators. All the arithmetic operators observe left to right associativity. 

216 



Table 4.2 Arithmetic Operators 



Symbol 


Type of operation 


Associativity 


+ 

* 

/ 
% 


Addition 

Subtraction 

Multiplication 

Division 

Modulus 


Left to right 



The arithmetic operators can be used with Integers and float 
values. The modulus operator works with integers only and it gives the 
remainder value after division. The integer division truncates the result. 

Example: 

5/2 = 2 (the fractional part is truncated) 

5 % 2 = 1 (the remainder after division) 

With respect to integers, the division operator returns the 
quotient of the division and the modulus operator returns the remainder 
after division. The division, multiplication and modulus operators have 
higher precedence than addition and subtraction operators. 

Note: Thesymbol*isabinary operator used for multiplication. The 
same symbol * is used as a unary operator (indirection operator) along 
with pointer variable as we had seen earlier. All depends upon the 
context in which the symbol * is used. 



217 



4.2.4.3 Relational Operators 

The relational or Boolean operators are binary operators as 
they always have two operands but as an exception, the Boolean 
operator ! (Which is called as a negation operator) is a unary operator, 
that is, it has only one operand. Table 4.3 shows the list of relational 
operators. All the relational operators observe left to right associativity, 
that is, they are evaluated from left to right. 

Table 4.3 Relational Operators 



Symbol 


Type of operation 


Associativity 




Equal to (equality) 
Less than 




< 


Greater than 




> 
<= 


Less than or 
equal to 
Greater than or 


Left to Right 


!= 


equal to 
Not equal to 
(inequality) 





The relational operators are used to compare two values (items) 
and the result will be either true or false. The logical operators "&&" 
and "II" are used to connect two or more relational expressions. The 
"&&" operator is the logical AND operator and it returns a value of true 
if both of its operands evaluate to true. A value of false is returned if 
one or both of its operands evaluate to false. The logical OR operator 
"I I" returns a value of true when one or both of its operands evaluates to 
true and a value of false when both of its operands evaluate to false. 
The relational operators have lower precedence than the arithmetic 
operators. The logical && and || operators have still lower precedence 
than the relational operators. 

218 



Example: 



The expression (10 < 15) && (14 < 23) is always true. The 
expression is evaluated from left to right. Two relational expressions 
are combined using logical && operator. These two expressions are 
evaluated before the logical && operator evaluates the entire 
expression. Consider another example: 

The expression (10 < 15) || (14 < 23) is also true. The logical 
operator || combines two relational expressions. As per the rule of 
logical OR, the entire expression is true if either one of the relational 
expressions is true. Since the first relational expression is true in this 
example, the second relational expression will not be evaluated. This 
concept is called Short Circuit Evaluation. In case of logical AND 
(&&) operator, if the first operand evaluates to false then the entire 
expression becomes false and hence, the second relational expression 
will not be evaluated. 

4.2.4.4 Assignment Operators 

The assignment operator (=) assigns the value of the right-hand 
operand to the left-hand operand. C has arithmetic-assignment 
operators too. They are +=, - =, *=, /= and %=. 

Consider the following statement: 

i = i + 1; 

Here, the old value of the variable i is incremented by 1 and the 
incremented value is stored as the new value of i. The above statement 
can be represented in the following ways. 

Using the arithematic - assignment operator, 
i+=1; 

219 



In the above statement, the operator += is used to increment 
the old value of i by one and the new value is stored in the variable i 
itself. Similarly, the statement i *= 2; represents that the old value of i is 
multiplied by 2 and the new value is stored in i itself. 

Of all the operators, the assignment operators have the least 
precedence 

4.2.4.5 The order of evaluation 

We have discussed the precedence of operators in the previous 
section. Using the precedence of operators, we will see how to evaluate 
an expression. The bracketed expression should be evaluated first. 

Consider the following expression 

5*2 + 8 + (3- 2) *5 

It will be evaluated as follows: 
5*2 + 8 + 1*5 (bracketed expression is evaluated first) 
10 + 8 + 5 (multiplication has higher precedence over addition) 

23 (the value of the expression is 23) 

4.2.4.6 Ternary Operator 

C has one ternary operator, which is a conditional operator. The 
symbol used for this operator is ?: and it has three operands. The 
syntax of the conditional operator is as follows: 

conditional expression? expression 1 : expression 2; 

If the conditional expression is true, expression 1 is evaluated. 
If the conditional expression is false, expression 2 is evaluated. 



220 



Example : 

The following example show the uses of conditional operator: 

j = i<0? -i:i; 

This example assigns the absolute value of i to j. If i is less than 
0, -i is assigned to j. If i is greater than or equal to 0, i is assigned to j. 

4.2.5 Punctuation and Keywords 

C's punctuation symbols and their uses are listed as follows: 

[ ] - used to represent array index (square brackets) 

{ } - used to cover the body of the function (curly braces) 

( ) - used to represent a function, to group items and to group 
expressions (simple parentheses) 

< > - used to enclose a header file in a preprocessor statement 

(angular brackets) 

" " - used to represent string literals (double quotes) 

' ' - used to represent a character constant (single quotes) 

/* */ - used to represent a comment 

; - used as a statement terminator 

, - used to separate items 

blank and white space - used to improve readability of the 
program 

The following are the list of important keywords. They cannot 
be used as identifiers for the variables in a program. 

221 



auto break case char continue default do 
else if float for int return static 

switch while 

A keyword must be specified precisely as given in the list. 

For example, auto is a keyword, whereas. Auto or AUTO are 

not keywords. 

4.3 A Sample C Program 

A program is defined as a set of instructions to be executed 
sequentially to obtain the desired result. A function is a program, which 
is being used to carry out some small task. C programs can be very 
small. C programs are made up of functions. A program cannot be 
written without a function. A function may be pre-defined or user- 
defined. We will see the first program in C. The C program code is 
given below: 



#include <stdio.h> 
mainQ 

{ 
printfC'Hello World "); 

} 



A Sample C program 

This program, upon execution, will display the message Hello 
World on the screen. There must be a function defined as mainQ. 
The main() function is a user-defined one. The user has to define the 
main() function to provide necessary code. When a C program runs, 
the control is transferred to this function. This is called the program's 
entry point. The program has two functions, one is the user-defined 
main() function which is the entry point and the other one is printf() func- 
tion which is pre-defined and used to display the results on the stan- 

222 



dard output (screen or monitor). Simple parentheses () are used to 
represent a function. Here main() is the calling function and printfQ 
is the called function. The "Hello World" program with necessary 
explanations is given below. 



#include <stdio.h> /* <= preprocessor statement */ 

mainQ /* <= function header statement */ 

/* function definition starts */ <= comment statement 

{ ^^_^^^ 

^ ^^^^ function call statement 

f printfC'Hello World"); J function body 

} 



The first line in the program #include <stdio.h> is a 
preprocessor statement. #include is a preprocessor directive. The 
preprocessor is a software program that will expand the source code 
while the program is compiled. The #include <stdio.h> statement 
includes the contents of the stdio.h file (standard input and output header 
file) globally, that is, prior to the main() function. The contents of the 
stdio.h file are the function declaration statements of the pre-defined 
output and input functions like printf() and scanf() etc. 

The declarations of the functions printf() and scanf() are as follows: 

int printf(char *, ...); 
int scanf(char *, ...); 

The ellipses (...) represent that the above two functions can take 
variable number of parameters. But the first parameter is always a 
string. A parameter is a data or information passed on to the called 
function. Zero or more number of such parameters are passed to any 
function. They are given one after another within the brackets, which 
come after the name of the function. In the program shown above, the 

223 



printfO assumes only one parameter which is a string to be displayed 
on the monitor. The first parameter type (string type) is char * which will 
be read as "character pointer" and will be discussed later. 

The C compiler is able to recognize the pre-defined functions 
only because of their declarations in the appropriate header files. The 
following program illustrates the use of header files. The program while 
it is being executed clears the contents of the screen before displaying 
hello on the monitor. 



#include <stdio.h> 
#include <conio.h> 
mainQ 

{ 
clrscrQ; 

printfC'hello"); 
} 



Illustration of header files 

The function clrscr() is a pre-defined one whose prototype 
(declaration) is available in conio.h file and hence it has been included. 
If the statement #include <conio.h> is not included, the C compiler 
expects the definition of clrscr() function from the programmer and if 
the definition is not provided, it reports an error. 

4.3.1 Statements 

Each and every line of a C program can be considered as a 
statement. There are generally four types of statements. They are: 



224 



• Preprocessor statement 

• Function header statement 

• Declaration statement 

• Executable statement 

As you know already, the preprocessor statement is used to 
expand the source code by including the function declaration statements 
from the specified header files. The function header statement is used 
as a first line in the definition of a function. The declaration statements 
are further classified into variable declaration statements and function 
declaration statements. 

#include <stdio.h> => Preprocessor Statement 
mainQ => Function header Statement 

{ 

int a,b,c; => Variable declaration statement 

int add(int,int); => Function declaration statement 
a = 10; => Executable statement 

} 

The declaration and definition of user-defined functions have 
been discussed in the Functions section. There are many forms of 
executable statements. An assignment statement is a fundamental 
one, which is used to assign a value to a variable. 

4.3.1.1 Assignment Statement 

An assignment statement is defined as: 

Variable = Expression; 

A semicolon terminates the assignment statement. An 
expression is of many types, which will be discussed later. An 
expression produces one result as it is being evaluated, i.e., it has 
always been reduced to a single value. The value of the expression is 
assigned to the left hand side variable. The '=' sign is the assignment 
operator which is used to assign a value to a variable. Everything on 
the right hand side of an assignment operator is considered as an 
expression. 

225 



All statements in a function are enclosed between curly braces 
as we have already seen. The printf("hello"); statement is a function 
call statement. When it is being invoked, the message hello is 
displayed on the screen and the function returns an integer value that 
represents the number of characters displayed successfully on the 
screen. From the declaration of the printf() function, we can understand 
that it returns an integer. For example, consider the following program 
segment: 

int n ; /* variable declaration statement*/ 

n = printf("hello"); /*assignment statement*/ 

Here, the variable n is being declared as an integer. While the 
assignment statement is being executed, the right hand side expression 
is evaluated first and then the value of the expression is assigned to 
the left hand side variable. In this example, we have a function call 
expression on the right hand side of the assignment operator. The 
printfO function is invoked to display the message hello on the screen. 
The variable n is being assigned with a value 5 that is the value of the 
right hand side expression as the printf() returns an integer that 
represents the number of characters successfully displayed on the 
screen. 

4.3.1.2 Increment and Decrement Statements 

To increment the old value of a variable by 1 and to store the 
new value into the same variable can be achieved by using the 
statement: 

i = i + 1; 

The same can be achieved by using an increment statement, 
which is, 

i++; /* postfix form */ 

or 

++i ; /* prefix form */ 

226 



If the increment operator is used in stand-alone statements as 
shown above, there is no difference in the postfix and prefix 
representations. In both cases, the value of i is incremented by 1 . To 
decrease the old value of i by 1 , a decrement operator is used instead, 
ie., i — ; or — i; These operators may have different effects in other 
situations, which will be discussed later. 

4.3.1.3 Expression 

An expression occurs usually on the right hand side of an 
assignment statement. It has a value when it is evaluated. There are 
many forms of expressions and some of them are shown below: 

int a,b,c; variable declaration statement 

a = 10; 

On the right hand side, a constant value is used and hence it is 
a constant expression whose value is 1 0. 

b = a; 

A variable expression is used here whose value is 1 0. The right 
hand side of this assignment statement has been associated with two 
values: a variable's value and an expression value. In this case both 
values are same. But always remember that the expression value is 
assigned to the left hand side variable. 

The expressions can be named based on the operators used. 
The other expressions are: 

right hand side 

c = a+b; arithmetic expression 

c = a > b; relational expression 

f = d = e; assignment expression 

227 



In case of a relational expression, a true or false value is 
assigned to the left hand side variable and hence 1 or is assigned to 
the variable c. The '=' symbol is used as an assignment operator and 
hence assignment expression is allowed in C. Cascading of 
assignment is permitted. The value of the assignment expression (the 
value assigned to d is the value of the assignment expression) is 
assigned to the variable f. 

Consider the statement, 

f = d=10; 

The value of the assignment expression is 1 which is the value 
assigned to d. The value of the assignment expression Is then assigned 
tof. 

4.3.1.4 Postfix and Prefix increment Expressions 

Consider the following code segment: 

intx, i; 

i = 10; 

X = i++; /*postfix increment expression on the right side*/ 

printf("%d %d\n", x, 1); 

The unary ++ operator has the highest precedence and the 
assignment operator has the least precedence. In case of postfix form, 
first the value of the variable is used as the value of the expression and 
then the value of the variable is incremented by 1 . Hence on the right 
hand side, there are two different values, one is the value of the 
expression and another is the value of the variable. In the above 
assignment statement, the value of the expression, which is 1 0, will be 
assigned to the left-hand side variable x. The value of the variable i 
becomes 1 1 . We have to consider always the value of the expression 
while assigning a value to a variable on the left hand side in an 
assignment statement. Hence the output will be 

228 



10 11 

Consider the following code segment: 

intx, i; 

i = 10; 

X = ++i ; /*prefix increment expression on the right side*/ 

printf("%d %d\n", x, i); 

In case of prefix form, first the value of the variable is incremented 
by 1 and the incremented value is used as the value of the expression. 
The value of the expression, which is 11 , will be assigned to the left- 
hand side variable x. The output will be 

11 11 

Consider the following example with relational expression: 

nt X, z; 
x = 100; 

z = (x == X++); /* relational expression with one of the 
operands as postfix increment expression*/ 
printf("%d %d\n", z, x); 

What will be the output? 

The relational expression used in the above assignment 
statement will yield a value of true or false, i.e., 1 or 0. Therefore, the 
value of the variable z may be 1 or 0. Because of the highest 
precedence of ++ operator, the right side operand of the relational 
expression is evaluated first. Since it is a postfix expression, the 
expression value will be 1 00 and then the variable x gets incremented 
and its value becomes 1 01 . Now the left operand (which is a variable 
expression) of the relational expression has the value 1 01 . Hence, the 
values to be compared are 101 and 100 and they are not equal, the 
value is assigned to z. The output will be: 

229 



101 

Remember: 

In the assignment statement, we have to give importance to the 
value of the expression and not to the value of the variable. 

4.3.1.5 Input and Output Statements 

As we have seen already, the function printf() is used to display 
the results on the standard output (screen). We have seen the use of 
printf to display the string on the monitor. Actually, the first parameter 
of the printfO function is a string which is used to control the output and 
hence it can be called as "control string". This parameter is used to 
format the output for display and hence we can also call it as a 
"formatting string". 

Example: 

To print a value of an integer: 

int n; /* variable n is declared as integer*/ 
n = 10; 
printf("%d", n); 

In the above example, '%d' is used as a formatting character 
within the control string of printf() function to display the value of an 
integer. The control string of printf() function can take three types of 
characters. 

• Ordinary characters 

• Formatting characters 

• Escape sequence characters 

Ordinary characters within the control string are displayed as such. In 
the case of printf("hello"); statement, the control string has ordinary 

230 



characters only. They are displayed as such on the screen. Table 4.4 
lists the formatting characters used to display the values of various 

types. 

Table 4.4 Formatting Specifications 



Formatting character 


Data type 


%d 


int 


%f 


float 


%c 


char 


%s 


char[] 


%ld 


long Int 


%lf 


long float or double 



As seen already, the escape sequence characters are 
represented by a backslash followed by another character. They are 
in fact single character constants only. They are stored and manipulated 
as a single character. Escape sequences allow partial control over 
the format of the output. The frequently used escape sequences in the 
control string of printfQ function are: 



'\n' 

'\t' 

'\b' 



new line character 
tab character 
backspace character 



Consider the following printf() function call statement: 

int i = 15; 
printfC'the value of i = %d \n", i); 



231 



The output displayed on the screen is: 

the value of i = 15 

All the three types of characters namely, ordinary characters, 
formatting character and escape sequence character are used in the 
control string of above printf() function. The ordinary characters are 
displayed as such. Because of the formatting character %d, the value 
of the next unprocessed integer has been displayed. The output is 
displayed in one line and because of the new line character '\n', the 
cursor comes to the next line and the subsequent outputs are displayed 
there. 

The statement printf("one\ntwo\nthree\n"); will print 

one 
two 
three 

Each word is displayed in a separate line because of the new 
line character, '\n'. 

Consider the code segment 

int x; 

float y; 

x = 10; 

y = 10.5; 

printf("%d %f", x, y); 

The output is: 

10 10.500000 

The floating-point values are displayed with respect to six 
decimal places of accuracy by default. If we need two decimal places 
of accuracy, then the formatting specification %0.2f has to be used. 
Here the decimal fraction is restricted to two decimal places of accuracy. 

232 



Hence the statement, printf("%0.2f", y); will display the output as 
1 0.50. To control the total width while displaying the output, the width 
can be included along with the formatting specifications, i.e., 

printf("%10d %10.2f", x, y); 

will print 

bbbbbbbb10bbbbbb10.50 /* b represents a blank space 7 

Input from keyboard 

To read a value from the keyboard (standard input), the function 
scanfQ is used. The prototype of scanf() is similar to the prototype of 
printf(). It can take variable number of parameters. 

The code segment to read a value for an integer variable x is 
given below: 

intx; 
scanf("%d", &x); 

While the scanf() function Is being executed, the system waits 
for the user's input. The user has to provide data through keyboard. 
The data will be placed in the location of x only after "Enter" key is 
pressed in the keyboard. The second parameter of the above scanf() 
function is &x, which represents the address of x. & is the address of 
operator and when it is being used with a variable, it provides the 

address of that variable. 



4.3.2 User-defined Functions 

When a specific task is to be repeated numerous times or at 
different places in a program, it is convenient to transfer the code 
associated with that task into a function. The user or programmer can 
write functions to define specific tasks that may be used at many points 
in a program. Hence, a function is also a kind of program, which 

233 



contains a set of code to be executed sequentially to obtain the desired 
result. The function which calls another function is termed as calling 
function and the other is termed as called function. The called 
function may or may not have parameters. 

Functions are invoked by a function call. The function call 
specifies the function name and provides necessary information as 
parameters that the called function needs in order to perform its specific 
task. This is a good practice in C programming to declare functions 
as variables were being declared. A function declaration may be called 
as a function prototype or a function model. The function prototype 
has four components. 

• Name of the function 

• Return value type 

• Number of parameters 

• Type of each parameter 

For example, consider a user-defined function that will add two 
numbers and return the result to its caller. The function prototype looks 
like, 

intadd(int, int); 

In the above function declaration statement, add is the name of 
the function, which takes two parameters each of type integer 

respectively and returns an integer. The function is defined as follows: 



int add(int a, int b) /* function header statement */ 

{ 

return (a+b); 

} 



A User-defined function 

234 



The function prototype i.e. function declaration statement is 
terminated by semicolon and the function header statement is not 
terminated with semicolon. The function header statement is the first 
statement while the function is being defined. 

Defining a function means to write a set of instructions (code) 
within curly braces { }. The code written within the curly braces is called 
as function body or a block. All variables declared in function definitions 
are local variables. They are known only in the function in which they 
are defined. A function's parameters are also local variables. The 
parameters provide the means for communicating information between 
the calling function and called function. 

The complete program that invokes the add function is given 
below: 



#include <stdio.h> 
#include <conio.h> 
mainQ 

{ 

inta, b,c; 

intadd(int, int); 

a = 12; 

b = 11; 

c = add(a,b); /* a and b are actual parameters */ 

printf("%d\n", c); 

} 

int add(int x, int y) /* x and y are formal parameters */ 

{ 

return(x+y); 

} 



235 



Actual Parameters are the parameters defined in the calling 
function and they have the actual values to be passed to the called 
function. 

Formal Parameters are the parameters defined in the called 
function and they receive the values of the actual parameters when the 
function is invoked. 

In the above program, when the assignment statement c = 
add(a, b); is being executed, the program control is transferred to the 
add function. The parameters a and b are called as actual parameters 
since they have the actual values to be passed to the function when the 
add function is invoked. These values are received by the formal 
parameters x and y of the called function. When the add function is 
called, the values of the actual parameters are copied to the formal 
parameters on one to one correspondence basis and this mechanism 
is called as "call by value". The add function returns the result to 
calling function. As the statement c = add(a+b); has a function call 
expression in its right hand side, the value of the expression is the 
return value of the add function. 

When the function execution is over, the program control is 
returned to the calling function to the place from where it is transferred 
in the case of a function call expression. In case of a function call 
statement, the program control is returned to the next statement in the 
calling function. It is also important to note that the local variables' values 
of the called function are lost and the local variables themselves have 
been destroyed when the function execution is completed. Local 
variables are the variables those are declared, defined and used within 
a function. 

In the above example, the add function is invoked using call by 
value. When the parameters are passed call by value, a copy of the 
parameter's value is made and passed to the called function. Changes 
to the copy in the called function do not affect the original variable's 
value in the calling function. If the called function knows the address of 
the local variable of the calling function then the called function can 
modify the local variable's value of the calling function. This can be 
achieved by the "Call by address" concept 

236 



Example: 

Consider the following program segment: 



#include <stdio.h> 
mainQ 

{ 
int i; 

void change(int *); 
i = 20; 
change(&i); 
printf("%d\n", i); 

} 

void change(int *x) 

{ 

*x = 23; 

} 



The program output should be 23, that is, the value of the local 
variable of the calling function is changed. The formal parameter of the 
change function is an integer pointer x which receives the address of 
the local variable i of the calling function, thus x points to i. The 
assignment statement in the called function, *x = 23; assigns a new 
value in the location pointed by x. Since x points to i, the value of i is 
modified. 

As seen already, the indirection operator * is used to retrieve 
the value contained in a location which is referred by a pointer. Consider 
the following code segment: 

int i = 32; 
int*p; 
int m; 
p = &i; 
m = *p; 

237 



The *p which is in the right side of the assignment statement 
retrieves the value from the location pointed by p. It is nothing but the 
value of the variable i. Using *p on the right side, it is possible only to 
retrieve the value and not possible to modify the value contained in the 
location. In the change function, the indirection operator is used along 
with the pointer variable x on the left side of the assignment statement. 
If the indirection operator is used in the left side, it gives the location 
value, i.e. the address and not the contents. Hence, in the statement 
*x = 23; the value 23 is stored in the location pointed by x. 

If the indirection operator is used in the right side, it gives the 
data value, that is, it is used to retrieve the value and not to modify that 
value. It is read-only value. If the indirection operator is used in the left 
side, it provides the location value, where the contents can be modified. 
Yet another important concept of a function is explained using the 
following code segment, which behaves differently that you may not be 
aware. 

inti = 10; 

printf("%d %d", i, i++); 

If you think that the expected output is 1 1 0, or may be 1 11 , 

you are wrong. There is a hidden concept in this program. In C 

language, when a function is invoked, its parameters are stored 

onto a stack from right to left. A stack is a last-in - first-out (LIFO) 

structure. Consider a stack of plates or tumblers. In a dining room, the 

plates or tumblers are placed one above the other. The last plate or 

tumbler placed (which is on the top) will be taken out first and then the 

next. A stack is pictorially represented as follows: 

238 



stack 




top of the stack 



-► the first elemen 



pushed onto the stack 



When the above printf() function is called, the first value pushed 
onto the stack is the value of the expression i++. Since it is a postfix 
expression, the value of the expression is 1 and it is pushed onto the 
stack. Then the value of the variable i gets incremented by 1 because 
of the increment operator. The value of i becomes 11. The next 
parameter (from right to left) to be pushed onto the stack is the value of 
the variable i. Hence, the value 1 1 is pushed onto the stack and then 
the last parameter, that is, the control string "%d %d" will be pushed 
onto the stack. When there are no more parameters to be pushed 
onto the stack, the printf () function starts to pop out the elements from 
the top of the stack. The first element to be popped out is "%d %d". 
The function analyses the control string, since the first occurrence is 
%d, it will pop out the next element from the stack (value 1 1 ) and then 
displays it. For the next %d, the function pops out the next element 
from the stack (value 1 0) and displays it. The stack becomes empty. 
You can see the output 

1110 



You can understand now, how the C function works. 
4.4 Storage Classes 

So far, we have seen that a variable has the following attributes: 



Name 

Type 

Value 



239 



Storage class is another attribute that is associated with the 
variable. C provides four storage classes: 



• auto 

• static 

• register 



• extern 

A variable's storage class is used to determine its scope and 
lifetime, auto variables are actually local variables. They are created 
when the function in which they are declared is entered, and they are 
destroyed when the function is exited. The variables declared within a 
function are local to that function. Their scope and lifetime are limited 
within that function, which means, all the local variables are destroyed 
when the function execution is over. We cannot access the values of 
the local variables outside the function, i.e., the scope of the local 
variables is within the function in which they have been declared. 
Consider the following program: 



#include <stdio.h> 


mainQ 


{ 


addO; 


add(); 


} 


add() 


{ 


inti = 0; 


i = i + 1; 


printf("%d\n", i); 


} 



The output of the above program will be 
1 



1 



240 



The variable i is a local variable in the add function. Each time 
the add function is called, the variable i gets recreated and initialized 
to and hence the result will be always 1 . If the variable has been 
declared as a static variable, its value will be retained even after the 
function execution is over. Change the add function as follows: 



add() 



static int i = 0; 
i = i + 1; 
printf("d\n", i); 



The variable i has been declared as a static variable. It is local 
to the add function. Its scope is still within the add function and its 
value cannot be accessed by any other function. The static variables 
are created only once during the first call of the function. The main 
advantage of static variables is that their values are retained even after 
execution of the function. So, each time, the function add is called, the 
value of the variable i gets incremented and the output will be 



1 
2 



The above program is rewritten by declaring i as a global 
variable. Global variables are declared before the main() function. They 
can be accessed and modified by all the functions in the program. 



241 



#include <stdio.h> 

inti = 0; 

mainQ 

{ 

add(); 
add(); 

} 
add() 

{ 



i = i + 1; 
printf("%d\n ",i); 



} 



The output of the above program will be: 

1 
2 

In the above program, i is a global variable and it can be 
accessed and modified in all functions. The static variables retain the 
characteristics of local variables. The life time of the static variable as 
well as the global variable ends only when the entire program execution 
is over. The scope of the static variable is to the function in which it has 
been declared. The scope of the global variable is to all the functions 
in the program. Except these differences, the global variables declared 
outside any function are static by default. But a static variable is not a 
global variable. 

The register variables behave like auto variables. If a variable 
is declared with register storage class, its value is placed in one of the 
computer's high-speed hardware registers. If the compiler does not 
find sufficient registers to use, it may ignore register declarations. The 
register variables are used to speed up operations, by reducing memory 
access time. 



242 



Global variables are accessed in the functions of a program 
stored in one file. If the global variables have to be accessed by the 
functions in a file other than the one in which they are declared, the 
extern storage class can be used. For example, if we define global 
integer variable count in one file, and refer to it in a second file, the 
second file must contain the declaration extern int count; prior to the 
variable's use in that file. The extern variables have global scope and 
the lifetime is throughout the execution of the program. 

4.5 Conditional Statements 

4.5.1 if statement 

In C, the conditional statements rely on the idea of Boolean 
expressions. The if statement controls conditional branching. The 
Boolean expression or in other words a relational expression will yield 
a true or false value. In C, a value other than is true and is 
considered as false. The body of an if statement is executed if the 
value of the expression is true i.e., non-zero. There are two forms of if 
statement 

if(relational expression) 
statement; 

if(relational expression) 

statementi ; 
else 

statement2; 

In the first form, if relational expression is true (non-zero), the 
statement is executed. If the expression is false, the statement is ig- 
nored. In the second form, which uses else, statement2 is executed if 
the expression is false. With both forms, control then passes from the 
if statement to the next statement in the program. 

243 



Here is a C program demonstrating a simple if statement: 



#include <stdio.h> 
mainQ 

{ 

int x; 

printf("Enter an integer: "); 
scanf("%d", &x); 
if (X > 0) 
printf("The value is positive\n"); 

} 



This program accepts a number from the user. It then tests the 
number using a conditional expression of the if statement to see if it is 
greater than 0. If it is, the program prints a message. Otherwise, the 
program is silent i.e., there will be no output. The (x > 0) portion of the 
program is the Boolean expression. C evaluates this expression to 
decide whether or not to print the message. If the Boolean expression 
evaluates to true, then C executes the single line immediately follow- 
ing the if statement (or a block of lines within braces immediately fol- 
lowing the if statement). If the Boolean expression is false, then C skips 
the line or block of lines immediately following the if statement. Con- 
sider another example: 



#include <stdio.h> 




mainQ 




{ intx; 




scanf("%d", &x); 




if (X < 0) 




printf("The value 


is negative\n"); 


else if (X == 0) 




printf("The value 


iszero\n "); 


else 




printf("The value 

} 


is positive\n"); 



244 



In this example, the if-else-if construct is used which we can 
call as a nested if-else structure. The nested if-else structure is used 
to perform some operations based on choices. Consider a simple 
arithmetic problem in which add, subtract, multiply and divide 
operations are to be carried out depending on the choice. The options 
may be displayed. The program can be written in two ways: 

Using simple if 



#include <stdio.h> 
mainQ 

{ inta,b,c,choice; 
scanf("%d%d", &a,&b); /*b is not zero */ 

printf("1 . addition\n "); /* option 1 */ 

printf("2. subtraction\n"); /* option 2 */ 
printf("3. multiplication\n "); /* option 3 */ 
printf("4. division\n"); /* option 4 */ 

scanf("%d", &choice); 
if(choice== 1) 

c = a + b; 
if(choice == 2) 

c = a-b; 
if(choice == 3) 

c = a* b; 
if(choice == 4) 

c = a/b; 
printfC'the result = %d\n", c); 

} 



The above program estimates the value based on the choice 
and prints the result. The number of comparisons made in the program 
is 4 irrespective of any choice. It performs comparisons unnecessarily. 
When (choice == 1) is true, it is not necessary to evaluate the other 
conditions and may be skipped. The use of nested if-else construct 
will solve this problem. 

245 



Using nested if-else construct 



#include <stdio.h> 




mainQ 




{ inta,b,c; 




int choice; 




printf("Enter two integers: 


"); 


scanf("%d%d", &a,&b); 


/* b is not zero */ 


printf("1.addition\n"); 


/* option 1 */ 


printf("2.subtraction\n"); 


/* option 2 */ 


printf("3. multiplication\n ") 


; /* option 3*/ 


printf("4.division\n"); 


/* option 4 */ 


printf("Enter your choice: 


"); 


scanf("%d", &choice); 




if(choice==1) 




c = a + b; 




else 




if(choice == 2) 




c = a-b; 




else 




if(choice == 3) 




c = a*b; 




else 




if(choice == 4) /*comparison is optional */ | 


c = a/b; 




printfC'the result = %d\n", ( 

} 


0; 



246 



The above program uses nested if-else construct. If the first 
condition is true, that is, (choice == 1 ) is true, the statement c=a+b; is 
executed and the statement following the else is skipped. Therefore, 
if the first condition is true, only one comparison is made and all the 
other comparisons are skipped. Only when the first condition fails, the 
program continues to compare the second condition and it goes on 
similarly. This program works faster than the previous program. But if 
choice is 4, both programs have to do four comparisons. 

4.5.2 Switch - case statement 

The switch - case statement is the modular replacement of the 
cumbersome nested if-else structure. The switch and case statements 
help to control complex conditional and branching operations. The 
switch statement transfers control to a statement within its body. The 
syntax of the switch -case statement is as follows: 

switch (conditional expression) 

{ 

case constant-expression 1 : 



break; 
case constant-expression 2: 



break; 



default: 

} 

The type of switch (conditional expression) and the case 
constant-expression must be integer type. Control passes to the 
statement whose case constant-expression matches the value of 
switch(conditional expression). The switch statement can include any 
number of case statements, but no two case statements within the same 
switch statement can have the same constant-expression. Execution 

247 



of the statement body begins at the selected case statement and 
proceeds until the end of the body or until a break statement transfers 
the control out of the body. The break statement is used to end 
processing of a particular case statement within the switch statement. 
Program continues to the next case, executing the statements until a 
break or the end of the statement is reached. The default statement 
is executed if no case is equal to the value of switch(conditional 
expression). If the default statement is omitted, and no case match is 
found, none of the statements in the switch body are executed. The 
default statement is an optional statement and it need not come at the 
end; it can appear anywhere in the body of the switch statement. The 
program to solve the simple arithmetic problem using nested if-else 
structure is rewritten using switch - case statement as follows: 



#include <stdio.h> 




mainQ 




{ inta,b,c; 




int choice; 




printf("Enter two integers: 


"); 


scanf("%d%d", &a,&b); 


/*b is not zero */ 


printf("1.addition\n"); 


/* option 1 */ 


printf("2. subtraction\n"); 


/* option 2 */ 


printf("3. multiplication\n ") 


; /* option 3*/ 


printf("4. division\n"); 


/* option 4 */ 


printf("Enter your choice: ' 


'); 


scanf("%d", &choice); 




switch(choice) 

{ 
case 1 : 






c = a + b; 




printf("%d", c); 




breal<; 




case 2: 




c = a- b; 




printf("%d", c); 




breal(; 





248 



case 3: 

c = a* b; 

printf("%d", c); 

break; 
case 4: 

c = a/b; 

printf("%d", c); 

break; 
default: 

printf("the choice is out of range\n"); 



The above program is modular and has easy readability than 
the program written using nested if-else structure. Consider another 
example that displays whether the given character is a vowel or 
consonant. 



char ch; 
ch = 'a'; 
switch(ch) 

{ 

case 'a': 

case 'e': 

case 'i': 

case 'o': 

case 'u': printf("the given character is 

vowel"); 

break; 
default: printf("the given character is 
consonant"); 



249 



In the above example, as the value of the character ch is 'a', the 
first case is satisfied and since there is no break statement, the program 
continues to the next case, executing the statements until a break or 
the end of the statement is reached. Hence, if the value of the character 
ch is 'a' or 'e' or T or 'o' or 'u', the statements belong to the case 'u' 
have been executed, otherwise, the statement belongs to the default 
case is executed. 

4.6 Control Statements 

The body of an if statement will be executed only once when the 
condition is satisfied, i.e., the relational expression contained within 
the if is true. In some situations, it may be necessary to repeat a set of 
statements until certain specified conditions are met. To achieve this, 
control or looping statements are required. A loop is a part of a program 
that comes back and repeats itself as many times as necessary. In C 
programming, there are three control statements namely, while, for and 
do while. 

4.6.1 while statement 

The while statement is used to execute the set of statements 
repeatedly till the condition specified remains true. In the while 
statement, the condition is tested at the entry level. The number of 
times the loop gets executed is controlled by a control variable. The 
following program prints the first ten natural numbers each in one line. 
Here, a loop is required to execute the printf() function for 1 times. 



#include <stdio.h> 
mainQ 

{ 
int i; 

1=1; /* Initialization */ 

while(i<=10) /*condition */ 

{ 

printf("%d\n", i); /*processing statement*/ 

i = i + 1 ; /*updating */ 

} 
} 



250 



In the above program, the variable i is used as a control variable 
that will control the execution of the while loop. The control variable is 
properly initialized just before the while statement. Since the above 
program is to print the first 1 natural numbers and the first number to 
be printed is 1 , the control variable is initialized to 1 . The loop has to 
be executed for 1 times and hence the condition i <= 1 is used. The 
body of the while loop is executed if the specified condition is true. 
The control variable is incremented by 1 every time the loop executes 
so that the loop will be repeated exactly for 1 times. If the test condition 
fails, the control is transferred out of the loop. On exit, the program 
continues with the statement immediately after the body of the loop. If 
you look into the program once again, the control variable is tested 
immediately after the initialization of it and it is incremented just before 
the end of the while loop (just before the closing curly brace). The syntax 
of the while statement is as follows: 

Initialization of the control variable 
while(condition) 

{ 




processing statements 

updating the control variable; 
} 

The control variable is tested against a condition in the while 
statement and it should be properly updated within the while loop for 
proper termination of the loop. If the updating line is missing, the value 
of the control variable will be always 1 and the loop never ends. 

If we omit the initialization, condition and the updating statements from 
the above program, it contains only one processing statement, which 
is printf("%d\n", i); that will serve the purpose of this program. 

Let us see another example. Write a program to generate the following 
sequence: 

251 



1, 2, 4, 7, 11, 16 ISterms 



The second number in the sequence is obtained by adding 1 to 
the previous number, the third number is obtained by adding 2 to the 
previous number, the fourth number is obtained by adding 3 to the 
previous number and so on. The loop is to be executed for 1 5 times. 
The program is as follows: 



#include <stdio.h> 
mainQ 

{ 
intterm; 

int i; 

^processing variable 
i = i;/^ 

term = 1 ; ► control variable 

while{term <=15) 

{ 

printf("%d\n", i); 

i = i + term; 

term = term + 1 ; 
} 



In the above program, the variable term is used to control the 
execution of the loop and the variable i is used as a processing variable. 
The logic of the program depends on the statement i = i + term ; where 
the next number in the sequence is obtained by adding the value of 
term to the previous number and the term is incremented by 1 every 
time the loop executes. The success of the program that uses a while 
loop depends on the proper use of control and process variables. The 
control variable is to be initialized, tested in the condition and then 
updated in the loop. The process variable is used in the logic. 



252 



Awhile statement can be nested within another while statement. 
The inner while statement executes faster than the outer while loop, 
that is, the inner while loop terminates its execution before the 
termination of the outer while loop. Each while loop must have proper 
initialization of its control variable, proper condition to control the number 
of times the loop gets repeated and proper updating of the control 
variable. 

Example: 

Write a program to print 1 once, 2 twice in the next line, 3 thrice 
in the next line and continue up to 1 0, that is, 1 written ten times. This 
problem requires two loops; the outer loop controls the number of the 
times the inner loop has to be repeated. Each time the inner loop is 
executed, the number of times it gets repeated depends on the outer 
loop control variable's value. The program is as follows: 



#include <stdio.h> 

mainQ 

{ intij; 

i = 1; 

while(i<=10) 

{ 

j = i; 

while(j <= i) 

{ 

printf("%d ", i); 

j++; 

} 
printf{"\n"); 

i++; 
} 



253 



The output is as follows: 

1 

22 

333 



1010101010101010 10 10 

The inner loop of the above program is executed for i number of 
times where i is the control variable of the outer loop. 

4.6.2 for statement 

The for loop in C is simply a shorthand way of expressing a 
while statement. For example, suppose you have the following code in 
C: 

x=1; 

while (x<=10) 

{ 

printf("%d\n", x); 

X++; 
} 

You can convert this into a for loop as follows: 

for(x=1; x<=10; x++) 

{ 
printf{"%d\n", x); 

} 

Note that the while loop contains an initialization step (x = 1 ), a 
test step (x <= 1 0), and an increment step (x++). The for loop lets you 
put all three parts into one line. In the for loop also, the condition is 
tested at the entry level. The body of the above for loop executes 1 
times. Here, the control variable is initialized first and then It Is tested. 
If the test condition is true, the body of the loop is executed; otherwise 

254 



the loop is terminated and the execution continues with the statement 
that immediately follows the loop. After the body of the loop has been 
executed, the control is transferred to the for statement, where the control 
variable is updated and then retested. The loop continues till the 
condition remains true. 

The syntax of the for loop is as follows: 

for(initialization; condition; updation) 

{ 

body of the loop; 

} 

A for loop can also be nested. The problem of printing 1 once 
and 2 twice can be written using nested for loops as follows: 



#include <stdio.h> 
mainQ 

{ 

int i; 
intj; 

for(i=1;i<=10;i++) 
{ 

for(j=0;j<=i;j++) ^_^ inner Loop 

printf("%d",i); 

printf("\n"); 
} 
} 



The inner for loop has only one statement and the outer for loop 
has two statements. If the body of the loop contains only one statement, 
there is no need for curly braces to enclose the body of the loop. 

255 



The problem which is solved using while loop can also be solved 
using a for loop. It is a good programming practice to use for loop 
where the number of times of repetition is known precisely. The for 
loop is a definite repetition loop where we know in advance exactly 
how many times the loop will be executed. The while loop is preferred 
when the number of repetitions is not known before the loop begins 
executing. 

Example: 



#include <stdio.h> 
mainQ 

{ 
char ch; 

int count = 0; 

ch = getcharQ; 

while(ch != '\n') /*condition*/ 

{ 

count++; 

ch = getcharQ; 

} 

printf("the number of characters entered: %d\n", count); 
} 



In the above example, the number of times the loop will be ex- 
ecuted is not known until the user presses the Enter key in the key- 
board. Once the variable ch obtains its value as the new line character 
(Enter key pressed), the test condition fails and the control is trans- 
ferred to the next statement immediately after the body of the while 
loop. For this problem, the while loop is preferred since the number of 
characters to be entered by the user is not known precisely. In the 
above program, the function getchar() is used to read a character at a 
time from the keyboard and it is a pre-defined function. 

256 



4.6.3 do -while statement 

In the while loop, the condition is tested at the entry level. If the 
condition fails at very first time, the body of the loop will not be executed 
at all. In case of do -while statement, the condition is tested at the exit 
level and hence the body of the loop is executed at least once whether 
the condition is true or false. At the end of the do - while loop, the 
condition is tested and if it is true, the loop gets executed once again. 
This process continues as long as the test condition is true. When the 
test condition becomes false, the loop is terminated and the control is 
transferred to the statement immediately after the do -while statement. 



Example: 

x = 14; 
do 

{ 

y = x + 2; 

X—; 
} while (x> 0); 

In this do-while statement, the two statements y = x + 2; and x — 
; are executed regardless of the initial value of x. Then x > is evaluated. 
If X is greater than 0, the body of the loop is executed again and the 
condition x > is reevaluated. The body of the loop is executed 
repeatedly as long as x remains greater than 0. Execution of the do- 
while statement terminates when x becomes or negative. The body 
of the loop is executed at least once. 

4.7 Arrays 

An array is a collection of homogeneous elements i.e. elements 
of similar data type. Use of arrays makes programming easier in many 
cases. For example, you might want to find the maximum among 3 
integers for which 3 independent variables may be used and can be 
solved using simple if statements as shown below: 

257 



#include <stdio.h> 

main () 

{ inta, b, c; 

int max; 

printf("Enter the Sintegers:"); 

scanf("%d %d %d",&a,&b,&c); 

max = a; 

if(b > max) 
max = b; 

if(c > max) 
max = c; 

printf ("%d is the maximum ",max); 

} 



If the above program is extended to find the maximum among 
100 integers then the program might use 100 independent variables 
and 100 if statements. This makes the program more complex and 
lengthy and moreover it is not the correct method of programming. An 
easier way is to declare an array of 1 00 integers: 



inta[100]; 



type 



array 
name 



number of 
elements 



258 



The 1 00 different integers inside the array are accessed by an 
appropriate index. It reduces the complexity of using 1 00 variables for 
storing 1 00 different values. An array declaration specifies the name 
of an array and the type of its elements. A constant expression should 
be used within the square brackets that specify the number of 
elements in the array and its value must be greater than zero. The 
storage associated with an array is the storage required for all of its 
elements. The elements of an array are stored in contiguous and 
increasing memory location from first to last element. 

In C, arrays can be single dimensional or multi-dimensional. 
The array elements can be accessed using indices. A single 
dimensional array of 1 integers is declared as follows: 

inta[10]; /* => array declaration statement */ 

When the program starts to execute, the compiler allocates 20 
bytes in the main memory to store the 1 elements of this array, since 
each integer requires 2 bytes of memory. These 1 elements are stored 
in contiguous memory locations. An array index starts from zero. If 
there are n elements in an array, they can be accessed using the indices, 
which start from zero to n-1 . The value for the array elements can be 
assigned as follows: 

a[0]=10; 
a[1]=20; 

a[9]=100; 

One of the nice things about array indexing is that you can use a 
loop to manipulate the index. For example, the following code initializes 
the values in the array sequentially: 



259 



int i; 

inta[10]; 

for(i=0;i<10;i++) 

scanf("%d", &a[i]); 



The second parameter &a[i] in the above scanf() statement 
indicates the address of the i"" element where i=0 to 9.The scanf() 
function gets the value and places it in the appropriate location 
(address). 

An array can be initialized as follows: 

inta[3]={10,15,20}; 

The array elements are stored in the memory as given below: 



948 



a[0] 



950 



a[1] 



952 



10 


15 


20 



-> address 
-> Elements 



a[2] ► accessing array elements 



Each integer occupies 2 bytes of memory. The compiler 
allocates 6 consecutive bytes, which is called as a block of memory 
and has a starting address of 948 as shown in the above figure. The 
addresses of the elements a[0], a[1] and a[2] are 948, 950 and 952 
respectively. 

The address of the first element is represented as &a[0] and it 
is 948 in our example. The value contained in this location is 1 and it 
can be retrieved using the expression a[0]. Hence the value of a[0] is 
1 and its address is 948. The compiler after allocating memory for 
this array stores the starting address in the array name itself. Hence, 

260 



both a and &a[0] represent the starting address. We can say that the 
array's name a points to the array. It means that a points to the starting 
address. In other words, it points to the first element of the array. 



948 



a[0] 



950 



952 



10 


15 


20 



a[1] a[2] 



As we have seen already, the indirection operator (unary *) is 
used to retrieve the value contained in a memory location and hence 
*a will yield the value 1 0. Hence the following expressions 

a[0], 



'a 



and *(&a[0]) 

will provide the same value 1 0. 

So, we can say, 

a[0] <=> *a <=> *(&a[0]) 

Here the symbol <=> is used to represent "all are one and the 
same" and it is not a C language operator. 

From the above discussions you can understand that the starting 
address or the base address of an array is stored in the array's name 
itself. Since the address is stored in the array name it becomes a 
pointer. Hence the array name itself points to the first element of an 
array. The array's name always points to the starting address of the 
array and the base address of an array cannot be modified. It means 
that we cannot make the array's name to point to the second element 
in the array. We cannot modify the address stored in the array's name 
and hence it is a pointer constant. 

261 



The arrays and pointers are closely related to each other. 
Consider the pointer variable x. 

int *x; 

Consider an array of 3 integers as already explained, 

int a[3] = {10, 15,20}; 

Here, x is a pointer variable which can assume an address of 
another integer and a is a constant pointer to an integer, i.e., to the first 
element of the array. The base address of the array can be assigned 
to the pointer variable x. 

x = a; 

We made x to point to the starting address of the array. Since 
X is a pointer variable, we can make it to point to any other element in 
the array during execution of the program. Pointer arithmetic is an 
excellent feature in C programming. The following operations can be 
carried out using pointers. 

• An Integer can be added to or subtracted from a 
pointer 

• Two pointers can be subtracted 

Consider the following illustration : 

948 950 952 



10 


15 


20 



a[0] 



a[1] 



a[2] 



262 



Both X and a point to the first element of the array because of 
the statement x=a;. Here, both x and a point to the address 948. Adding 
to both will not change the address values of x and a. We can use 
the indirection operator * to retrieve the value contained in that location. 
The expressions *(a+0) and *(x+0) both yield the value 10. The 
expression *(a+0) is the pointer notation to access the first element 
value in the array. The first element of the array is usually obtained 
using array notation (square bracket notation) a[0]. Consider the 
following identities: 

x+0 <=>a+0 

*(x + 0) < = > *(a + 0) 

Since *(a+0) and a[0] are one and the same, we can write, 

*(x + 0) < = > x[0] 

Here, the pointer variable x is used with a subscript (index) to 
access the first element of the array pointed by it. So, a pointer can be 
indexed. This is possible only when the pointer points to a block of 
continuous memory locations. The expression x+0 is the address of 
the first element and *(x+0) is the value contained in that address. 
Adding 1 to the array name a or to the pointer variable x will give the 
address of the second element in the array. 

x+1 <=>a+1 

An integer is added to an address. We are performing pointer 
arithmetic and not an ordinary arithmetic. Remember this important 
rule - while we are performing pointer arithmetic, the arithmetic 
is scaled by the size of what type of element it points to. Here x 
points to an integer and the size of the integer is 2 bytes and hence the 
scaling factor is 2. Therefore, 

X + 1 < = > 948 + 1 * 2 = 950 

a + 1 < = > 948 + 1 * 2 = 950 < = > &a[1] 

263 



a + i < = > &a[i] < = >x + i < = > &x[i] 



The expression a+i is the address of the ith element in the array 
and *(a+i) is the value of the ith element. 

The above discussions will make you to understand the following: 

• Arrays and pointers are closely related and 

• A pointer can be simulated as if it were declared as 
an array 

Example: Write a program to read values for an array of 1 
integers. 



#include <stdio.h> 
mainQ 

{ 
int i; 

inta[10]; 
for(i=0;i<10;i++) 
scanf("%d", a+i); 

} 



Note that, a+i is used in place of &a[i] in the scanf() function, 
because we have already proved that they are one and the same. When 
i = 0, the expression a+i will provide the address of the first element 
and when i = 1 , it will provide the address of the second element and 
soon. 

So far we have seen integer arrays and how to handle them 
using pointers. Handling character arrays is our next focus. An array 
of 24 characters is declared as follows: 



264 



char name[24]; 

Here, name is an array of 24 characters. Twenty-four consecutive 
bytes have been allocated and the starting address is stored onto the 
array name name. A string can be defined as a collection of 
characters terminated by a null character ('\0'). So, if it is required to 
handle a string, an array of characters is needed. To read a string from 
the keyboard, the following statement is used: 

scanf("%s", name); 

The formatting specification character %s is used here to read 
a string. '%s' will treat the blank space within the string as a delimiting 
character and hence it cannot be used to read a string which contains 
blank spaces. When the above statement is being executed, it waits 
for the user's input. All the characters entered by the user will be stored 
from the starting address specified by name and a null character '\0' 
will be automatically appended at the end. To print the string, we can 
use 

printf("%s", name); 

The formatting specification character '%s' will retrieve 
characters from the starting address and displays them until it receives 
a null character. 

Since string is a collection of characters (an array) its type will 
be char *. The data type associated with the string constant is char * 
and hence its value should be an address and not the contents of the 
string. The value of a string constant is the starting address where the 
string has been stored in the memory. 

Consider the code segment, 

ifC'rama" == "rama") 

printfC'equal"); 
else 

printf("not equal"); 

265 



Here, the strings are compared as any other constants 
compared with the equality operator. The C compiler accepts this 
syntax and the code segment produces the output not equal. Even 
though the identical strings are used for comparison in the above code 
segment, strings are stored in two different locations. We know already 
that the value of a string is its starting address and not the string itself. 
Actually the locations are compared and they are not equal. Therefore 
the code segment produces the output not equal. 

We will see a program to count the number of characters in a 
specified string. The string.h file provides declarations of many string 
handling functions. The function strlenQ is used to find the length of the 
string. The strlen() is a pre-defined function whose prototype is available 
in string.h file. The prototype of the strlen() function is: 

intstrlen(char*); 

The strlenO function accepts string (a pointer to a character) as 
a parameter and returns its length as an integer. 



#include <stdio.h> 

#include <string.h> 

mainQ 

{ char name[24]; 

int len; 

printf("enter a string: "); 

scanf("%s", name); 
len = strlen(name); 

printf("%d\n", len); 

} 



266 



The above program reads a string from the key-board, finds its 
length and displays the result. 

When an array has to be passed as a parameter to a function, 
pointers can be effectively utilized. We will write our own function to 
find the length of the string. In the following code, the function lenstrQ is 
a user-defined one. 

Version 1 : 



int lenstr(char*s) 
{ 



int count = 0; 
while(s[count] != '\0') 
count++; 
return(count); 



If the string "rama" is passed as a parameter to the lenstr() 
function, it is received by the formal parameter which is a character 
pointer and hence s points to the string "rama". As the loop starts its 
execution with count = 0, s[0] represents the first character in the string, 
that is 'r' and it is not equal to null character. Since the condition is 
satisfied, the body of the loop is executed. The count gets incremented. 
The loop gets executed repeatedly until s[count] becomes '\0'. The 
function returns the value of the count, which represents the number of 
characters in the string. 



267 



Version 2: 



int lenstr(char *s) 

{ int count = 0; 
while(*s != '\0') 

{ 

count++; 

S++; 
} 

return(count); 
} 



When the control enters into the loop for the first time, *s has the 
value Y, the first character in the string "rama". In the body of the while 
loop, the pointer s gets incremented so that it points to next character 
in the string. The process continues until *s becomes '\0'. 

Version 3: 



int lenstr(char *s) 




{ 




char *start, 


*end; 


start = end = 


= s; 


while(*end) 




end++; 




return (end 


- start); 


} 





All the character pointers start, end and s are made to point to 
the string "rama", assuming that when the function lenstr() is invoked, 
the string "rama" is passed as a parameter. 

268 



end 948 949 950 951 952| 

WVvVvVv I 



: : 




I 


a 


ITl 


a 


\0 


S. i 


start 












end 



The start, end and s are pointing to the address 948, which is 
the address of the first character. Use while loop to traverse the end 
pointer until it points to '\0'. When the loop completes its execution, the 
pointer end points to the address 952. Examine the test condition in 
the while statement. In C, a value other than is treated as true. First 
time, *end has the value 'r' which is other than and hence the condition 
is satisfied. When *end has the value '\0' which is 0, the condition 
becomes false. When the loop terminates, end points to 952 and 
start points to 948. The expression end - start (i.e., 952 - 948) has 
the value 4 and it is returned as the number of characters in the specified 
string. When one pointer is subtracted from another, the result is the 
number of bytes in between them. Pointer arithmetic feature alone 
enables the handling of arrays using pointers. 

4.7.1 Multidimensional Arrays 

A multidimensional array has been considered as an array of 
arrays in C language. A two dimensional array has the following 
declaration: 

inta[3][3]; 



The above declaration represents a 3 X 3 matrix. There are 9 
elements and the compiler allocates 1 8 consecutive bytes to store the 
elements of the matrix. The first dimension represents the number of 
rows and the second dimension represents the number of columns. 
To read values to this matrix (two dimensional case), we need two 

269 



indices, one is row index and another is column index. The array index 
starts from in C language. We can access the first element using 
a[0][0]. Consider the following code segment. 



inta[3[[3]; 

int i; 

intj; 

for(i=0;i<3;i++) 

for(j=0;j<3;j++) 

scanf("%d", &a[i][j]); 



The above segment reads values for the matrix row wise. For i 
= in the outer for loop, the inner loop executes for j = 0, 1 , 2 (three 
times) and hence it reads the first row of three integers. It continues for 
i = 1 and i = 2. When you are giving input, each integer is separated by 
one or more blank spaces. 

There are 3 rows and each row represents an array of 3 integers. 
It is in the array of arrays form. The first dimension has 3 elements and 
each element is an array of 3 integers because of the second 
dimension. Consider the following matrix: 

1 2 3 
4 5 6 
7 8 9 

It can be represented in an array of arrays form as follows: 

a[0] ^ [1 2 3] 

a[1] ^[4 5 6] 

a[2] -» [ 7 8 9 ] 

270 



The first dimension is an array of 3 elements where each element 
is an integer array and hence each element is an integer pointer. Hence 
the declaration int a[3][3] can be interpreted as follows. The first 
dimension is an array of 3 integer pointers and the second dimension 
is an array of 3 integers. a[0] points to the first row of three integers 
and it is an integer pointer, whereas, a[0][0] is the first element in the 
matrix, that is, the first element of the first row. a[1 ] points to the second 
row of three integers. The compiler treats the two-dimensional array in 
this way only. But we are simply assuming that the first dimension 
represents rows and the second dimension represents columns. 

We had seen how to read values for a matrix of size 3X3. Next 
we will write a code segment to print a matrix in row wise. 



for(i = 0; 


i<3; 


i++) 


{ 






for(j = 0; 


j<3; 


i++) 


printfC 


%d " 


, a[i][j]); 


printf("\n 


"); 




} 







A matrix addition program which adds two matrices of size 3 X 
3 and stores the results in another matrix is given below: 



271 



#include <stdio.h> 
#include <conio.h> 
main() 

{ 

inta[3][3],b[3][3],c[3][3]; 
int i, j; 
/* read values for the input matrix a */ 
for(i=0;i<3;i++) 
for(j=0;j<3;j++) 
scanf("%d", &a[i][j]); 

/* read values for the input matrix b */ 
for(i=0;i<3;i++) 
for(j=0;j<3;j++) 
scanf("%d", &b[i][j]); 
/* initialize the output matrix c with all elements */ 
for(i=0;i<3;i++) 
for(j=0;j<3;j++) 
c[i][j] = 0; 
/* add matrix a and b and store the result in matrix c */ 
for(i=0;i<3;i++) 
for(j=0;j<3;j++) 
c[i][i] = a[i][j] + b[i][j]; 
/* print the resultant matrix c */ 
for(i=0;i<3;i++) 

{ 
for(j=0;j<3;j++) 

printf("%d ", c[i][j]); 
printf("\n"); 
} 



272 



Comments are included in the above program in order to 
understand every part of the program. The following program illustrates 
about Independent handling of rows in a matrix. The program is to find 
the maximum value in each row of a given matrix of size 3X3. 



#include <stdio.h> 

#include <conio.h> 

main() 

{ int a[3][3], max[3]; 

int maximum(int *); /* declaration of user-defined function */ 
int i, j; 

cIrscrO; /* to clear the contents of the screen */ 

/* read values for the input matrix a */ 
for(i=0;i<3;i++) 
for(j=0;j<3;j++) 
scanf("%d", &a[i][j]); 
/* find the maximum in each row and store in the array max */ 
for(i = 0; i < 3; i++) 

max[i] = maximum(a[i]); 
/* print the max array */ 
for(i =0; I < 3; i++) 

prlntf("The maximum value of row %d = %d\n", i+1, 
max[i] ); 

} 

int maximum(int *x) 



{ 



int mvalue; 
m value = x[0]; 
for(i = 1 ; i < 3; i++) 
if(x[i] > mvalue) 
mvalue = x[i]; 
return(mvalue); 



273 



In the above program, a user-defined function has been written to find 
the maximum value in an array of 3 integer elements. The name of the 
function is maximum. It takes one parameter of int * type and returns 
an integer value, which is the maximum value. This function is called 
for 3 times from the main() function within a for loop. Each time the 
maximum function is called, a row of three integers has been passed 
as a parameter, i.e., a[i], where i = 0, 1, 2. The starting address of 
each row is received by the formal parameter x which is an integer 
pointer in the called function. As we have seen already, the pointer x 
can be indexed (as it points to an array of 3 elements) to access the 
elements of the array. The maximum value of each row is stored 
correspondingly in the array called max. Hence, each row of elements 
can be handled independently by using its starting address. 

4.8. Structures 

Structures are derived data types in C language. They are 
constructed using variables of other types. Structures are used to create 
user-defined types. Structures are commonly used to define records 
to be stored in files. A file is a collection of records. A record is a 
collection of fields of information. 

A student record may contain the following fields: 
Roll number. Name and Age 
The values of these fields may be 
1001 Anand 18 

The above record contains information about the student 
"Anand" whose roll number is 1 001 and his age is 1 8. 

An array is a collection of elements of same data type. A structure 
is a collection of elements of different data types. An array is a 
homogeneous collection whereas a structure is a heterogeneous 
collection of elements. 



274 



The fields of the student record shown in the above example are of 
different data types. 

Roll number: an integer field 
Name: an array of characters 

age: an integer field 

Consider the following structure definition: 

struct student 

{ 
int rolino; 
char name[24]; 
int age; 

}; 

The struct is a keyword, which is used to define a structure. 
The identifier student is a structure tag or a tag name. The above 
definition just tells us about the record structure, that is, how many fields 
it contains and their respective data types. Definition of a structure will 
give only the template of the record. It is nothing but the skeleton of the 
record. Variables (fields) declared within the braces of the structure 
definition are the structure's members. Members of the same structure 
must have unique names. The structure definition must end with a 
semicolon. The structure definition does not reserve any space in 
memory, that is, memory will not be allocated when defining a structure 
and hence the members of the structure cannot be initialized within the 
structure definition. 

In the above example, the structure type is struct student. Now 
struct student becomes a new user-defined data type. The structure 
definition creates a new data type that is used to declare variables. 
Structure variables are declared like variables of other types. 



275 



Example: 

struct student x, y; 

X and y are the variables of type struct student. Each variable 
has three fields as defined in the structure. A total of 28 bytes will be 
allocated for each variable of type struct student. 

It is always better to define the structure as a global entity so 
that its definition is available to all functions in the program. 

The structure variables can be declared global as well. For 
example, 

struct student 

{ 

int rolino; 

char name[24]; 

init age; 
}x,y; 

Here the structure variables are declared while defining the structure 
itself. It is also possible to define a structure without tag name. Then 
variables must be declared while defining the structure itself. 
Without tag name, the structure definition will not be acceptable as a 
user-defined data type. 

Example: 

struct 

{ 
intempno; 
float salary; 
}x,y ; 



276 



By using the definition stated in the above example, it is not 
possible to create new structure variables other than x and y. The 
structure definition without tag name as well as without declaring 
variables will become useless or anonymous. 

It is not possible to do anything with the following structure 
definition: 

struct 

{ 

intempno; 
float salary; 

}; 

4.8.1. Accessing the members of the structure 

To access the members (fields) of a structure, dot operator is 
used. The structure variable is used as a qualifier while accessing its 
members along with the dot operator. For example, to access the roll 
number of the student, that is, the rolino field using the structure variable 
X, the following notation is used: 

x.rolino 

Fields can be assigned to or can be read from. The following 
statements can be used to assign the roll numbers for the students x 
andy. 

x.rolino =1000; 
y.rolino =1001; 

To read the members of the student record, the function scanf() can 
be used as follows: 

scanf("%d%s%d", &x.rollno, x.name,&x.age); 

277 



Since the name field in the structure (an array of 24 characters) itself 
provides the starting address of an array, there is no need to provide 
an explicit & operator in the scanf() function while reading the name of 
the student x. 

4.8.2 Pointers to Structures 

Like primitive pointers, structure pointers can also be declared. For 
example, 

struct student *ptr; 

In the above declaration statement, ptr is a pointer to the user-defined 
data type struct student. It can be assigned with an address of another 
structure of the same type. 



Example: 

struct student s1 ; 

ptr = &s1 ; /* ptr points to the structure s1 */ 

To access the members of the structure s1 using the pointer ptr, arrow 
operator (->) should be used instead of dot operator. 

That is, to access the rolino field, the expression ptr -> rolino should be 
used. (*ptr). rolino is the old syntax. 

4.8.3 An Array of Structures 

An array of structures can be declared as follows: 

struct student x[5]; 

Here, x is an array of five structure elements. x[0], x[1] ..., x[4] are 
individual structure elements of type struct student. The members can 
be accessed as 

278 



x[0].rollno, x[0].name, x[0].age 

To read members for the second element in the array, you can use 
scanf("%d%s%d", &x[1].rollno, x[1].name, &x[1].age); 

To read an array of 5 student records, a for loop can be used 

for(i=0;i<5;i++) 

scanf("%d%s%d", &x[i].rollno, x[i].name, &x[i].age); 

Similarly, a for loop is used to print the student records one after the 
other. The records can be sorted in roll number order, alphabetical 
order or age wise and separate reports can be printed. Structures are 
generally used in database operations as they handle records. 
Exercises 

I State True or False 

1 . It is a must to draw a flow chart before writing a program. 

2. Flow charts are easier than the pseudo codes. 

3. An algorithm should have a finite number of steps. 

4. An index variable is used in the indefinite iteration. 

5. Every time a condition is checked in the indefinite iteration. 

II Fill In the blanks 

1 . A flow chart is drawn writing a program. 

2. Understanding a pseudo code is than understanding a flow 

chart. 

3. Every program be represented by a flow chart. 

4. A walkthrough find all the bugs in the design. 

5. Each step in an algorithm must take a amount of 

and 



279 



III Answer the following 

1 . Give two important differences between the flow chart and the 
pseudo code. 

2. Draw the different types of boxes used in the flow chart. Explain 
each one of its roles. 

3. Give two examples of a multi-way branching. Use pseudo code. 

4. Give two examples of a two-way branching. Use a flow chart. 

5. Give two examples and illustrate the use of an index variable. 

6. Using two examples to illustrate definite iteration. 

7. Using two examples illustrate indefinite iteration. 

8. State three differences between definite and indefinite iterations. 

9. Give two examples where multi-way branching is more natural 
than two-way branching. 

1 0. Explain the fundamental control structures using pseudo code. 

1 1 . Give the properties of an algorithm. 

IV Programming Exercises (For each problem, draw appropriate 
flow chart and write pseudo code) 

1 . Write a program to print your name 5 times on the monitor. 

2. Write a program to interchange the values of two variables. 

3. Write programs to do the following: 
To find the area of a triangle 
To convert the temperature from Fahrenheit to Celsius 

iii. To convert the time in hours : minutes : seconds to 
seconds 

4. Write a program to find the maximum among two integers 
i. Using if statement 

280 



ii. Without using if statement 

{Hint: max=((a+b) + abs(a-b))/2 

5. Write a C program to find your age in terms of years, months 
and days till today. (For simplicity, assume each month has 
equally 30 days) 

6. Write a C program to find the sum of the first 1 natural 
numbers, that is to find 1 +2 +3 + + 10 

7. Write a C program to generate the Fibonacci series of 1 5 
terms, 

0, 1, 1,2,3,5,8 , (ISterms) 

8. Write a C program to count the number of vowels present in 
your name. 

9. Write a C program to find the greatest common factor which 
will divide the given two numbers. 

{Hint: Use the following user-defined function to find gcf) 
int gcf(int first, int second) 
{ int temp; 

while(second > 0) 

{ 

temp = first % second; 
first = second; 
second = temp; 

} 

return (first); 

} 

1 0. Write a C program using the above gcf() function to simplify 

the given fraction. If the input is 1 6 / 64 then the output is 1 / 4. 

1 1 . The number 3025 has a property that when we square the 
addition of the first half of the number and the next half of the 

281 



number, the result will be the same number. That is, square of 
(30 + 25) is 3025. Write a C program to print all such four 
digit numbers 

1 2. An Adam number is one which satisfies the following: The 
reverse of the square of a number is the square of the reverse 
of that number. That is, if the number is 1 2 then 1 2^ = 1 44, 
the reverse is 441 which is 21 2. Write a C program to find all 
such numbers between 1 and 1 00. 

1 3. Write a C program to check whether the given number is in 
Fibonacci sequence or not. 

1 4. Write a C program to convert the string of lower case letters 
into upper case and vice versa. 

1 5. Write a C program to convert the decimal number into its 
equivalent binary number, octal number and hexadecimal 
number. 

1 6. Write a program to convert binary number into its equivalent 
decimal. 

1 7. A perfect number is a number that is the sum of all its divisors 
except itself. Six is the perfect number, since the sum of the 
divisors of six except itself is 1 + 2 + 3 = 6. Write a C 
program to find the perfect numbers between 1 and 1 0000. 

1 8. An abundant number is one that is less than the sum of all its 
divisors except itself (1 2 is an abundant number, since 1 2 < 1 
+ 2 + 3 + 4 + 6). Write a C program to find the abundant 
numbers between 1 and 10000. 

1 9. A deficient number is one that is greater than the sum of all its 
divisors except itself (9 is a deficient number, since 9 > 1 + 3). 
Write a C program to find the deficient numbers between 1 
and 10000. 

282 



20. Write a C program to reverse the contents of a string. If the 
input string is rama, the output should be amar. 

21 . Write a C program to check whether the given string is 
palindrome or not. 

22. Write a C program to arrange the array of 1 numbers in non- 
increasing order. 

23. Write a program to interchange the values of two variables 
using a function. 

24. Write a C program to find the average of 1 numbers. 

25. Assume array a contains n values that are supposed to be in 
ascending order. Write a C program to perform a sequence 
check and write an error message if the values are out of 
sequence. If the values are in sequence, write an appropriate 
message. 

26. Write a C program to find sum of the diagonal elements of a 
matrix. 

27. Write a C program to get the transpose of a matrix. 

28. Write a C program to perform matrix multiplication. 

29. Write a C program to find the maximum and minimum values 
of each column of a given matrix. Write functions to find the 
maximum and minimum. Each function takes an integer 
pointer as its parameter. {Hint: Each column is passed as 
an array to the function - store each column elements in a 
temporary array and then pass to the function) 

30. Write a C program to store 1 names in an array and print 
them each in one line. 



283 



CHAPTER 5 

INTRODUCTION TO WEB DESIGN 

5.1 Introduction 

In order to learn Web design and HTML (Hypertext Markup 
Language), you must first understand how your computer Interacts with 
the Internet. Internet Is a network of networks. It has no central control. 
All the nodes in the network are be equal In status to all other nodes. 
Each node has the authority to originate, pass and receive messages. 
On the net, you can find computers. On the World Wide Web (WWW), 
you can find documents. The World Wide Web is a collection of 
documents. The World Wide Web is most often called as Web. On the 
net, the connections are cables between computers. On the Web, the 
connections are hypertext links. The Web exists because of the 
programs that communicate between computers on the net. The Web 
cannot exist without the net. The Web made the net useful because 
people are really interested in information. 

The birth date of Hypertext Documents is June 1 2, 1 991 . Hypertext 
documents that are shared on the Internet are called web pages. Web 
pages are files stored on computers called Web Servers. Web clients 
are the computers that are requesting the web pages from the web 
servers. Web clients can view the web pages with a program called 
web browser. Web pages are created using Hypertext Markup 
Language (HTML). Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the 
communication protocol used by the Internet to transfer hypertext 
documents. A protocol is a rule, which guides how an activity should 
be performed. More precisely, a protocol is a formal description of 
message formats and the rules that two computers must follow to 
exchange those messages. The location address of the hypertext 
documents (Web pages) is known as a Uniform Resource Locator 
(URL). Web pages usually contain text, graphics, multimedia, and 
links to other pages. The HTML and HTTP standards are defined by 

284 



www consortium. HTML is the widely accepted format to create and 
to viewinformation on the net. The two most commonly used browsers 
are Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator. 

5.2 Elements of Hypertext Markup Language 

The Hypertext Markup Language is composed of tags that instruct 
a Web browser how to format and process a hypertext document. Web 
pages are created using HTML. Web pages can be created by using 
a simple text editor program such as Notepad or in a Web page editor 
such as FrontPage. The HTML elements are defined using HTML tags. 

Example: 

A Web document starts and ends with the following tags. 

<html> 



</html> 



The HTML tags are always enclosed within angular brackets <...>. 
Each starting tag must have a proper closing tag. In the above example, 
<html> is the starting tag and </html> is the ending tag. A forward 
slash (/) character is used after the opening angular bracket (followed 
by the corresponding tag name) to represent the closing tag. The tags 
are not case sensitive. Lowercase letters are used for tags in this 
book. 

The text between the start and end tags is the element content 
that is to be manipulated by the tags. 

A sample HTML element: 

<body> 

This is my first HTML document 

</body> 

285 



The HTML element begins with the starting tag <body> and 
ends with the ending tag </body>. The entire web document is contained 
within this HTIVIL element. 

Actually there are two parts of a Web document. 

• Heading Section 

• Body Section 

The heading section is identified by a pair of head tags (<head> 
and </head>) and the body section is identified by a pair of body tags 
(<body> and </body>). Comments can be provided any where in a 
HTML file. The comment can be included using <! — comment — >. 
The comments are ignored by the browser. Comments are used only 
to improve the readability of the document. The <head> tag is optional. 

5.3 Heading Section 

5.3.1 Title tag 

The heading section can contain nested HTML tags. A <title> 
tag is used to provide a name to a web document. 

<html> 

<head> 

<title>First Web Document</title> 

</head> 

</html> 

The title "First Web Document" is placed in the title bar on the 

browser as shown below: 

286 



-► title 



■3 First Web Document - Microsoft Internet tHplbrer 



Fife. Edit: View Favorites Tools Help 



L, I 



Search Favorites vv ^^'^ 



5.3.2 Meta tag 

The meta tag is used to provide additional information about the 
page that is not visible in the browser. The meta tags are always placed 
within the heading section of the Web page. This tag can be used to 
identify the author's name of the web document and to identify the 
keywords that describe the site. Keywords are the group of words that 
are frequently used in the document and they have to clearly indicate 
the context of the document. Search engines use these keywords to 
group the web sites. 

Example: 

<meta name="Author" content="Albert"> 

<meta name="keywords" content="books, definitions"> 

The name attribute of the <meta> tag is used to identify the user- 
defined variables and the content attribute is used to identify the values 
of those variables. 



In most browsers, user can reload the page by clicking the button 
Reload or Refresh. In some web documents, the contents are changing 
periodically. So we have to refresh or to reload the page again to view 
the new contents. But the <meta> tag can be used for automatic 
reloading of pages at specific intervals. The attribute http-equiv is 
used for this purpose. 

287 



Example: 

<meta http-equiv="refresh" content="30"> 

The current web page, which is shown on the browser, is automatically 
reloaded every 30 seconds. It is also possible to redirect to another 
web page after some specified time using <meta> tag. 

Example: 

<meta http-equiv="refresh" 

content="5; url=www.yahoo.com"> 

The above <meta> tag redirects to yahoo page after displaying 
the current Web page for 5 seconds. The content attribute identifies 
the U RL of the Web page and the number of seconds that the browser 
waits before reloading the Web page. A semicolon is used to separate 
the waiting time and the URL. 

5.3.3 Style tags 

The style tags are also used within the heading section. A style 
tag is used to change the default characteristics of a particular tag in 
the entire web document wherever that tag is used. A style tag has two 
segments - a selector and a property. 

Example: 

<head> 
<style> 

h2 { colonblue } 
</style> 
</head> 

The <h2> tag is a heading tag that has a predefined formatting 
style used for headings within a web page. In the above example, the 

288 



default characteristic of the <h2> tag has been modified. The browser 
renders the element content of the <h2> tag with bold font and black 
color. In the above style tag, the selector is h2 and the property is 
color whose value is blue. Hence, wherever <h2> tag is used in the 
body section of the web document, the element content within the <h2> 
tag will be rendered as blue by the browser. But the default color is 
black. For a selector there may be more attributes and semicolon is 
used to separate the attributes. 

<style> 

h2 { colonred; 

font-size:12pt; 

font-family :arial; 

} 
</style> 

Now the formatting style of <h2> tag is very much changed 

5.4 Body Section 

A pair of body tags <body> and </body> is used to identify the 
body section. The body section of a web document can contain many 
HTML tags. Some tags are used to format a line of text. Some tags 
are used to insert images, tables and forms and to create hyper links. 
The most frequently used tags and their attributes are described here. 

5.4.1 Body tag 

As already mentioned, a body tag is used to identify the body 
section. We can specify attributes to many of the HTML tags and hence 
enhancing the usage of those tags. The body tag contains several 
attributes. To change the background color of a Web page, the attribute 
bgcolor is used. 

<body bgcolor=#FFFFFF> 
</body> 

289 



The above code changes the color of the background to white. 
The attribute bgcolor has the value #FFFFFF. The hexadecimal 
number associated with the color white is #FFFFFF. The color range 
can be obtained by using the combination of Red, Green and Blue 
(RGB combination). The color values range from to 255 in decimal 
and 00 to FF in hexadecimal. The RGB combination of white is as 
follows: 

FF FF FF 
RGB 

Similarly for black, 



00 00 00 
RGB 

The color combination #99BDFF will represent a light blue color 
and #7FFFD4 is Aquamarine color. Try with different RGB color 
combinations in your browser. 

You can also use the name of the color instead of the 
corresponding RGB value to indicate some basic colors. For example, 
"black", "red", "pink", "blue", and "green" are all valid for use in place of 
RGB values. 

<body bgcolor=blue> .. </body> 

The background color of the web page can also be modified by 
using the selector as body and the property as background-color: #RGB 
(or name of the color) in the <style> tag. 



290 



Example: 

<html> 

<head> 

<style> 

body { 



} 
</style> 
<body> 



background-color: #99BDFF; 



</body> 
</html> 

The <body> tag is rendered by the web browser and the 
background color of the web page is light blue in this case. 

You can use the background attribute to load a background 
image on the Web page. 

<body background=tnlogo.gif> 

Images that are commonly supported by browsers have .gif or 
.jpg extension. We can use the text attribute to change the color of the 
text in the entire body section. 

<body text=red> 

The default text color is black, but it has been changed to the 
color red for this Web page. 

5.4.2 Heading tags 

Heading tags in the body section are different from the head 
tag of the Web document. If it is needed to provide a heading for the 
Web document, heading tags can be used. There are six heading 
tags with different font characteristics, <h1 >, <h2>, <h3>, <h4>, <h5> 
and <h6>. The <h1> tag specifies the use of first-level heading in a 
body of text. The closing tag is must for heading tags. Formatting 
returns to the default after the closing tag. 

291 



Example: 



<html> 

<head> 

<title>Heading Tags</title> 

</head> 

<body bgcolor=#99BDFF> 

<h1 >Computer</h1 ><p> 

<h2>Computer</h2><p> 

<h3>Computer</h3><p> 

<h4>Computer</h4><p> 

<h5>Computer</h5><p> 

<h6>Computer</h6><p> 

</body> 

</html> 

In the above example, a paragraph tag <p> Is used which is 
explained in the section 1 0.4.3. See the following screen to understand 
the various font characteristics of heading tags. 



h1 h2 h3 

I I I 



h4 h5 h6 



^ Hgadinq Taasr - Micf^qsoFt !rr|tEriie1: ^milorts 



Hie EiJilt yfaw Favorites. Tno ». 'He p 



Uc,d 



— ^ 1^1 lLI 



Aiddfess 1^ C;\Doi;rjFTiBnts and 



Com [ niter 

CoitiiJiitei 



Bettini is\Adnni nistrato 



5&srth 



\DesW:cp\SAM>LE,htm 



Tra';' 3Htesv 



Ctunffut^ 



^^M^la 



292 



The font size for h1 is very big and for h6 is very small. The h2 is 
second-level and h3 is third-level and so on. To centre the heading in a 
Web page, an "align" attribute can be used. 

<h1 align=center>Computer</h1> 

A style attribute can also be used with some HTML tags to 
change the characteristics of the tag on which it is applied. If the style 
is used as an attribute, it will affect only that tag in which it is specified. 

Example: 

<h2 style="color:pink">This text will be rendered in pink</h2> 

The element content of h2 tag is now rendered in pink color. 

5.4.2 Other HTML tags 

The general syntax of any HTML tag is as follows: 

<tagname attribute=value>element content</tagname> 

The most predominant tags are described below: 

Paragraph Tag 

The paragraph tag <p> defines a paragraph. It starts a new 
paragraph in a new line. By default, the paragraphs are aligned to the 
left side of the Web page. The align attribute of the paragraph tag 
allows you to align the paragraph to right, center or left or to justify it. 

<p align=center>Computer</p> 

Break Tag 

The break tag <br> is used to insert a line break. The break 
tag need not have any attributes and a corresponding closing tag.The 
<br> tag is an empty tag and it does not have a closing tag. 

293 



Bold, Underline and Italic tags 

The bold tag <b> formats text in boldface. The tag <u> underlines 
the text and the tag <i> italicizes text. These tags must need 
corresponding closing tags. If you are not providing the closing tags, 
the effect will continue till the end of the Web page. 

Center and Horizontal Ruler tags 

The center tag <center> is used to center the text, image and 
the other contents until a closing </center> tag is encountered. The 
horizontal ruler <hr> tag inserts a horizontal line. 

Font Tag 

The <font> tag can be used to render the text in specific font type, 
size and color. In most web browsers, the default font type for an HTML 
document is Times New Roman. The <font> tag can be used with its 
face, size and color attributes, to change the font type of characters to 
be displayed by a web browser. 

Example: 

<font face="arial" size=4pt color=#000000>4PT font size 
rendered in Arial Type in black color</font> 

The output will be: 

4PT font size rendered in Arial Type in black color 

The face attribute directs the browser to render text in a specified 
font face or font family. The size attribute is used to change the relative 
size of the font. The color attribute specifies the color of the text 
rendered. 



294 



Image Tag 

To insert a graphic, an <img> tag can be used. This tag must 
have an attribute src. The src stands for "source". The value of the src 
attribute is the URL of the image you want to display on your page. 
The image tag is an empty tag, ie., it does not have a closing tag. 

<img src=tnlogo.gif> 

To control the size of an image, the width and height attributes are 
used. 

<img src=tnlogo.gif wiclth=100 height=120> 

You can make the image larger or smaller by changing the values 
in the "width" and "height" attributes of the <img> tag. 

Aligning Images within Text 

Text messages can be followed by an image. By default, the text 
messages are aligned at bottom. The following <img> tag 

<img src=tnlogo.gif>Government of Tamil Nadu Emblem 

will format the page as follows: 



■3 C:\rama\sample.html - lYlicrasoft interriQl EKplorer 



Pib' fidit View Etivorites Tools bie.Ip 



f"a&c- * J ^ 3 I •^Sesfdi- l^iFavoftes =©MSif Qj I i^ 



AtttBSS t@Siyamal5aniplE.h£ml 




^^^^ Government oFTaTnil Nadu Ernbiem 



295 



The text after the image is aligned at bottom by default. To align 
the text in the middle or at the top which follows the image, use the 
following HTML code and see the output 

<img src=tnlogo.gif align=middle>Government of Tamil Nadu 
Emblem 

<P> 

<lmg src=tnlogo.gif align=top>Government of Tamil Nadu 
Emblem 



^C:^ 


rama\samplB.html - Microsoft Internet Explorer 


' Pile 


pdit ViBW Favor itE£ Tools HSja 


iH'fl= 


.:' * '3 ^ ^ 1 ^3Ba^J:h l^iFavDfHtes ^imB- ^ ! ^ d 


Address igciyamaVsgrnplahefnl 




^ICovernment of Tamil Nadu Emblem 


feF 


£ 


"ES^ Government of Tamil Nadu Emblem 


% 


IJ 


^ 


^''' 



If the align attribute of the image is set to "left", the image will go 
to the left of the text or if the align attribute is set to right, the image will 
go the right of the text. Try the following code with your browser. As- 
sume any image. 



296 



<html> 
<body> 

<P> 

<img src ="tnlogo.gif" align ="left" width="100" 

height="50"> 

The align attribute of the image is set to "left". The image will 

go to the left of this text. </p> 

<br> 

<P> 

<img src ="tnlogo.gif" align ="right" wiclth="100" 

height="50"> 

The align attribute of the image is set to "right". The image 

will go to the right of this text. 

</p> 

</body> 

</html> 

Anchor Tag 

The anchor <a> tag is used to create a hyperlink to another 
document. When the user clicks the element content between <a> 
and </a> tags, the browser opens the page identified by the href 
attribute. The href attribute indicates the URL for the hyperlink. The 
<a> tag links the user to another location within the same HTML 
document or to another URL. The following code creates a hyperlink 
to another document. 

<a href ="http://www.yahoo.com">Yahoo Home Page</a> 

We can make the browser to open the Web page in a new 
window by specifying the target window. The target window can be 
identified as _blank, _top, _self, or _parent. 

A hypertext link can consist of text, an image, or a combination 
of both. 

297 



The following code makes you to click an image "tnlogo.gif" which 
will link you to the home page of Government of Tamil Nadu web site. 

<body> 

To view Government of Tamil Nadu Home Page, elicit tlie 

Government's logo. 

<P> 

<a href = "http://www.tn.gov.in" > <img src=tnlogo.gif></a> 

</p> 

</body> 

Try the above HTML code in your browser and when you move the 
mouse cursor over the Government's logo, the cursor changes into 
hand symbol and if you click on the image, you will see the Government 
of Tamil Nadu Web page on your browser. To test this, your computer 
should be connected with the Internet. 

It is also possible to create links to different parts of the same 
Web document. To do that, first we must place a pointer in the document 
where we want to link to. The name attribute of <a> tag is used for this 
purpose. The pointer looks like 

<a name="Department"> 

Then <a href="#Department"> tag can be used to link to that 
part. 

For example, you want to have a link from the University section 
to the Department section on the same Web page. Right before 
"Department" you need to type <a name="Department">. At the 
University section of your page, add the following link: 

<a href="#Department">. The # symbol tells the browser to 
look for the link within the same document instead of looking for an- 
other file. 

298 



Bgsound Tag 

The bgsound <bgsound> tag directs the browser to play a 
sound file. The audio file should be specified using the src attribute. 
The number of times the audio file to be played can also be specified. 
The acceptable audio file formats are: .au, .wav, and .mid. 

The code to introduce a background sound in your Web 
document is: 

<bgsound src=music.au loop="infinite"> 

The loop attribute specifies the number of times the audio file is 
played. The value "infinite" directs the browser to play the sound 
indefinitely. 

To play a movie in the browser, the <img> tag can be used with 
dynsrc attribute. 

<img dynsrc=music.dat width=150 height=150> 

The music.dat is a video file. The player width and height are 
specified as attributes of the <img> tag. 

5.4.2 Advanced HTML tags 

Lists 

There are three kinds of lists in HTML: 

• Unordered lists <ul> .... </ul> 

• Ordered lists <ol> ....</ol> 

• Definition lists <dl> ....</dl> 



299 



Unordered Lists 

This list starts with an opening list <ul> tag and ends the list 
with a closing list </ul> tag. Between the <ul> and </ul>, you enter the 
<li> (list item) tag followed by the individual item. The <li> tag identifies 
an item in a list. No closing </li> tag is needed. For example: 

<ul> 

<li> Name 
<li> Phone 
<li> ID 
</ul> 

In the web browser, the three list items are appearing as follows: 

• Name 

• Phone 

• ID 

Ordered Lists 

An ordered list is similar to an unordered list, except it uses 
<ol> instead of <ul>: 

<ol> 

<li>Primary School 
<li>Elementary School 
<li>High School 
</ol> 

The output will be: 

1 . Primary School 

2. Elementary School 

3. High School 

300 



Definition Lists 

A definition list starts with <dl> and ends with </dl>. It creates a 
list with no bullets or numbers. The definition list consists of a definition 
term <dt> tag and a definition-definition <dd> tag. The definition is 
indented below the definition term. 

A definition list may be as follows: 

<dl> 

<dt> Protocol :</dt> 

<dd>A system of rules and procedures governing 

communication between two devices 
</dd><p> 

<dt> Pretty Good Privacy:</dt> 
<dd>lt is a program that encrypts files</dd> 
</dl> 

The browser formats the above HTML code and displays like: 

Protocol: 

A system of rules and procedures governing communications 
between two devices 

Pretty Good Privacy: 

It is a program that encrypts files 

Table Tag 

The <table> tag is used to create a table on a Web document. 
The table row tag (<tr>) is used to insert a new row in the table. The 
table header tag (<th>) is used to insert a new cell inside a table row 
to represent the column heading. The table data (<td>) tag inserts a 
new cell inside a table row to represent an entry (value) in the table. 
The border property of the table tag is used to create a border around 
all the cells in the table. The bgcolor property is used to assign a 
color to the entire table. There can be as many rows and columns as 
you want and as will fit on the screen. If you want a cell to span more 
than one column, enclose it 

301 



in <td colspan=x></td>, where x indicates the number of columns to 
span. Similarly, <td rowspan=x> </td> will cause the cell to span x 
rows. 

The cellspacing attribute refers to the space between cells and 
should be in pixels. The cellpadding attribute refers to the spacing 
within the cell in pixels (the space between the cell walls and the contents 
of the cell). 

Example: 

<table border=2 cellspacing=10 cellpadding=10> 

<tr> 

<td width=50 align=center>Rama</td> 

<td width=50 align=center>Sita</td> 

</tr> 

</table> 

The above code will produce the output as follows: 



m 



"Rama 



^^ta- 



We can represent the table of roll numbers and the names of 
the candidates in a web document as follows: 



<html> 

<body> 

<table border=2> 

<tr><th>RollNo</th><th>Name</th></tr> 

<tr><td>1 001 </td><td>Rama</td></tr> 

<tr><td>1002</td><td>Sita</td></tr> 

</table> 



</body></html> 



302 



In the above example, table headers are used to represent the 
column headings using <th> and </th> tags. The above document will 
produce the result as follows: 



Roll No, Name 


p 


il'^1' Rama 




!10P2 Sit^ 


— 





Form Tag 

Forms are used to receive information from the user. Forms 
are commonly used to allow users to register on a Web site, to log in to 
a Web site, to order a product, and to send feedback. In search engines, 
forms are used to accept the keywords for search. The <form> tag is 
used to create a form. Forms contain many types of form elements, 
such as text boxes, radio buttons, check boxes, buttons and drop-down 
lists. The form has a special element, which is submit button, which 
will submit the entries of a form to a server application to process the 
entries. Each element in the form is assigned a name using the name 
attribute. Users enter values into the text boxes, or make selections 
from the radio buttons, check boxes, and drop down lists. The values 
they enter or select are passed with the name of the corresponding 
form element to the Web server. 

The important attributes used with the <form> tag are method 
and action attributes. The method attribute of the form tag is used to 
identify how the form element names and values will be sent to the 
server. The get method will append the names of the form elements 
and their values to the U RL. The post method will send the names and 
values of the form elements as packets. 

The action attribute identifies the server side program or script 
that will process the form. The action will be the name of a Common 
Gateway Interface (CGI) program written in programming language 

called Perl or Java servlets or Active Server Pages. 

303 



The general syntax of the <form> tag is 

<form method=get action="serverscript"> 

A form element can be created by using an <input> tag, which 
is a form related tag. The name attribute is used to name the input 
element. The type attribute identifies the format of the input tag. The 
possible type attributes are text, password, hidden, checkbox, 
submit, reset, file, image and button. The type "text" attribute creates 
a text box field. The type "hidden" attribute creates a form field that is 
not visible in the browser. The type "submit" attribute creates a submit 
button and when user clicks this button, the form elements' names and 
their corresponding values are sent to the server side program 
specified in the action attribute of the form tag. The value attribute 
provides a default value for the input tag. The value will be displayed 
with the form element in the browser. 

A sample HTML form is shown below: 

<form method=post action="server side program name"> 
<input type=text name=empname value=rama> 
<input type=text name=age value=23> 
<input type=submit> 
</form> 

The above HTML form has two text fields with default values 
and submitted to the server side program when the user clicks the 
submit button. The server side program processes the submitted values 
and sends the results back to the browser or stores the received values 
on the database. 

Frame Tag 

Frames divide a web page into sections that each has a different 
HTML source page and their own set of scroll bars. They can be 
useful for any site that requires part of the screen to remain static while 

304 



the remainder of the screen can be scrolled. One example is 
site navigation where links can be placed in one frame and the scrolling 
page content is placed in another. With frames, we can put a number 
of HTML pages into a single window; each of frames can display a 
page. Frames are defined using <frameset>... </frameset> tags. 
The <frameset> tag has two modifiers: rows and cols to define the 
size of each frame. A Web page with frames should not have body 
section. The <body> tag and <frameset> tag cannot come together. 

<html> 

<frameset rows="64,*"> 

<frame src="top.html" name="banner" scrolling="no" 

noresize> 
<frameset cols="150,*"> 
<frame src="menu.html" name="contents"> 
<frame src="home.html" name="main"> 
</frameset> 
</frameset> 
</html> 

The attribute rows="64,*" means that the first frame will take 
up 64 rows of the window and the second frame will take up the rest. 
An asterisk means that the row will take up whatever space is left. In 
the above example, the height of the 64 rows is the height of the 64 
pixels put together one by one. We can use percentage to replace 
length. For example: rows="30%,60%". Actually there are two rows 
in the web page. The first row (ie., the first frame) is loaded with the file 
top.html. We can assign a name to each frame using name attribute. 
Naming the frame is useful for future reference The src attribute tells 
which page will be loaded in the frame. The scrolling attribute allows 
us to control the scroll bars on the frame. This attribute has the value 
"yes|no|auto". The value "yes" forces the frame to have scroll bars 
always. The value "no" forces the frame to have no scroll bars. The 
value "auto" allows the browser to decide if scroll bar is necessary. The 
default value is "auto". The attribute noresize does not allow you to 
resize the frame and it makes the frame fixed. 

305 



If the files top.html, menu.html and home.html have the following 
code (each line in one file respectively), 

<h2>TOP</h2> <!— top.html — > 
<h2>MENU</h2> <!— menu.html — > 
<h2>HOME</h2> <!— home.html — > 

the above frame based web page will be displayed as follows: 



* Netscape 



.File £ciit v;iBw ^o _£Qmm[itliEa,tflr ^sip. 



^ 



Reload Hoc 



■m 



Se-arch Neisc-ape. 






'J Baakrpgi+ls jp LacaC'Dri:jfile:///c|Aarn3/sarfiple2.hlml 

§) FreeAOLS-Unl ^IhstantMeSMge gi WebHgil §1 Rodib ^;§ Pesple !§ Yellow Pages §J Download [§ Cai 



TOP 



MSNU 



HOME 



Each frame can be further subdivided into rows and columns. 
The main advantage of HTML frames is that documents can be pre- 
sented in multiple views, which may be independent windows or 
subwindows. Multiple views offer web page designers a way to keep 
certain information visible, while other views are scrolled or replaced. 

5.5 Creating Web pages with Microsoft FrontPage 

Microsoft FrontPage is the Web authoring program for Microsoft 
Windows. It is the most widely used Web authoring application. 



306 



i 



-0 



a^-*-- 



5.5.1 Views 

Page view gives you a WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You 
Get) editing environment for creating and editing web pages. Folders 
view lists all of the files and folders in your Web for easy management. 
Reports view identifies problems with pages and links in the Web. 
Navigation view lists the navigation order of the site and allows you 
to change the order that a user would view the pages. Hyperlinlts 
view allows you to organize the links in the Web pages. Tasl^s view 
provides a grid for inputting tasks you need to complete in your Web. 

5.5.2 Creating a Web Using the Web Wizard 

Open FrontPage and select File|New|Web... from the menu 
bar or click the small down arrow next to the New button on the standard 
toolbar and select Web. 

307 



5C MicTosbTt Fi'drltRaiBE 




2. Select the type of Web you want to create. It Is usually best to 
create a simple One Page Web to which you can add additional blank 
pages, as you need them. Enter a location for the Web in the box 
provided beginning with "http://". This is the location where you can 
preview the Web on your computer. It will need to be copied to the 
server to be viewed to the world on the WWW. 



|j^3 



Emptv Web 



irporatf 
esen... 



Corporate 
Presen... 



1 



Customer Discussion Options 

Support Web Web Wizard Specifv the looation of thi 



Import Web Personal Web Project Web 
Wizard 



jhttpi/'/webs/' 

I Add to current Web 
I Secure connection 

Description 

^m Create a new web with 



3. Click OK and wait for FrontPage to finish creating the Web. 

Now, explore the created Web. Click Folder view to see the initial 
page (default.htm) that was created along with two folders. The "im- 
ages" folder is where you will place all your graphics and photos. 
Click on Reports view to see a list of reports for the site. As you con 
construct your Web, this page will be much more useful. From here, 
you can identify and correct broken hyperlinks. 
View the navigation layout of the Web by clicking Navigation view. Right 
now, there is only one page listed (the home page). As more pages 
are added, this page becomes helpful to see how all your pages are 
linked together. 

Hyperlinks view allows you to manage the links on your pages. 
Make pages and save them, marking them as completed in the task 
view. Click Folders view to locate and open the next page to work on. 

308 



FrontPage provides many individual page templates that can 
be added to any Web. To open a Web you have already created, se- 
lect File|Open| Web... from the menu bar. Select the web folder from 
the list and click Open. You can save all the pages within the Web that 
was created by the FrontPage. The FrontPage will automatically pro- 
vide the HTML code for all the pages created by it. 

5.5.3 Adding Text to your Web Page 

Using text in FrontPage seems to be the same as using text in 
any other word processor. However, there are a few differences. 

1 . You cannot create indented paragraphs 

2. The program allows you to select from a series of fonts. 
However, they may not always display correctly on another 
computer that does not have that font. 

The descriptions of the various text editor buttons are shown 
below. You must first select the text in order to change the text using 

t hese buttons. 

JTinosNewRoniv) 3 Pull down menu that allows you to select vari- 
ni iR fonts. Be sure to check these out through your browser. 
X a" ClickingonthelargeA, will increase your font size, clicking on 
the smaller A will decrease your font size. 
B / u B=Bold, l=ltalics, U=Underline 

^ This button allows you to select a color for your font. After clicking 
on this button you will have the choice of several colors, and by clicking 
"Define Colors" you will have even more colors, 
g g ^ These tools allow you to select alignment for your text, (left, 
center, rinhfi 

== ■= *=F =^ These tools let you select a numbered list, bulleted list, 
push the text to the left, or push the text to the right. 

5.5.4 Creating a Table 

On web pages, tables can serve many functions. 

A quick way to create a small table is using the table button on 
the standard toolbar. Click the button and drag the mouse over the 
grid, highlighting the cells that should appear on the table. When the 
table size has been selected, click the mouse button again. 



309 





|^|.^,r^,i*^|— l^^l^ll^O 


- 1 B J U 1 & ^ 


SgHHH 


^ 


1 








\ 2 by 2 Table 





When the selection is made as shown in the figure above, a table with 
2 rows and 2 columns will appear on the page as shown below: 

i:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: 



To change the table properties: 

• Select Table|Properties|Table from the menu bar to modify the 
table's properties. 

• SelectTables|Properties|Cell from the menu bar or Cell Properties 
from the shortcut menu to change the properties of the table 
cells. Begin by highlighting the cells whose properties will be 
changed. 

• Select Table|Merge Cells to merge two or more selected cells. 

• To split the cell again, select the cell and choose Table|Split Cell 
from the menu bar. 

FrontPage mal<es things easier and it will provide a way to design the 
Web site in an effective manner. Similarly, it is easy to insert an image and 
align the same properly in your Web document. Frames and forms are 
also included using the menu bar commands and tool bar buttons. All you 
need is a practical experience of using FrontPage to create your own Web 
site. 
I Fill in the blanks 

1 . The abbreviation HTTP stands for and 

the abbreviation HTML stands for 

2. A Web document starts with tag and 

ends with tag. 

3. The two parts of a web document are ■ 



section and section. 

4. The meta tags are always placed within the 

— section of the Web page. 

5. The attribute is used along with <body> 

tag to change the bacl<ground color of the web document. 

6. The <body> tag uses attribute to load a 

bacl<ground image on the web page and ■ 



attribute is used to change the color of the text in the entire body 
section. 

There are heading tags with different font 

characteristics. 

310 



8. HTML tables organize data into 

9. Tine table data <td> cells are aligned by 

default and the table header <th> cells are 

— by default. 

1 0. When a style tag is used in the , it will 

change the default characteristics of the tag in the entire web 
document wherever that tag is used. 

11 . If the style is used as an attribute, that is, ■ 



style, it will affect only that tag in which it is specified. 

12. The tags , and — 

etc., are not having closing tags. 

13. To control the size of an image, the attributes ■ 



■ and are used along with <img> tag. 

14. The target loads the web page in a new 

blank browser window and the target 

loads the web page in the same window. 

15. If <frameset> tag is used, the tag cannot 

appear in the same web document. 

1 6. The tags that do not have corresponding ending tags are called 
tags. 

1 7. Three types of lists that are used to organize the information in 

the Web pages are , 

— , and . 

18. The tag is used to create links in Web 

document. Links are also known as . 

19. The popular image formats supported by the Web browsers are 
and . 

20. view, view, and 

view are the three views provided by the Front page editor 

for a Web page. 

II State whether the following statements are True or False 

1 The HyperText Markup Language is the standard language used 
for creating web pages. 

2 Both <body> tag and <frameset> tag can be used in a same 
Web document. 

3 The background image in a Web document can be set using 
<img>tag. 

4 Use of <head> tag is must in every Web document. 

5 The <style> tag is used only in the heading section. 

6 The protocol that Web clients and servers use to communicate 
with each other is called WWW. 

311 



7 HTML tags can be enclosed in simple parentheses. 

8 All the tags in HTML are having attributes. 

9 The table headers are optional in HTML tables. 

1 The <meta> tag is the main HTML element that the search 
engines use to group the Web pages. 

Ill Write Answers for the following questions 



1 . How do you specify global styles for HTML tags? 

2 How do you make a Web page to reload automatically for 
every 1 seconds? What is the need for such reloading? 

3 Discuss the attributes associated with the <meta> tag and 
explain their purpose. 

4 How do you make an image as a hyperlink? 

5 Differentiate between the <style> tag and the style attribute 
used with some other tag. 

6 What are the attributes used along with the <font> tag? 

7 How do you align images within text? 

8 How do you play background music in a Web document? 

9 How do you play movie in a Web browser? 

1 What are the different types of lists offered by HTML? 

1 1 Write HTML code to create a table of 3 rows and 3 columns 
with appropriate border and show an image in each cell. 

12 Design a Web site for you using frames. Include personal 
information page, educational details page, hobbies page and 
your achievements page with appropriate hyperlinks. 

1 3 Discuss the attributes used along with the <frame> tag. 

1 4 How do you create a Web site using Front Page editor? 

1 5 How do you add text, image and table using Front Page editor? 



312